TBI30 SAP Business Intelligence Solutions with SAP Business Warehouse

TBI30 SAP Business Intelligence Solutions with SAP Business Warehouse

Date Training Center Instructors

Education Website

Participant Handbook Course Version: 96 Revision A Course Duration: 5 Days Material Number: 50106926

An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work

Copyright Copyright © 2012 SAP AG. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice. Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors.

Trademarks •

Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

•

IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®, S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.

•

ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.

•

INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated.

•

UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.

•

Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®, VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc.

•

HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

•

JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.

•

JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape.

•

SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Disclaimer THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE, INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS CONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOST PROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDED SOFTWARE COMPONENTS.

g2012327104953

About This Handbook This handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of this course, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.

Typographic Conventions American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following typographic conventions are also used. Type Style

Description

Example text

Words or characters that appear on the screen. These include field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as well as menu names, paths, and options. Also used for cross-references to other documentation both internal and external.

2012

Example text

Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles of graphics, and tables

EXAMPLE TEXT

Names of elements in the system. These include report names, program names, transaction codes, table names, and individual key words of a programming language, when surrounded by body text, for example SELECT and INCLUDE.

Example text

Screen output. This includes file and directory names and their paths, messages, names of variables and parameters, and passages of the source text of a program.

Example text

Exact user entry. These are words and characters that you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the documentation.

Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that you replace these words and characters with appropriate entries.

© 2012 SAP AG. All rights reserved.

iii

About This Handbook

TBI30

Icons in Body Text The following icons are used in this handbook. Icon

Meaning For more information, tips, or background

Note or further explanation of previous point Exception or caution Procedures

Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor's presentation.

iv


2012

Contents Course Overview ......................................................... vii Course Goals ...........................................................vii Course Objectives .....................................................vii

Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform .. 1 SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform Overview .2 SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Business Users and Report Designers........................................................... 11 SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Data Managers .......... 16 SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Administrators ........... 19 Working in BI Launch Pad .......................................... 23

Unit 2: SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform Integration with SAP NetWeaver BW ............................................................ 43 Security in SAP BusinessObjects BI platform ..................... 44 Authorization in SAP NetWeaver BW and SAP BI Platform..... 51 Using SAP Authentication........................................... 57

Unit 3: The Information Design Tool................................. 69 The Semantic Layer .................................................. 70 Information Design Tool Overview .................................. 75 Creating Relational Universes with the Information Design Tool 88 Creating an OLAP Universe with the Information Design Tool.105 Creating Multisource Universes.................................... 111

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence ................. 129 Introduction to SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence ........130 SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence: Advanced Functions 146 Web Intelligence and SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Data Sources............................................................160

Unit 5: SAP Crystal Reports .......................................... 187 Introduction to SAP Crystal Reports...............................189 SAP Crystal Reports 2011 ..........................................195 SAP Crystal Reports 2011 and SAP Data Sources .............217 SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise................................238 SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise and SAP BW as Data Source .............................................................259

2012


v

Contents

TBI30

Unit 6: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis ............................ 277 Introduction to Analysis .............................................279 Working with Analysis, Edition for Office – Excel Client ........287 Working with Analysis, Edition for Office – PowerPoint Client .310 Working with Analysis, Edition for OLAP .........................314 Working with SAP BEx Query Elements in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis............................................................333

Unit 7: Live Office....................................................... 351 Live Office.............................................................352

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards ....................... 371 Introduction to SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards..............372 Integration of SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards with SAP NetWeaver BW ...................................................407

Unit 9: SAP BusinessObjects Explorer ............................ 437 Understanding SAP BusinessObjects Explorer ..................438

Unit 10: BI Workspaces................................................ 459 Working with BI Workspaces in BI Launchpad...................460

Unit 11: Publications & Scheduling................................. 479 Creating a Publication ...............................................480

Unit 12: Integrating with SAP Enterprise Portal ................. 491 Integrating BI Platform Content into SAP Enterprise Portal ....492 Integration of SAP Business Objects with Enterprise Portal ...500 Comparing Document Viewer and Document List Portal Component........................................................507

Unit 13: Lifecycle Management ...................................... 513 Lifecycle Management ..............................................514

Unit 14: Translation Management ................................... 529 Multilingual Reporting with the Translation Management Tool .530 Resources that can be translated..................................537 Translating a Business Layer.......................................541 Translating Documents..............................................544

vi


2012

Course Overview Integrating SAP NetWeaver BW with SAP Business Intelligence Solutions an instructor-led training that provides detailed knowledge on the integration of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence tools with SAP NetWeaver 7.X. You will learn how to utilize SAP BusinessObjects client tools and create universes, reports, ad hoc analysis documents, or dashboards with basic and some advanced functions. In addition, you will learn how the metadata from the underlying SAP system is mapped to SAP Crystal Reports, Web Intelligence, Dashboards, Live Office and Analysis.

Target Audience This course is intended for the following audiences: •

SAP Netweaver BW customers, project team members, and technical consultants

Course Prerequisites Required Knowledge •

Fundamental knowledge in SAP NetWeaver BW 7.X.

Course Goals This course will prepare you to: •

Have hands-on experience in a SAP BusinessObjects BI platform / SAP Netweaver BW environment.

Course Objectives After completing this course, you will be able to: • •

2012

Describe the integration of SAP NetWeaver BW and SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence tools. Describe how the SAP NetWeaver BW concepts are being mapped to SAP BusinessObjects software.


vii

Course Overview

•

viii

TBI30

Describe the concept of the semantic layer and universes, SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence, Analysis, Dashboards, and SAP Crystal Reports. Also connectivity and security integration with SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform, Publications, and integration into SAP NetWeaver Portal are in focus of this course.


2012

Unit 1 SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform Unit Overview Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • •

Explain the definition of Business Intelligence Describe the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence client applications by role Explain the architecture of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform. List the various SAP BusinessObjects client tools for Business Users and Report Designers Use BI Launch Pad as an entry point to launch different report types Explain the Data Manager Role in a SAP BusinessObjects environment List the various client tools for SAP BusinessObjects BI administrators Explain the purpose of BI Launch Pad as a central point of access for BI users Set personal preferences in BI Launch Pad Work with objects in BI Launch Pad

Unit Contents Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform Overview..2 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Business Users and Report Designers ......................................................................... 11 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Data Managers........... 16 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Administrators ............ 19 Lesson: Working in BI Launch Pad............................................ 23 Exercise 1: Logon to the Systems ........................................ 33 Exercise 2: Navigate in BI Launch Pad................................... 37

2012


1

Unit 1: SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform

TBI30

Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform Overview Lesson Overview The SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence (BI) platform supports the entire range of user reporting, query and analysis, and performance management uses. Understanding this infrastructure will help you successfully administer your reporting content within SAP BusinessObjects BI.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • •

Explain the definition of Business Intelligence Describe the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence client applications by role Explain the architecture of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform.

Business Example SAP BusinessObjects tools expand the scope of BW by providing a wide range of tools and applications. SAP BusinessObjects tools support businesses by optimizing the connection between people and information. In your project you need to evaluate the alternatives and the benefits for your Business scenarios when adding SAP BusinessObjects BI platform to the existing SAP NetWeaver BW infrastructure.

What is Business Intelligence? By understanding Business Intelligence (BI), you will better comprehend how a SAP BusinessObjects BI solution addresses the BI product spectrum.

Gartner Defines Business Intelligence Gartner, Inc., a research and advisory firm that helps clients to leverage technology, coined the term “Business Intelligence” in the late 1980s. Business Intelligence, as defined by Gartner, is an iterative user-centered process that includes accessing and exploring information, analyzing this information, and developing insights and understanding that lead to improved and informed decision making. BI usage crosses the spectrum of users, both internally and externally throughout any enterprise, and includes rank-and-file workers, executives, analysts, and knowledge workers.

2


2012

TBI30

Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform Overview

Examples of internal and external BI applications include: • • •

Generating a class list for a training session Creating an employee performance review Scheduling in a healthcare setting

Benefits of Business Intelligence Business Intelligence can help organizations to: • • • • • • • • •

Identify and track key performance metric against their direct competitors and the overall market Improve customer service and target high yield accounts Streamline operations and improve supplier and warehouse operations Identify successful marketing campaigns Improve response time to market trends and customer requests Decrease query and reporting time Reduce cost and anxiety over compliance Deliver true cost of Days Sales Outstanding and services Reduce strain on IT departments

Introduction to SAP BusinessObjects BI Solution Describing SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform is a flexible, scalable, and reliable solution for delivering powerful, interactive reports to users via any web application – intranet, extranet, Internet or corporate portal. Whether it is used for distributing weekly sales reports, providing customers with personalized service offerings, or integrating critical information into corporate portals, SAP BusinessObjects BI platform delivers tangible benefits that extend across and beyond the organization. As an integrated suite for reporting, analysis, and information delivery, SAP BusinessObjects BI platform provides a solution for increasing user productivity and reducing administrative efforts.

Describing SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Client Application by Role SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform includes and/or interacts with most SAP BusinessObjects client tools. Depending on the job role, different client tools are used. The major roles in SAP BusinessObjects BI platform are: • • •

2012

Business User and Report Designer Data Manager Administrator


3


TBI30

SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Client Applications at a Glance

Figure 1: SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Client Applications at a Glance

Figure 2: SAP BusinessObjects BI Client Portfolio

4


2012

TBI30


Figure 3: Selecting the Right SAP BusinessObjects BI ClientDifferent Needs Require Different Experience

The following table identifies the common user roles and the client tools that may be used in SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform. Most Common Client Tools for Business Users and Report Designers Client Tool

Short Description

BI Launchpad (web client)

formerly InfoView main web interface for business users to view, schedule, and keep track of published BI documents

Analysis, edition for premium alternative to Business Explorer (BEx) and MS Office (excel and allows business analysts to explore multidimensional online analytical processing (OLAP) data PPT plug-in)

2012

Analysis, edition for OLAP (web client)

an online analytical processing (OLAP) tool in the BI Launch Pad portal for working with multidimensional data

BI Workspaces (web client)

formerly Dashboard Builder assembles and unifies the relevant information that users review frequently

Live Office

integrates with the Microsoft Office environment, allowing dynamically updated data to be embedded within Microsoft PowerPoint, Excel, and Word documents


5


TBI30

Web Service Query Tool

formerly Query as a Web Service allows BI queries to be used in custom web applications

Web Intelligence Desktop

Ad hoc analysis and reporting tool for business users with or without access to the SAP BusinessObjects BI platform

Web Intelligence (web client)

Ad hoc analysis and reporting tool for business users with access to the SAP BusinessObjects BI platform

SAP Crystal Reports 2011 / SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

Reporting tools used to create formatted reports and integrate them into SAP BusinessObjects BI platform

Dashboards

formerly Xcelsius tool for rapid development of data visualizations and highly interactive Dashboards through a flexible and easy to use point and click interface

Most Common Client Tools for Data Managers Tool

Short description

Information Design Tool

Enables a designer to extract, define, and manipulate metadata from relational and OLAP sources to create and deploy SAP BusinessObjects universes

Universe Design Tool Formerly Universe Designer allows data designers to combine data from multiple sources in a semantic layer that hides database complexity from users Most common client tools for Administrators

6

Tool

Short description

Central Management Console (CMC)

Main web interface to perform administrative tasks in the SAP BusinessObjects BI platform

Central Configuration Manager

Server troubleshooting and node management tool


2012

TBI30


Lifecycle Management Console (web client)

Provides a centralized view to monitor the progress of the entire lifecycle process

Translation Management Tool

Defines multilingual universes and manages translation of universes, and Web Intelligence documents and prompts

Upgrade Management Tool

Guides administrators through the process of importing users, groups, and folders from previous versions of the BI platform

SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform Architecture The architecture of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform is designed to meet the needs of virtually any BI deployment, and is flexible enough to grow from several users with a single tool, to tens of thousands of users with multiple tools and interfaces. Developers can integrate SAP BusinessObjects BI platform into your organization’s other technology systems by using web services, Java, or .NET application programming interfaces (APIs).

Figure 4: Architecture

2012


7


TBI30

Describing the Conceptual Tiers of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform can be thought of as a series of conceptual tiers.

Figure 5: Conceptual Tiers

Web Tier The Web Tier contains web applications deployed to a Java web application server. Web applications provide SAP BusinessObjects BI platform functionality to users through a web browser. Examples of web applications include the Central Management Console (CMC) administrative web interface and BI Launch Pad. The web tier also contains Web Services. Web Services provides SAP BusinessObjects BI platform functionality to software tools via the web application server, such session authentication, user privilege management, scheduling, search, administration, reporting, and query management. For example, Live Office is a product that uses Web Services to integrate SAP BusinessObjects BI platform reporting into Microsoft Office products.

Management Tier The management tier coordinates and controls all of the components that make up SAP BusinessObjects BI platform. It is comprised of the Central Management Server (CMS) and the Event Server. The CMS provides maintains security and configuration information, sends service requests to servers, manages auditing, and maintains the CMS system database. The Event Server manages file based events, which occur in the storage tier.

Processing Tier The processing tier analyzes data and produces reports. This is the only tier that accesses the databases that contain report data.

8


2012

TBI30


Storage Tier The storage tier is responsible to handling files, such as documents and reports. The Input File Repository Server manages files that contain information to be used in reports, such as the following file types: .rpt, .car, .exe, .bat, .js, .xls, .doc, .ppt, .rtf, .txt, .pdf, .wid, .rep, .unv. The Output File Repository Server manages reports created by the system, such as the following file types: .rpt, .csv, .xls, .doc, .rtf, .txt, .pdf, .wid, .rep. Note: The Output File Repository Server is involved when users execute the reports and save physical instances of the completed report. The storage tier also handles report caching to save system resources when users access reports.

2012


9


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the definition of Business Intelligence • Describe the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence client applications by role • Explain the architecture of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform.

10


2012

TBI30

Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Business Users and Report Designers

Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Business Users and Report Designers Lesson Overview This lesson you provides an overview of the most common client tools that are used by business users and report designers.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • •

List the various SAP BusinessObjects client tools for Business Users and Report Designers Use BI Launch Pad as an entry point to launch different report types

Business Example Business Users in your organization need reporting tools that meet their requirements. You need to identify which options are available with SAP BusinessObjects for which main target groups and if these target groups should create own reports or just open prepared report documents.

SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Business Users and Report Designers For user interaction, the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform includes a large set of tools and options. The most common user interface is BI Launch Pad. BI Launch Pad provides the user with the complete set of capabilities to leverage all of the features and functions of the BI client tools. It also delivers functionality such as viewing, scheduling, and broadcasting of reports and analytics to the user.

2012


11


TBI30

Figure 6: SAP BusinessObjects Clients for Business Users and Report Designers

The following table summarizes some of the common client tools that are used by business users and report designers. Tool

Description

BI Launch Pad BI Launch Pad (formerly InfoView) is the main web (web client) interface for business users to view, schedule, and keep track of published business intelligence (BI) documents. BI Launch Pad can access, interact with, and export, any type of business intelligence including reports, analytics, dashboards, scorecards, and strategy maps. It simplifies information delivery and delivers secure access to BI content and tools, such as BI Workspaces, SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence, SAP BusinessObjects Explorer, and SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP. Analysis, edition for MS Office (excel and PPT plug-in)

12

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office, is a plug-in that integrates into Microsoft Excel and Microsoft PowerPoint to be used as an online analytical processing (OLAP) tool. It provides access to a range of OLAP data sources, and also allows users to combine information from different systems within a single Workspace.


2012

TBI30

2012


Tool

Description

Analysis, edition for OLAP (web client)

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP (formerly Voyager) is an online analytical processing (OLAP) tool for working with multidimensional data. It provides access to a range of OLAP data sources, and can also combine information from different OLAP data sources within a single Workspace.

BI Workspaces (web client)

BI Workspaces (formerly Dashboard Builder) helps you track your business activities and performance using modules (templates for data) and Business Intelligence (BI) Workspaces (for viewing data in one or more modules). Modules and BI Workspaces provide information needed to adjust business rules as conditions change. It helps you track and analyze key business data. It also supports group decision-making and analysis via integrated collaboration and workflow capabilities. BI Workspaces enables you to organize content in pages, create mash ups of Business Intelligence (BI) content, and present the information in a way that is tailored to the role of the user, either for personal use or for sharing with others

Live Office

SAP BusinessObjects Live Office integrates with the Microsoft Office environment, allowing dynamically updated data to be embedded within Microsoft PowerPoint, Excel, and Word documents. In addition, you can share your documents with others over the web for collaborative decision-making.

Web Service Query Tool

The Web Service Query Tool (formerly Query as a Web Service) allows Business Intelligence (BI) queries to be used in custom web applications. Business users create their own queries from an universe connection and publish them as web services so they can be incorporated into client applications.

Web Intelligence Desktop

SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Desktop is an ad hoc analysis and reporting tool for business users with or without access to the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform. It allows business users to access and combine data from relational, online analytical processing (OLAP), spreadsheet, or text file sources, using familiar business terms in a drag-and-drop interface. Workflows allow very broad or very narrow questions to be analyzed, and for further questions to be asked at any point in the analysis workflow. Web Intelligence Desktop users can continue working with Web Intelligence document files (.wid) even when unable to connect to a Central Management Server (CMS).


13


14

TBI30

Tool

Description

Web Intelligence (web client)

SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence is an ad hoc analysis and reporting tool for business users with access to the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform. It allows business users to access and combine data from relational, online analytical processing (OLAP), spreadsheet, or text file sources, using familiar business terms in a drag-and-drop interface. Workflows allow very broad or very narrow questions to be analyzed, and for further questions to be asked at any point in the analysis workflow.

SAP Crystal Reports 2011

SAP Crystal Reports 2011 is a Windows-based report design tool used to create powerful reports that can be published in the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform.

SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise is a Java-based report design tool used to create and integrate powerful reports in the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform.

Dashboards

SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards (formerly Xcelsius) is a tool for data visualization and the creation of dynamic, interactive dashboards. Data can be updated dynamically from the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform, and exported to a variety of different formats that can be viewed by data consumers in standard formats, such as PowerPoint, PDF, or Flash.


2012

TBI30


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • List the various SAP BusinessObjects client tools for Business Users and Report Designers • Use BI Launch Pad as an entry point to launch different report types

2012


15


TBI30

Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Data Managers Lesson Overview This lesson provides an overview of the most common client tools that are used by data managers.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: •

Explain the Data Manager Role in a SAP BusinessObjects environment

Business Example The underlying data for reports in your company were clearly identified. Based on this information you need to provide a semantic layer where the business users can easily identify the objects they need.

SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Data Managers

Figure 7: SAP BusinessObjects Clients for Data Managers

The following table summarizes some of the common client tools that are used by data managers.

16


2012

TBI30

Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Data Managers

Tools

Description

Information Design Tool

The Information Design Tool is an SAP BusinessObjects metadata design environment that enables a designer to extract, define, and manipulate metadata from relational and OLAP sources to create and deploy UNX universes. The information design tool is the SAP BusinessObjects design environment for creating and publishing new SAP BusinessObjects universes and connections. The tool lets you take advantage of these major new universe design features: • • • • • •

Universe Design Tool

2012

Dimensional universes that support OLAP dimensions and hierarchies Multisource universes that federate multiple relational data sources A design environment that facilitates designer teamwork and universe resource sharing A security editor for universe data and metadata Extended connection management Easier management of repository resources

The Universe Design Tool (formerly Universe Designer) allows data designers to combine data from multiple sources in a semantic layer (UNV universe) that hides database complexity from users. It abstracts the complexity of data by using business rather than technical language to access, manipulate, and organize data.


17


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the Data Manager Role in a SAP BusinessObjects environment

18


2012

TBI30

Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Administrators

Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Administrators Lesson Overview This lesson provides an overview of the most common client tools that are used by administrators.


List the various client tools for SAP BusinessObjects BI administrators

Business Example Adding the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform to your existing landscape you need to evaluate which tools are available for administrative tasks.

SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Administrators The regular administrative tasks associated with SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform can be divided roughly into the following categories: •

User and group management –

Creating and managing users and groups, including their rights to folders, objects, and applications For example, an SAP BusinessObjects BI platform Administrator needs to give the appropriate rights to Data Managers and Report Designers who interact with the SAP BusinessObjects BI platform. Data Managers build universes and export them to the SAP BusinessObjects BI platform. Report Designers design reports from these universes using SAP Crystal Reports, Web Intelligence, or Analysis and can then save the reports to the SAP BusinessObjects BI platform.

•

Content Management – – – – –

2012

Adding, scheduling, and managing SAP Crystal Reports files, Web Intelligence files Managing universes, universe connections, and universe restriction sets Managing additional documents, and hyperlinks Managing workspaces and analytics Securing content


19


•

TBI30

Server Management –

Installing, configuring, and managing servers

In the area of the administration tools, the BI platform delivers several options to manage the system itself and manage the integration with other system landscapes.

Figure 8: SAP BusinessObjects Clients for Administrators

The following table summarizes some of the common tools that are used by administrators.

20

Tools

Description

Central Management Console (CMC)

The Central Management Console (CMC) is the main web interface to perform administrative tasks in the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform, including user, content, and server management. It also allows you to publish and organize content, and configure security settings.

Central Configuration Manager

The Central Configuration Manager (CCM) is a server troubleshooting and node management tool provided in two forms. In a Microsoft Windows environment, the CCM allows you to manage local and remote servers through its graphical user interface (GUI) or from a command line.


2012

TBI30

2012

Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Client Tools for Administrators

Tools

Description

Lifecycle Management Console (web client)

The Lifecycle Management Console provides a centralized view to monitor the progress of the entire lifecycle process. It is used to move content from one SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform to another of the same version.

Translation Management Tool

The Translation Management Tool defines multilingual universes and manages translation of universes and their Web Intelligence documents and prompts.

Upgrade Management Tool

The Upgrade management tool guides administrators through the process of importing users, groups, and folders from previous versions of the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform (formerly know as SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise). It also allows you to import and upgrade objects, events, server groups, repository objects, and calendars.


21


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • List the various client tools for SAP BusinessObjects BI administrators

22


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Working in BI Launch Pad

Lesson: Working in BI Launch Pad Lesson Overview This lesson provides an overview of BI Launch Pad as a central point of access for Business Intelligence users.


Explain the purpose of BI Launch Pad as a central point of access for BI users Set personal preferences in BI Launch Pad Work with objects in BI Launch Pad

Business Example As a business user in your organization you need quick-and-easy access to documents and information, to make timely and accurate decisions. You need to know how to work with objects of different type in BI Launch Pad.

Introduction to BI Launch Pad SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform comes with BI Launch Pad, a web application that acts as a window to a range of useful business information about your company. From BI Launch Pad, you can access SAP Crystal Reports, Web Intelligence documents, and other objects, and organize them to suit your preferences. The features that are available in BI Launch Pad vary by content type. In general, you can view information in your web browser, export it to other business applications (such as Microsoft Excel), and save it to a specified location. SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform also provides access to a range of analytic tools to help you explore information in more detail.

2012


23


TBI30

Figure 9: BI Launch Pad User Interface

Tabs in BI Launch Pad BI Launch Pad uses tabs to display the main navigation interfaces. Tabs display multiple pages and documents in one web browser window. BI Launch Pad has two default tabs, the Home tab and the Documents tab. Applications such as SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence, and any objects you choose to view or edit, also open in separate tabs.

Header Panel The Header panel displays the logo and the user name of the account that you used to log on to BI Launch Pad. It also provides the following options:

24

Option

Description

Applications

Lets you access various applications that plug into BI Launch Pad such as BI Workspace. Depending on your rights and license, the applications that you have access to may vary.

Preferences

Allows you to set how your information is displayed.

Help

Lets you access the online help for BI Launch Pad, or the About Help page, which contains information about the product.

Log off

Logs the user off.


2012

TBI30


Home Tab The default Home tab contains modules that let you better manage the documents and BI Launch Pad features you work with most: • • • • •

My recently viewed documents My recently run documents Unread Messages in My Inbox Unread Alerts My Applications

Administrators can also specify custom Home tabs for different users and groups using different objects. For example, a custom Home tab can be a customized dashboard, a Crystal report that the user views frequently, or a customer website. If you have the appropriate rights, you can also override the custom Home tab that the administrator has set by editing your Home tab setting in the preferences.

Documents Tab The Documents tab lets you view and manage repository objects.

Figure 10: Documents Tab

The toolbar contains menus and controls that let you view and manage objects. The Navigation panel provides a top-level view of the folders and categories in the system and lets you browse for specific objects.

2012


25


TBI30

Drawers are expandable panes in the Navigation panel that enable you to browse objects in different ways. The List panel displays a list view of the objects in a folder or category. To view the details for an object, select it and click the Details button in the toolbar. The Details panel opens on the right side of the Documents tab and displays detailed information.

Setting Preferences in BI Launch Pad Preferences determine how you log on to BI Launch Pad and what view is displayed when you do. They also determine specific settings for the various objects that you view, such as viewers for SAP Crystal Reports, view formats for Web Intelligence documents and BI Workspaces, and preferences for SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP. Note: As a best practice, you should set your preferences before you begin to work with objects in BI Launch Pad. However, depending on your deployment, your BI platform administrator may configure your system to use predetermined settings by default. Depending on the rights that your system administrator has given you, you may not be able to set your own user preferences.

Figure 11: Preferences

Setting General Preferences You can set your initial view by setting the general preferences.

26


2012

TBI30


If you want the Home tab to be displayed when you first log on, you have the following options Option

Description

Default Home tab

Displays the default view that your administrator has configured. If your administrator has not configured a default, the Home tab provided with SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform will be used.

Select Home tab

Displays a repository object that you select. Click Browse Home tab. In the Select a Custom Home tab window, select a repository object and click Open.

If you want the Documents tab to be displayed when you first log on, click Documents, and then specify which drawer and node are open by default. Under Choose columns displayed in Documents tab, you can select the summary information that you want to see for each object in the List panel. Under Set document viewing location, you can determine if documents are opened in new tabs or in new web browser windows.

Viewing and Working with Objects in BI Launch Pad All of the documents and files in your SAP BusinessObjects BI platform are considered objects. Examples of objects include hyperlinks, shortcuts, SAP Crystal Reports, and Web Intelligence documents. BI Launch Pad uses tabs to display the main navigation interfaces, the Home tab and the Documents tab, and any objects that you open for viewing or editing. When you select a document in the Documents tab for viewing or editing, it opens in its own tab. From the tab, you can launch the document in its own window if necessary. When you view a Crystal report or Web Intelligence document in BI Launch Pad, your user rights and the default settings chosen by your administrator determine the data that you see. You can view the report with data directly from the data source, the latest instance of the object, or its saved data. If you have the necessary rights, you can also refresh the report or document with new data from its data source.

2012


27


TBI30

How you view an object can affect what is displayed: •

• • •

If you view a dynamic content document (for example, a Crystal Report or a Web Intelligence document) by double-clicking the object in the List panel, the latest instance of the document opens. If the latest instance is unavailable, the object itself opens. If you view an object by clicking View → View, the object opens. If you click View → View Latest Instance, the latest instance opens. If you view a publication or program object, BI Launch Pad will display the object properties if the latest instance is unavailable.

Pinning a Tab

If you have documents that you view frequently, you can pin them for future viewing to the user interface. Pinned objects remain open as tabs the next time you log on to BI Launch Pad.

Managing Objects There are two ways in which objects are organized in SAP BusinessObjects BI platform: by folders and categories. Objects must belong to a folder, and they can only belong to one. Categories are an alternate method of organizing objects; objects do not need to be assigned to a category, and can be assigned to several categories. Folders and categories can be public (or corporate) or personal. Public or corporate folders/categories can be seen by any BI Launch Pad user who has the necessary rights, and you can add or edit objects in them only if you have the necessary rights to do so. Personal categories or your My Favorites folders are for your use; you can create new folders and categories and arrange objects within them as you wish. These are private and cannot be seen or altered by other BI Launch Pad users. Hint: Right-click the title of an object to access all of the actions you can perform on the object. If you have the necessary rights, you can create and add objects to BI Launch Pad from your local computer. BI Launch Pad also allows you to make copies of objects and save them in folders you have the necessary rights to and to move objects from one folder to another.

Sorting and Filtering Objects By default, objects are sorted alphabetically by title. However, BI Launch Pad also lets you sort and filter objects according to other criteria. When you click the column heading, the system sorts the objects in ascending order. If you click the column heading again, it sorts the objects in descending order.

28


2012

TBI30


To apply a more complex sort, point to the column header that you want to sort or filter on. A funnel icon appears adjacent to the column header name. Click the funnel icon and configure your options accordingly. Depending on the column, the available options may vary.

Searching in BI Launch Pad Platform search is an optimized search tool, which allows you to run a search by using techniques similar to that used in other search engines. It looks for matches between your input and the keyword, title, description, owner information, and content of objects. After you perform a search, it is displayed in the Search drawer.

Figure 12: Searching in BI Launch Pad

The following table describes searchable content for each object type.

2012


29


Object type SAP Crystal Reports

Web Intelligence documents

Searchable content • • • • • • •

Titles Descriptions Selection formulas Saved data Text fields Parameter values Subreports

• • • • • •

Titles Descriptions Selection formulas Universe filter names Saved data Constants in the filter conditions defined in the document Universe measure names Universe objects names Data in record set Static text in cells

• • • • Microsoft Excel files

• •

• • • Word documents

• •

• • RTF, PDF, PowerPoint, and TXT files •

30

Agnostic object

TBI30

Data Document properties (title, subject, author, company, category, keywords, and comments) Header and footer text Calculation and formula values Number and date/time values Text Document properties (title, subject, author, company, category, keywords, and comments) Header and footer text Numerical values

Text Metadata


2012

TBI30


• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

2012

Analysis views BI Workspaces Dashboard Design objects Discussions Events Flash objects Lifecycle Management Console jobs Metadata (from Information Designer) Modules Object packages Profiles Program objects Publications Universes Widgets Workspaces (created in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP)


31


32


TBI30

2012

TBI30


Exercise 1: Logon to the Systems Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Log into the SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse system and change the user password • Log into SAP BusinessObjects BI Launch Pad using SAP authentication

Business Example Before performing any task with the SAP systems and SAP BusinessObjects servers, you need to be able to log into the software using the correct credentials.

Task 1: Logon to the SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse system 1.

Use your SAP logon to access the provided SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse system.

2.

Logon to the SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse system using the following information:

3.

Field Name

Value (replace ## with your assigned group number)

Client

800

User

user##

Password

Initial Password provided by the instructor

Language

EN

Change the initial password Note: You will be prompted to change the password if this is your first attempt to log into the system.

Task 2: Logging into the SAP BusinessObjects BI Launch Pad using SAP authentication 1.

Launch SAP BusinessObjects BI Launch Pad.

2.

Log in to BI Launch Pad using the following information:

Continued on next page

2012


33


34

TBI30

Field Name


SAP System:

wdflbmtxxxx (provided by the instructor)

SAP Client:

Client provided by the instructor

User Name:

user##

Password

Your new password

Authentication

SAP


2012

TBI30


Solution 1: Logon to the Systems Task 1: Logon to the SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse system 1.

2.

Use your SAP logon to access the provided SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse system. a)

Choose Start → Programs → SAP Front end → SAP Logon.

b)

Double-click the assigned SID.

Logon to the SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse system using the following information: Field Name


Client

800

User

user##

Password

Initial Password provided by the instructor

Language

EN

a) 3.

Logon to the SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse system using the given information.

Change the initial password Note: You will be prompted to change the password if this is your first attempt to log into the system. a)

Enter your new password and remember this password for future reference.

Task 2: Logging into the SAP BusinessObjects BI Launch Pad using SAP authentication 1.

Launch SAP BusinessObjects BI Launch Pad. a)

2.

Choose Start → Programs → SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 4.0→ Custom Link to BI Launchpad.

Log in to BI Launch Pad using the following information:


2012


35


Field Name


SAP System:

wdflbmtxxxx (provided by the instructor)

SAP Client:

Client provided by the instructor

User Name:

user##

Password

Your new password

Authentication

SAP

a)

36

TBI30

Enter the given information in the logon page and choose Log On.


2012

TBI30


Exercise 2: Navigate in BI Launch Pad Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • View objects in BI Launch Pad • Work with objects in BI Launch Pad

Business Example Your company runs the SAP BusinessObjects BI platform. BI Launch Pad acts as a central point of access to a range of useful business information about your company. As a business user you need to know the options to view and work with objects in BI Launch Pad.

Task: Log on to BI Launch Pad and explore the different options to view and organize documents.

2012

1.

Log on to BI Launch Pad with your assigned user.

2.

Set the Home tab as BI Launch Pad start page.

3.

Select the summary information you want to see for each object in the List panel. Following columns should be selected: Type, Last Run, Instances, Created By, Received (Inbox) and From (Inbox).

4.

Search for the Crystal Report World Sales Report and view the report.

5.

Create a shortcut in your Favorites of the World Sales Report

6.

Log off BI Launch Pad and close the browser.


37


TBI30

Solution 2: Navigate in BI Launch Pad Task: Log on to BI Launch Pad and explore the different options to view and organize documents. 1.

2.

3.

Log on to BI Launch Pad with your assigned user. a)

Go to Start → Programs → SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 4.0 → Custom Link to BI Launchpad.

b)

Logon with your user name and password when prompted.

Set the Home tab as BI Launch Pad start page. a)

Click Preferences.

b)

Make sure that Use Default Settings is deselected.

c)

Choose Home tab.

d)

Click Save & Close.

Select the summary information you want to see for each object in the List panel. Following columns should be selected: Type, Last Run, Instances, Created By, Received (Inbox) and From (Inbox). a)

Click Preferences.

b)

Under Choose columns displayed in Documents tab, select • • • • • •

c) 4.

Type Last Run Instances Created By Received (Inbox) From (Inbox)

Click Save & Close.

Search for the Crystal Report World Sales Report and view the report. a)

In the search field, enter World Sales Report and click Search

b)

In the Search Result list, double-click World Sales Report.

c)

Close the tab.

.


38


2012

TBI30


5.

6.

Create a shortcut in your Favorites of the World Sales Report a)

Navigate to Folders → Public Folders → Report Samples → Demonstration

b)

Right-click the report World Sales Report.

c)

Choose Organize → Create Shortcut In My Favorites.

d)

Navigate to My Documents → My Favorites to verify that the shortcut has been created.

Log off BI Launch Pad and close the browser. a)

2012

Click Log Off and close the browser.


39


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the purpose of BI Launch Pad as a central point of access for BI users • Set personal preferences in BI Launch Pad • Work with objects in BI Launch Pad

40


2012

TBI30

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the definition of Business Intelligence • Describe the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence client applications by role • Explain the architecture of SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform. • List the various SAP BusinessObjects client tools for Business Users and Report Designers • Use BI Launch Pad as an entry point to launch different report types • Explain the Data Manager Role in a SAP BusinessObjects environment • List the various client tools for SAP BusinessObjects BI administrators • Explain the purpose of BI Launch Pad as a central point of access for BI users • Set personal preferences in BI Launch Pad • Work with objects in BI Launch Pad

2012


41

Unit Summary

42

TBI30


2012

Unit 2 SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform Integration with SAP NetWeaver BW Unit Overview Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: •

• • • • •

After completing this lesson you will know what types of authentication you can use as well as how to set up rights and different levels of access to the objects. Configure the SAP entitlement system to uses the SAP user credentials to logon in the BI applications Explain how BW authorizations are used for users with authentication type SAP Configure the SAP authentication Configure global options for the SAP Authentication Import SAP users and roles.

Unit Contents Lesson: Security in SAP BusinessObjects BI platform ..................... 44 Lesson: Authorization in SAP NetWeaver BW and SAP BI Platform ..... 51 Lesson: Using SAP Authentication ............................................ 57 Procedure: To enable the SAP authentication........................... 58 Procedure: To configure the SAP authentication options ............. 59 Procedure: To import SAP roles to SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 63

2012


43

Unit 2: SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform Integration with SAP NetWeaver BW

TBI30

Lesson: Security in SAP BusinessObjects BI platform Lesson Overview This lesson describes the security concepts of SAP BI platform and the account management which involves all of the tasks related to creating, mapping, changing, and organizing user and group information.


After completing this lesson you will know what types of authentication you can use as well as how to set up rights and different levels of access to the objects.

Business Example

Figure 13: Managing Users and Groups

You can access the User and Group Management of the BI platform by logging on to the CMC. Account management involves all of the tasks related to creating, mapping, changing, and organizing user and group information. The Users and Groups management area of the Central Management Console (CMC) provides a central place to perform these tasks. After the user accounts and groups have been created, you can add objects and specify rights to them. When the users log on, they can view the objects stored in the BI platform by using BI launch pad or their custom web application.

44


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Security in SAP BusinessObjects BI platform

Figure 14: User Repository

There are several possibilities about to choose the Authentication type: •

Own repository:

•

– Enterprise External repository: – – – – – –

LDAP & Windows AD SAP Oracle EBS Siebel JD Edwards EnterpriseOne PeopleSoft Enterprise

– –

Enterprise: is the system default Enterprise Authentication Authentication is the process of verifying the identity of a user who attempts to access the system, and authorization is the process of verifying that the user has been granted sufficient rights to perform the requested action upon the specified object. Security plugins expand and customize the ways in which the BI platform authenticates users. Security plugins facilitate account creation and management by allowing you to map user accounts and groups from third-party systems into the platform. You can map third-party user accounts or groups to existing BI platform user accounts or groups, or you can create new Enterprise user accounts or groups that correspond to each mapped entry in the external system.

–

2012


45


TBI30

Figure 15: Special Users

•

BI has a user-role based licensing scheme. There are two roles which can be assigned to BI platform users: –

BI Analyst: This role is designed for users who create content in the BI platform system. Users who edit or create reports, design and manage universes, or perform any administrative tasks in the CMC should be assigned the BI Analyst role.

–

BI Viewer: This role is designed primarily for content consumers. These users only view reports but do not modify content.

• •

•

46

Each role is bundled with specific access levels to BI platform applications. You cannot modify or override the access level to either user role. The BI Viewer role should not be assigned to users who need to: – Create reports – Update or modify reports – Perform administrative tasks using the CMC User roles should not be confused with group membership. When you assign a user one of the two available roles, the user is automatically assigned predefined rights to applications. To associate a user with specific group access levels, you must add the user to the desired group.


2012

TBI30


Figure 16: Roles

The BI Viewer role should not be assigned to users who need to: • • •

Create reports Update or modify reports Perform administrative tasks using the CMC

User roles should not be confused with group membership. When you assign a user one of the two available roles, the user is automatically assigned predefined rights to applications. To associate a user with specific group access levels, you must add the user to the desired group.

Figure 17: Groups

2012


47


TBI30

Figure 18: Special Groups

Figure 19: Rights

It is important to note that rights are set on objects such as reports and folders rather than on the principals (the users and groups) who access them. For example, to give a manager access to a particular folder, in the Folders area, you add the manager to the “access control list” (the list of principals who have access to an object) for the folder. You cannot give the manager access by

48


2012

TBI30


configuring the manager's rights settings in the Users and Groups area. The rights settings for the manager in the Users and Groups area are used to grant other principals (such as delegated administrators) access to the manager as an object in the system. In this way, principals are themselves like objects for others with greater rights to manage.

Figure 20: Access Levels

2012


49


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • After completing this lesson you will know what types of authentication you can use as well as how to set up rights and different levels of access to the objects.

50


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Authorization in SAP NetWeaver BW and SAP BI Platform

Lesson: Authorization in SAP NetWeaver BW and SAP BI Platform Lesson Overview This lesson describes the SAP authentication types and how queries sent by the front-end tools of BI platform use BW authorizations.


Configure the SAP entitlement system to uses the SAP user credentials to logon in the BI applications Explain how BW authorizations are used for users with authentication type SAP

Business Example

2012


51


TBI30

Figure 21: Authentication Type SAP System

•

•

SAP authentication also allows you to preserve information about user roles in SAP, and to use this role information within the platform to assign rights to perform administrative tasks, or access content. Security plug-ins expand and customize the ways in which BI platform authenticates users. The SAP Authentication feature includes an SAP security plug-in (secSAPR3.dll) for the Central Management Server (CMS) component of BI platform. This SAP security plug-in offers several key benefits: –

•

52

It acts as an authentication provider that verifies user credentials against your SAP system on behalf of the CMS. When users log on to BI platform directly, they can choose SAP Authentication and provide their usual SAP user name and password. BI platform can also validate Enterprise Portal logon tickets against SAP systems. – It facilitates account creation by allowing you to map roles from SAP to BI platform user groups, and it facilitates account management by allowing you to assign rights to users and groups in a consistent manner within BI platform. – It dynamically maintains SAP role listings. So, once you map an SAP role to the platform, all users who belong to that role can log on to the system. When you make subsequent changes to the SAP role membership, you need not update or refresh the listing in BI platform. – The SAP Authentication component includes a web application for configuring the plug-in. You can access this application in the “Authentication” area of the Central Management Console (CMC). The BI platform system requires an SAP user account that is authorized to access SAP role membership lists and authenticate SAP. You will need the account credentials to connect the BI platform to your SAP system. For general instruction on creating SAP user accounts and assigning authorizations through roles, see your SAP BW documentation.


2012

TBI30


Figure 22: BW Authentication

Screenshots: 1. 2. 3. 4.

In the CMC, choose Authentication and highlight SAP. Double-click the entry SAP. Choose RWBCLNT800 in the drop down box Logical system name. Click on the tab Role import. Click on the tab Options.

SAP authentication enables SAP users to log onto SAP BusinessObjects BI platform using their SAP user names and passwords, without storing these passwords in SAP BusinessObjects BI platform. SAP authentication also allows you to preserve information about user roles in SAP, and to use this role information within SAP BusinessObjects BI platform to assign rights to perform administrative tasks, or access content. Accessing the SAP authentication application After installing SAP Authentication, you must provide SAP BusinessObjects BI platform with information about your SAP system. SAP BusinessObjects BI platform installs a web application to assist you. This web application is accessible through the main SAP BusinessObjects BI platform administration tool, the Central Management Console (CMC). To access it from the home page of the CMC, click Authentication. Authenticating SAP users

2012


53


TBI30

Security plug-ins expand and customize the ways in which SAP BusinessObjects BI platform authenticates users. The SAP Authentication feature includes an SAP security plug-in (secSAPR3.dll) for the Central Management Server (CMS) component of SAP BusinessObjects BI platform. This SAP security plug-in offers several key benefits: •

•

•

•

It acts as an authentication provider that verifies user credentials against your SAP system on behalf of the CMS. When users log on to SAP BusinessObjects BI platform directly, they can choose SAP Authentication and provide their usual SAP user name and password. SAP BusinessObjects BI platform can also validate Enterprise Portal logon tickets against SAP systems. It facilitates account creation by allowing you to map roles from SAP to SAP BusinessObjects BI platform user groups, and it facilitates account management by allowing you to assign rights to users and groups in a consistent manner within SAP BusinessObjects BI platform. It dynamically maintains SAP role listings. So, once you map an SAP role to SAP BusinessObjects BI platform, all users who belong to that role can log on to SAP BusinessObjects BI platform. When you make subsequent changes to the SAP role membership, you need not update or refresh the listing in SAP BusinessObjects BI platform. The SAP Authentication component includes a web application for configuring the plug-in. You can access this application in the Authentication area of the Central Management Console (CMC).

Figure 23: Minimum Authorization Requirements for BW Users when Accessing from the BI Platform

54


2012

TBI30


Creating a user account for SAP BusinessObjects BI platform The SAP BusinessObjects BI platform requires an SAP user account that is authorized to access SAP role membership lists and authenticate SAP. You will need the account credentials to connect SAP BusinessObjects BI platform to your SAP system. For general instruction on creating SAP user accounts and assigning authorizations through roles, see your SAP BW documentation. Use transaction SU01 to create a new SAP user account named CRYSTAL. Use transaction PFCG to create a new role named CRYSTAL_ENTITLEMENT. (These names are recommended but not required.) Change the new role's authorization data by setting these values for the following authorization objects as shown in the table above. Note for field User group in user master maintenance (CLASS): For greater security, you may prefer to explicitly list the user groups whose members require access to SAP BusinessObjects BI platform.

Figure 24: Using SAP Users in the BI Platform

2012


55


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Configure the SAP entitlement system to uses the SAP user credentials to logon in the BI applications • Explain how BW authorizations are used for users with authentication type SAP

56


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Using SAP Authentication

Lesson: Using SAP Authentication Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn how to configure the integration between the SAP BusinessObjects BI platform and SAP NetWeaver system.


Configure the SAP authentication Configure global options for the SAP Authentication Import SAP users and roles.

Business Example In your existing SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse landscape's user management is already well defined. You need to know how to configure SAP Authentication to enable your users to work with their credentials within the SAP BusinessObjects environment.

Enable SAP Authentication The SAP authentication provides the capability to use the existing SAP roles and assigned users and the functionality to use Single Sign-On for the SAP NetWeaver BW content that the users will consume.

2012


57


TBI30

To enable the SAP authentication 1.

Log on to the Central Management Console.

2.

Navigate to Authentication.

3.

Double-click SAP and select the Entitlement System tab.

Figure 25: SAP authentication

4.

Enter the system ID and client number from the SAP system.

5.

Enter Application Server name including SAP Router String Note: For example: tdc00.wdf.sap.corp and System Number into the corresponding fields.

6.

Enter SAP Username, Password, and Language.

7.

Click Update.

8.

The system ID and client number are combined and entered as an entry in the list of logical systems.

Configure global options for the SAP authentication The SAP authentication includes a number of options that you can customize when integrating SAP BusinessObjects BI platform with your SAP systems. For instance, you can enable/disable SAP authentication and/or configure SAP BusinessObjects BI platform to temporarily disable SAP authentication for SAP systems when they become unavailable.

58


2012

TBI30


To configure the SAP authentication options 1.

Log onto the Central Management Console.

2.

Navigate to Authentication.

3.

Double-click SAP.

4.

Navigate to the Options tab.

Figure 26: SAP Authentication Options

•

Enable SAP Authentication Clear this check box if you want to disable SAP authentication completely. (To disable SAP authentication for specific SAP systems, select the system’s Disabled check box on the Entitlement Systems tab.)

•

Default system


2012


59


TBI30

In this list, select the SAP entitlement system that SAP BusinessObjects BI platform uses as the default system. That is, the system that is contacted to authenticate users who attempt to log on with SAP credentials but without specifying a particular SAP system. Note: If you designate a default system, users from that system do not have to enter their System ID and client when they connect from client tools like Live Office or Information Design Tool using SAP authentication. For example, if SYS~100 is set as the default system, SYS~100/user1 would be able to log on as user1 when SAP authentication is chosen. •

Content folder root Use this field to specify where you want SAP BusinessObjects BI platform to begin replicating the BW folder structure in the CMC and BI launch pad. To change this value, you must change it both in the CMC and the Content Administration Workbench. This value is relevant for the publishing integration with SAP Crystal Reports. Note: Publishing integration is only available with CR 2011 and not with CR for Enterprise

•

Max. number of failed attempts to access entitlement system and Keep entitlement system disabled [seconds] Use these fields together to configure how SAP BusinessObjects BI platform handles SAP entitlement systems that are temporarily unavailable. SAP BusinessObjects BI platform uses these settings to determine when to stop communicating with an SAP system that is unavailable, and when it should resume communication with that system. In the Max number of failed attempts to access entitlement system field, type the number of times that SAP BusinessObjects BI platform should reattempt contacting an SAP system to fulfill authentication requests. Setting the value to -1 allows SAP BusinessObjects BI platform to attempt to contact the entitlement system an unlimited number of times before ceasing. Setting the value to 0 limits SAP BusinessObjects BI platform to making one attempt to contact the entitlement system. In the Keep entitlement system disabled [seconds] field, type the number of seconds that SAP BusinessObjects BI platform should wait before resuming attempts to authenticate users against the SAP system. For example, if you type 3 for Max number of failed attempts to access entitlement system, SAP BusinessObjects BI platform allows a maximum of 3 failed attempts to authenticate users against any Continued on next page

60


2012

TBI30


particular SAP system. The fourth failed attempt results in SAP BusinessObjects BI platform ceasing its attempts to authenticate users against that system for the amount of time specified by Keep entitlement system disabled [seconds]. •

Max. concurrent connections per system Use this field to specify how many connections you want to keep open to your SAP system at the same time. For example, if you type 2 in this field, SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise keeps 2 separate connections open to SAP.

•

Number of uses per connection Use this field to specify how many logons you want to allow to the SAP system per connection. For example, if you specified 2 for Max concurrent connections per system and 3 for Number of uses per connection, once there has been 3 uses on one connection, SAP BusinessObjects BI platform closes that connection and restart it. Note: Number of uses refers to actual transactions (or RFC calls) towards the SAP system.

•

Concurrent users / Named Users Use these options to specify if new user accounts are configured to use concurrent user licenses or named user licenses. Concurrent licenses specify the number of people who can connect to SAP BusinessObjects BI platform at the same time. This type of licensing is very flexible because a small number of concurrent licenses can support a large user base. For example, depending on how often and how long users access the system, a 100 user concurrent license could support 250, 500, or 700 users. Named user licenses are associated with specific users and allow people to access the system based on their user name and password. This provides named users with access to the system regardless of how many other people are connected.

•

Import Full Name and Email Address Select this option if you want to specify a priority level for the SAP authentication plug-in. The full names and descriptions used in the SAP accounts are imported and stored with the user objects in SAP BusinessObjects BI platform.

•

Set priority of SAP attribute binding relative to other attributes binding


2012


61


TBI30

Specifies a priority for binding SAP user attributes (full name and e-mail address). If option is set to 1, SAP attributes take priority in scenarios where SAP and other plug-ins (Windows AD and LDAP) are enabled. If set to 3, attributes from other enabled plug-ins will take priority. The following fields are used to configure the SAP single sign-on service: •

System ID The system identifier provided by BI platform to the SAP system when performing the SAP single sign-on service.

•

Browse Use this button to upload the key store file generated to enable the SAP single sign-on. You can also manually enter the full path to the file in the field provided.

•

Key Store Password Provide the password required to access the key store file.

•

Private Key Password Provide the password required to access the certificate corresponding to the key store file. The certificate is stored on the SAP system.

•

Private Key Alias Provide the alias required to access the key store file.

5.

Define the SAP system you defined under the Entitlement System tab as the default system.

6.

Click Update.

Importing SAP Users and Roles By importing SAP roles into SAP BusinessObjects BI platform, you allow role members to log on to SAP BusinessObjects BI platform with their usual SAP credentials. In addition, single-sign-on is enabled so that SAP users can be logged on to SAP BusinessObjects BI platform automatically when they access reports from within the SAP GUI or an SAP NetWeaver Portal. For each role that is imported SAP BusinessObjects BI platform generates a user group. Each group is named with the following naming convention: [SAP system ID]~[SAP client number]@[SAP role] You can view the new groups in the groups management area of the CMC. You can also use these groups to define object security within SAP BusinessObjects BI platform.

62


2012

TBI30


To import SAP roles to SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 1.

Navigate to the Role Import tab.

2.

Select the logical system for the SAP server.

3.

Select the role(s) XXXXXXXX from the list of available roles, click Add > and then click Update.

Figure 27: Importing SAP Roles

Note: After the import of the SAP roles has been completed, users that are members of these SAP roles are able to log on with their SAP account to SAP BusinessObjects BI platform. Note: The roles that have been imported to SAP BusinessObjects BI platform are now available for publishing SAP Crystal Reports objects.

2012

4.

Close the above screen by clicking the X on the top right-hand corner.

5.

Select Users and Groups from the drop-down list. You should see the role you imported from SAP under Groups.


63


TBI30

Updating SAP Roles and Users After enabling SAP authentication, it is necessary to schedule and run regular updates on mapped roles that have been imported into BI platform.

Figure 28: Updating SAP Roles

There are two options for running and scheduling updates for SAP roles: •

Update roles only Using this option will only update the links between the currently mapped roles that have been imported in BI platform. It is recommended that you use this option if you expect to run frequent updates, and you have concerns over system resource usage. No new user accounts will be created if you only update SAP roles.

•

Update Roles and Aliases This option not only updates links between roles but will also create new user accounts in BI platform for user aliases added to roles in the SAP system

64


2012

TBI30


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Configure the SAP authentication • Configure global options for the SAP Authentication • Import SAP users and roles.

2012


65

Unit Summary

TBI30

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • After completing this lesson you will know what types of authentication you can use as well as how to set up rights and different levels of access to the objects. • Configure the SAP entitlement system to uses the SAP user credentials to logon in the BI applications • Explain how BW authorizations are used for users with authentication type SAP • Configure the SAP authentication • Configure global options for the SAP Authentication • Import SAP users and roles.

66


2012

TBI30

Test Your Knowledge

Test Your Knowledge 1.

How do you add SAP users to SAP BusinessObjects BI platform? Choose the correct answer(s).

□ □ □ □

2012

A B C D

Add the SAP Users using the SAP authentication tab Add the SAP Roles using the SAP authentication tab Add the SAP Groups using the SAP authentication tab Add the SAP Profiles using the SAP authentication tab


67

Test Your Knowledge

TBI30

Answers 1.

How do you add SAP users to SAP BusinessObjects BI platform? Answer: B Correct answer is B.

68


2012

Unit 3 The Information Design Tool Unit Overview The Information Design Tool enables you to leverage the semantic layer. This unit provides you with an overview of the functions and different types of components that can be created in Information Design Tool.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • •

Explain the concept of the semantic layer Explain new features of the Semantic Layer in SAP Business Intelligence 4.0 Describe the components of a BI 4.0 Universe that has been designed in the Information Design Tool Work with projects, relational database connections, data foundations and business layers Create connections and business layers for OLAP data sources Create different relational connections, a data foundation for multisource universes and a corresponding business layer Publish multisource universes and use them in the query panel

Unit Contents Lesson: The Semantic Layer................................................... 70 Lesson: Information Design Tool Overview .................................. 75 Lesson: Creating Relational Universes with the Information Design Tool 88 Exercise 3: Create a Universe with a Relational Connection in Information Design Tool..................................................... 95 Lesson: Creating an OLAP Universe with the Information Design Tool .105 Lesson: Creating Multisource Universes .................................... 111 Exercise 4: Create a Multisource Universe ............................. 117

2012


69

Unit 3: The Information Design Tool

TBI30

Lesson: The Semantic Layer Lesson Overview This lesson describes the concept of a Semantic Layer and the innovations that came with the Semantic Layer in SAP Business Intelligence 4.0.


Explain the concept of the semantic layer Explain new features of the Semantic Layer in SAP Business Intelligence 4.0

Business Example In your organization you want to make all data sources – OLAP or relational – available for reporting with a semantic layer that can be used by all SAP BusinessObjects reporting tools.

Concept of the Semantic Layer A semantic layer represents corporate data in common business terms. It helps that business users can access data autonomously without being familiar with the structure and technical characteristics of the respective data source. The semantic layer is created by a designer who understands the structure of the data source. The objects are named and classified by data type. For example you can create familiar business objects like Customer, Product and Revenue which represent database structures in the data source. The complexity of the data source is hidden and so the business user can use these objects for analysis without having to know the underlying tables of the database where the data is stored. The objective of a semantic layer is to provide a semantic or common adaption layer that allows business users to have a common experience across the different clients, sources, and types of information. It enables organizations to easily reach and work with the broadest set of information sources. Ideally it brings together all forms of data for consumption which means relational, dimensional and unstructured sources and can be used in all the different analysis and visualization tools. The mission of the semantic layer in SAP Business Intelligence is: • • • • •

70

Make business users autonomous Enable single user experience over all data Provide trust and consistency Enable consumption by all applications and BI tools Allow IT to keep control and ensure security of information


2012

TBI30

Lesson: The Semantic Layer

Semantic Layers in SAP BusinessObjects are represented by Universe objects. In SAP Business Intelligence 4.0 there are many improvements for Universe objects that allow you to achieve the objectives above much easier.

Innovations with the Semantic Layer in BI 4.0 In SAP Business Intelligence 4.0 the semantic layer is created with the Information Design Tool in form of a new version of universe objects that extend the functionality of the universe objects of the previous BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.x releases. You should use the Information Design Tool for all new projects. That means it is now the SAP BusinessObjects design environment for creating and publishing new SAP BusinessObjects universes and connections. However the Universe Design Tool that has been used for creating semantic layers in BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.x release is still shipped with SAP Business Intelligence 4.0 to enable a smooth transition. The information design tool lets you take advantage of these major new universe design features: •

• •

• •

•

2012

Multisource universes that federate multiple relational data sources. To provide this functionality, the query engine technology from SAP BusinessObjects Data Federator has been enhanced and integrated into SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform 4.0 Dimensional universes that support OLAP dimensions and hierarchies. These universes can be used for Microsoft Analysis Services OLAP cubes. A design environment that facilitates designer teamwork and universe resource sharing. Resources (i.e. connections, data foundations and business layers) are stored in projects. You can share projects in a repository to make resources available to other designers. A security editor for universe data and metadata that allows you to define universe security for users and groups. Extended connection management that lets you create local connections on the file system or secured connections in the repository. Once you have validated a local connection, you can publish it in the repository to create an equivalent secured connection. Easier management of repository resources by navigating several repositories at the same time. You can create and edit secured connections, retrieve and convert universes, and organize the repository resources within the Information Design Tool.


71


TBI30

Figure 29: Innovations in the Semantic Layer in Release 4.0

The new Information Design Tool in SAP Business Intelligence 4.0 also has two new integrated components, the Information Engine and the Query Server. The Information Engine works behind the scenes and enables querying and computational capabilities during report consumption. The Query Server is necessary to allow Multi-Source Universes. The Connection Server has also been updated to improve connection management.

72


2012

TBI30

Lesson: The Semantic Layer

Figure 30: Semantic Layer Components

Customers who use SAP BEx Queries have now the option to access these Queries directly from the SAP BusinessObjects reporting tools without having to create a universe. As a conclusion SAP NetWeaver BW customers will benefit of the new access methods to their SAP NetWeaver BW systems while retaining their investment in existing technologies. Non-SAP NetWeaver BW customers will take advantage of the enhancements and additional features available for all data sources.

2012


73


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the concept of the semantic layer • Explain new features of the Semantic Layer in SAP Business Intelligence 4.0

74


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Information Design Tool Overview

Lesson: Information Design Tool Overview Lesson Overview This lesson introduces the features of the Information Design Tool and the elements of a universe that has been designed with Information Design Tool.


Describe the components of a BI 4.0 Universe that has been designed in the Information Design Tool

Business Example You use the Information Design Tool in your organization to create SAP BusinessObjects BI 4.0 universes for reporting in different SAP BusinessObjects tools.

Introduction to Information Design Tool The Information Design Tool is an SAP BusinessObjects metadata design environment that enables a designer to extract, define, and manipulate metadata from relational and OLAP sources to create and deploy SAP BusinessObjects universes. The role of the universe is to provide the business user with semantically understandable business objects. The user is free to analyze data and create reports using relevant business language regardless of the underlying data sources and structures. A universe is an organized collection of metadata objects that enables business users to analyze and report on corporate data. These objects include dimensions, measures, hierarchies, attributes, predefined calculations, functions, and queries. The metadata object layer, called the business layer, is built on a relational database schema or an OLAP cube, so the objects map directly to the database structures via SQL or MDX expressions. A universe includes connections identifying the data sources. Universes created with the Information Design Tool can be used by the following SAP BusinessObjects data analysis and reporting applications starting with version BI 4.0: • • • •

2012

SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards SAP BusinessObjects Explorer


75


TBI30

The metadata modeling for BI 4.0 Universes is a task that will typically be assigned to a user with enough technical skills in Information Design Tool and knowledge about the respective data sources. This could be a database administrator, application manager, developer or a report creator. However the Information Design Tool is not intended as a design environment for typical Business Users. Connections or universes are provided for this user group by the Information Design Tool users. The Information Design Tool provides the following resources that a designer uses to extract metadata from relational or OLAP data sources and then to build a business layer of objects targeted to a specific user group:

76

Resource

Description

Project

A project is a named local workspace. A project contains one or more resources that are used to build one or more universes. A project can be shared so that multiple designers can work on the same resources.

Connection

A connection defines how a universe can access a relational or OLAP data source. A universe is always associated with at least one connection.

Data Foundation

A data foundation is a schema that defines the relevant tables and joins from one or more relational data sources. The designer can enhance the data foundation with contexts, prompts, calculated columns, and other SQL definitions. The data foundation becomes the basis of one or more business layers.

Business Layer

A business layer is a collection of metadata objects that map to SQL or MDX definitions in a data source, for example, columns, views, or database functions. The metadata objects include dimensions, hierarchies, measures, attributes, and predefined conditions. Each object corresponds to a unit of business information that can be manipulated in a query to return data. Business layers can be created


2012

TBI30


directly on an OLAP cube, or on a data foundation that is built on a relational database. You can build any number of business layers on the same data foundation. In this case the data foundation becomes the basis for multiple universes. Query

A query is a set of objects that define a request to the data source. A query can only be used to test objects in the business layer.

Parameters and Lists of Values

A parameter is a variable in the universe that requires a value at query time. Parameters are often defined to prompt the user to supply a value, and in this case are referred to as prompts. A list of values is a collection of data values that can be associated with an object in the universe, allowing the user to choose values for a prompt. Parameters and lists of values can be defined in the data foundation. They are inherited by all business layers based on that data foundation. Parameters and lists of values can also be defined in the business layer.

Universe

A universe is an object that includes all resources used in the definition of the metadata objects built in the design of the business layer.

In the Information Design Tool which is installed as local client tool the Designer first has to create a new project. Within this project a connection to a data source has to be defined. Based on this connection a Data Foundation has to be created for relational data sources. For OLAP data sources a data foundation is not necessary. The business layer provides the metadata objects (dimension and measure objects, etc.) that will be used by business users in the reporting tools. These resources get wrapped up in a Universe that can be published and made available via SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform.

2012


77


TBI30

Figure 31: Components of a BI 4.0 Universe

Working with Projects The first step in creating resources in the Information Design Tool, is to create a local project in the Local Projects View. You create and edit all resources (except secured connections and security profiles) in a local project. The resources and folders in a local project are stored as physical files and folders in the local file system. Once you have created a local project, there are several ways you can populate it with resources: • • •

78

Create resources using the wizards available under New in the File menu Convert a BusinessObjects Enterprise 3.X (.unv) universe that was created with the Universe Design Tool or in an earlier version. Retrieve a published universe from Business Intelligence Platform or from a local folder.


2012

TBI30


Figure 32: Local Projects in Information Design Tool

Making changes to a resource, such as deleting it from a local project, moving it to another local project, or updating it, may impact other resources that depend on it. For example deleting a connection has an impact on a Data Foundation or Business Layer built on top of it. You are warned of the impact before you delete or move a resource. To view local dependencies choose Show Local Dependencies in the context menu of a resource. For shared projects that have been saved in SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform there is a command Show Repository Dependencies in the same menu.

Working with Shared Projects When you work with multiple users on one project, for example if you create different business layers with sales data in your project, you can create a shared project. Shared Projects are saved in a repository and can be made available to other designers. Resources between local and shared projects have to be synchronized. In order to create a shared project follow these steps: 1. 2.

3.

2012

Create a local project and create resources Choose New Shared Project in the context menu of the project. This creates a shared project on SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform with the same name and opens the Synchronization View. Synchronize the resources in the project that you want to share in the Synchronization View by choosing Save Changes to Server icon. The resources are available for other designers in the shared project.


79


TBI30

Use the Project Synchronization View to synchronize a project. The view displays synchronization information in two panes: •

•

The Shared Project pane lists the resources in the shared project on the server. A lock icon appears next to the resource if it is locked. Other information about the resources on the server are given: the user who last modified the resource and on what date, the user who locked the resource and on what date. The Synchronization Status pane lists the status of each resource. The status is determined by comparing the resources in the local and shared projects. Here you will find information if resources have been added, changed or deleted and not yet synchronized. The status can be set to Conflicting if there are inconsistencies, for example if a resource was unlocked and has been changed locally and at the same time deleted on the server by someone else.

Figure 33: Synchronization View for Shared Projects

If you want to open a shared project from BI Platform open the menu Window and choose Synchronization View. Log on to BI Platform and select the shared object. Make sure that you lock resources before you edit them locally. Once you have finished editing resources choose the Save Changes to Server icon and unlock them afterwards.

Working with Connections A connection is a named set of parameters that define how one or more SAP BusinessObjects applications can access relational or OLAP data sources. The connection is represented by a local file, or an object in the SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform repository that is referenced by a local shortcut in the Information Design Tool. There are different types of connections that can be created:

80


2012

TBI30


Connections in Information Design Tool Connection used for:

Description

Relational data source

Relational connections can be created for many relational databases. Data foundations need to be built on top of these connections. Data foundations are the basis for business layers.

OLAP data sources

For an OLAP data source you associate a business layer directly to a connection. The business layer is published as a universe and the connection provides direct access to the OLAP data source.

SAP NetWeaver BW

SAP NetWeaver BW connections use the SAP BI Consumer Services (BICS) middleware driver to provide access to a Business Explorer query in SAP BW.

Note: You cannot use SAP NetWeaver BW BI Consumer Services connections as a source for business layers. That means this kind of connection cannot be part of a universe. It is only intended to provide direct access to Business Explorer queries in SAP NetWeaver BW. All connections created in the local project are called local connections (.cnx files) before being published to a repository. Local connections have limited or no security as they can be used by any user with access to the machine running the Information Design Tool. They are primarily used in the authoring phase of data foundation and business layer development. Connections can be published to the SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform repository by choosing Publish connection to a repository in the context menu of the connection. After the connection has been published a local shortcut (.cns file) is created for the connection in the local project. You can use the shortcut in the same way as a local connection, however, the target connection is secured and subject to security restraints in the repository. The connection shortcut is available locally, but editing a published connection can only be done with the appropriate repository system authorization.

2012


81


TBI30

Figure 34: Connectivity with Universe Design Tool and Information Design Tool

Working with Data Foundations A data foundation contains a schema of relevant tables and joins from one or more relational databases that are used as a basis for one or more business layers. You reference relational connections in the data foundation. You insert tables and joins from the databases referenced in the connections. Using the Data Foundation Editor, you can enhance the data foundation by adding derived tables, alias tables, calculated columns, additional joins, contexts, prompts, and lists of values. You can build any number of business layers on the same data foundation. In this case the data foundation becomes the basis for multiple universes. There are two different types of data foundations: single-source and multi-source. As the name implies single-source data foundations support only one connection. This connection can be local or secured, that means single-source data foundations can be published locally or in the repository. Single-source data foundations support database-specific SQL syntax for derived tables, calculated columns, and join expressions. They are recommended for the following situations: • •

82

You want to work exclusively with database-specific SQL syntax. You want to publish the universe locally and work outside of a repository.


2012

TBI30


Once the data foundation is created, use the Data Foundation Editor to insert the necessary tables and joins from the database referenced in the connection. Use the Insert Tables command to insert several tables at one time and ask for keys, joins, cardinalities, and row counts to be detected and inserted automatically. Tables and joins can also be inserted and edited manually.

Figure 35: Data Foundation on a Relational Data Source

Multi-source data foundations support one or more connections. You can add connections when you create the data foundation and anytime later. Multisource-enabled data foundations only support secured connections. Multi-source data foundations always have to be created in the BI Platform repository. Universes with this kind of data foundation can only be published to the repository. Multi-Source Data Foundations support connections to SAP NetWeaver BW and SAS. That means that a relational connection can be created on the fact tables and the related master data tables of an InfoCube. Multisource-enabled data foundations are required in the following situations: • • •

You want to insert tables and joins from more than one relational data source. You want to use SAP NetWeaver BW connections You want to use SQL-92 standard syntax and SAP BusinessObjects SQL functions.

A multi-source join can be created between tables from different connections. As in single-source data foundations you can let the Information Design Tool detect joins between tables automatically, or explicitly define them manually. For SAP NetWeaver BW connections, tables and joins are inserted automatically – as you can see in the following picture a big amount of tables can be involved in the database schema of an SAP BW InfoCube.

2012


83


TBI30

Figure 36: Multi-Source Data Foundation on a SAP NetWeaver BW InfoCube

Working with Business Layers Business layers can be created on single-source or multi-source data foundations using a relational database connection. Or business layers can be directly (that means without a data foundation) built on OLAP connections, for example Microsoft Analysis Services, The principle role of the business layer is to define and organize metadata before it is published as a universe. In the business layer you define the dimension objects and attributes representing master data, measures, and filters. The user who opens the universe in one of the SAP BusinessObjects tools then only sees the objects that you have created in the business layer and does not have to deal with the complex structure of the data source. Also the objects in the business layer can be renamed into familiar business terms. For example a database field Amount sold could be renamed to Sales Volume. You can also select certain table fields from the data foundation that are relevant for this universe and leave others out.

84


2012

TBI30


Figure 37: Business Layer on a Database Foundation with a Relational Data Source

Use the query panel to build, test and preview queries. You insert result objects into the Result Objects pane. Users of SAP Crystal Reports, Web Intelligence, or Dashboards will have a very similar view of the query panel. The result objects are shown in the executed query. You can add filter objects to filter the returned results by criteria such as a date range, results greater than a given value, and selected ranges. You can preview the results to verify that the query returns the expected results and you can also view the query syntax that forms the query.

Figure 38: Query Panel in Information Design Tool

2012


85


TBI30

Publishing Resources Publishing is the last step in the universe creation process. When business layers have been published locally or into BI Platform they are represented by a universe ( .unx) file and available for all users with necessary user rights. Publishing locally This can only be done with business layers that use local connections. If the connection is published to BI Platform repository the universe also has to be published there. Publishing to a repository A universe that has been published to BI Platform data and metadata of the universe are secured by the security profiles that have been assigned in the Security Editor of Information Design Tool. It is not possible to publish a universe to BI Platform if the connection is local. Or in other words: all resources of a business layer have to be either local or published and secured in the repository. Note that in order to edit universes you always have to retrieve them from the repository and open the respective resources in Information Design Tool. After editing the resources have to be published again to be available for reporting users.

86


2012

TBI30


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the components of a BI 4.0 Universe that has been designed in the Information Design Tool

2012


87


TBI30

Lesson: Creating Relational Universes with the Information Design Tool Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn how to create semantic layers on relational data sources.


Work with projects, relational database connections, data foundations and business layers

Business Example In some parts of your organization relational databases are being used for reporting, you also want to provide access to these data sources with the SAP BusinessObjects tools.

Working with Data Sources for Relational Universes For a relational connection you can use middleware drivers for most relevant relational database systems such as IBM DB2, Microsoft Access and SQL Server, Oracle, SAP MaxDB and SAP HANA Appliance, Sybase database systems and many more.

88


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Creating Relational Universes with the Information Design Tool

Figure 39: Relational Connection Options

In order to create and publish a relational universe you have to build all the necessary resources for the universe first. That means you have to create a project, a relational connection, a database foundation and a business layer. The first step to create a universe is to create an new project in the Local Projects View.

2012


89


TBI30

After you have created a project in Information Design Tool you can create a new relational connection within the project folder by selecting it and choosing File → New → Relational Connection. Enter the correct • •

•

Name for the Connection Middleware for the Target Database Here you can choose between different types of middleware drivers such as ODBC and JDBC. Authentication parameters to connect to the database system For Authentication there are three different options: 1.

•

Use specified user name and password – enter login details in the connection definition 2. Use BusinessObjects credential mapping – the user is prompted for a database user password associated with the SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform account to refresh a report 3. Use Single Sign On when refreshing reports at View Time: When selected, the username and password used to log on to BI Platform are automatically used as the database login parameters. Connection parameters to optimize the connection Note: See SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform Administrators Guide for information about setting up Single Sign-On (SSO). Also see Information Design Tool User Guide for more information about the settings for the different database connection drivers.

90


2012

TBI30


Figure 40: Tables and Joins in a Data Foundation

After you have created a relational connection you have to create a new data foundation. If you only want to work with one relational connection a single-source data foundation is sufficient. To create a new data foundation follow these steps: •

•

•

2012

Use the New Data Foundation wizard to create the data foundation. In the wizard you name the data foundation, provide a description, and select the connections.To start the New Data Foundation wizard, select File → New → Data Foundation Once the data foundation on your relational connection is created, you use the Data Foundation Editor to insert the necessary tables and joins from the databases referenced in the connections. You also need to define cardinalities of the joins. When you complete the data foundation, use the Check Integrity command to validate the tables, columns, and joins in the data foundation. To run an integrity check, right-click the data foundation name in the Data Foundation pane, and select Check Integrity.


91


TBI30

Creating and Publishing a Relational Universe The last step of publishing data from is to create a new business layer on top of the existing relational data foundation. Follow these steps to create a new business layer: • • •

Select the project folder in the Local Projects View Select File → New → Business Layer Enter that the business layer is based on a data foundation, name it and choose the data foundation as data source.

The Business Layer objects pane contains the metadata objects you use to build the business layer. Depending on the type of data source for the business layer, you can create and edit Dimensions, Measures, Attributes, Filters and Folders. After you have successfully created the Business Layer you have to publish it to the SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform repository. Make sure that the connection has also been published before.

Migrating a BusinessObjects Enterprise 3.X Universe You can use the Convert .unv Universe command in the Information Design Tool to convert a universe created with other SAP BusinessObjects universe design tools, and universes created in previous versions. You can still use Universe Design Tool in the Business Intelligence 4.0 release to create and maintain .unv universes. However this is only for legacy reasons, the standard universe creation tool is Information Design Tool which creates .unx universes. After you have converted .unv universes you can use them in a local project as you would do with a universe created with the Information Design Tool. You can convert the following types of .unv universes: • •

Relational universes created using the SAP BusinessObjects BI 4.0 Universe Design Tool. Relational universes created using SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.x design tools.

In order to convert a .unv universe choose File → Convert .unv Universe. Then you can select a .unv universe from your local disk or from SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform repository. As a last step you choose a repository folder where the converted .unx universe should be stored. Note: Before you can convert universes created in version SAP BusinessObjects XI 3.x that are saved in a repository, you must upgrade the universes using the Upgrade Management Tool. For more information, see the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform Upgrade Guide. Also note that OLAP universes cannot be converted.

92


2012

TBI30


Figure 41: Upgrade from .unv to .unx Universes

Figure 42: Migration of .unv Universes from SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise 3.X

2012


93


TBI30

Figure 43: Migration of .unv Universes Built with Universe Design Tool

94


2012

TBI30


Exercise 3: Create a Universe with a Relational Connection in Information Design Tool Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Learn how to create a relational connection, data foundation and business layer on a relational data source • Learn how to publish universes and execute queries

Business Example You want to create a universe as a semantic layer for your sales database. This universe needs to be provided to Web Intelligence users for reporting on sales key figures.

Task: Use Information Design Tool to create a semantic layer for the sales users in your company. Make sure that the table fields in the data source are represented by dimensions and measures that can easily be identified by this user group. 1.

Open Information Design Tool and create a new project U##_Relational_Data in the standard project location on your local disk.

2.

Create a new relational connection in your local project with the resource name U##_eFashion on a MS Access 2007 database (ODBC driver) with the following settings: Authentication Mode

Use specified user name and password

User name

Password

Data Source Name

efashion

Do not change any of the Configuration Parameters or Custom Parameters. Note: Make sure that you have initialized the database by choosing Start → Programs → Initialize course → BusinessObjects → BO100


2012


95


3.

4.

TBI30

Publish the connection to the BI Platform repository in the folder Connections\Relational Connections and create a shortcut in your local folder. Use the following credentials to log on: System

wdflbmt2268

User Name

user##

Password

Your password

Authentication

SAP

Create a single source data foundation with the resource name U##_eFashion and use the following tables from the relational connection that you have just created. Choose the tables from the folder \ BOsampleMDBs\efashion and drag them to the Master window: Article_lookup Calender_year_lookup Outlet_lookup Shop_facts Note: Make sure you use the secured version of the relational connection (.cns) for the data foundation.

5.

Set primary keys for the database tables, the keys are the following table fields: Table

Primary Key

Article_lookup

Article_id

Calender_year_lookup

Week_id

Outlet_lookup

Shop_id

Shop_facts

Shop_facts_id

6.

Create joins between the lookup tables and the fact table with the transactional data so that users can analyze the measure data from the Shop_facts table in connection with dimension data from the three Lookup tables. In total you need to create three joins.

7.

Enter the cardinalities for each of the joins. Cardinalities describe if each row in table field A can match “one and only one” or “one or more” rows in table B. Save your data foundation after you have defined the cardinalities.


96


2012

TBI30


8.

Create a new business layer U##_eFashion for the data foundation with the name U##_eFashion. The business layer is intended for strategic sales reporting. That means amount and quantity of sold goods should be analyzed in connection with shop data, article data, and the time period when the sale took place. Do not create dimensions and folders automatically in this business layer. Provide the following dimensions and measures for your reporting users: Folder name Dimension / measure name

Table field

Type

Article data

Article Name

Article_lookup. Article_label

String

Category

Article_lookup. Category

String

Sale Price

Article_lookup. Sale_price

Numeric

Shop Name

Outlet_lookup. Shop_name

String

City

Outlet_lookup. City

String

State

Outlet_lookup. State

String

Week in Year

Calendar_year_lookup. Week_In_Year

Numeric

Calendar Year

Calendar_year_lookup.Yr

String

Sales Revenue

Shop_facts. Amount_ sold

Numeric

Quantity

Shop_facts. Quantity_sold

Numeric

Store Data

Time

Measures

9.

Create a query using the Query Panel in Information Design Tool on the business layer. Use different dimension and measure objects and execute the query to check if the results are displayed correctly.

10. Publish the business layer as a universe to the BI Platform repository. Save the universe file into the folder Universes\webi universes. Run all possible integrity checks. Note that the universe will have the same file name as the business layer.

2012


97


TBI30

Solution 3: Create a Universe with a Relational Connection in Information Design Tool Task: Use Information Design Tool to create a semantic layer for the sales users in your company. Make sure that the table fields in the data source are represented by dimensions and measures that can easily be identified by this user group. 1.

2.

Open Information Design Tool and create a new project U##_Relational_Data in the standard project location on your local disk. a)

Click Start → Programs → SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 4.0 → SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 4.0 Client Tools → Information Design Tool.

b)

Choose File → New → Project

c)

Enter U##_Relational_Data and click Finish.

Create a new relational connection in your local project with the resource name U##_eFashion on a MS Access 2007 database (ODBC driver) with the following settings: Authentication Mode


User name

Password

Data Source Name

efashion

Do not change any of the Configuration Parameters or Custom Parameters. Note: Make sure that you have initialized the database by choosing Start → Programs → Initialize course → BusinessObjects → BO100 a)

Select the project U##_Relational_Data and choose File → New → Relational Connection

b)

Enter U##_eFashion as Resource Name and click Next

c)

Choose Microsoft → MS Access 2007 → ODBC Drivers and click Next.

d)

Enter the four parameters in the table above and click Finish. You do not need to change any other parameters in this connection. Continued on next page

98


2012

TBI30


3.

4.

Publish the connection to the BI Platform repository in the folder Connections\Relational Connections and create a shortcut in your local folder. Use the following credentials to log on: System

wdflbmt2268

User Name

user##

Password

Your password

Authentication

SAP

a)

Select the connection U##_efashion in your local project folder.

b)

Choose File → Publish → Publish Connection to a Repository.

c)

Enter the credentials given above and log on to BI Platform by clicking Connect.

d)

Choose the folder Connections → Relational Connections and click Finish.

e)

When asked for the creation of a shortcut choose Yes and then click Close.

Create a single source data foundation with the resource name U##_eFashion and use the following tables from the relational connection that you have just created. Choose the tables from the folder \ BOsampleMDBs\efashion and drag them to the Master window: Article_lookup Calender_year_lookup Outlet_lookup Shop_facts Note: Make sure you use the secured version of the relational connection (.cns) for the data foundation. a)

Select the project U##_Relational_Data and choose File → New → Data Foundation

b)

Enter U##_eFashion as resource name and click Next.

c)

Choose Single Source as Data Foundation type and click Next.

d)

Select U##_eFashion.cns as connection and click Finish.


2012


99


e)

5.

6.

Navigate to the folder \ BOsampleMDBs\efashion and drag each of the four tables mentioned above into the Master window. Make sure that the tables are marked green in the Connection window on the left.

Set primary keys for the database tables, the keys are the following table fields: Table

Primary Key

Article_lookup

Article_id

Calender_year_lookup

Week_id

Outlet_lookup

Shop_id

Shop_facts

Shop_facts_id

a)

Within the master window of the data foundation right-click the fields stated in the table above and choose Set as Key... → Primary Key.

b)

Repeat the step above for all other tables to set their primary keys.

Create joins between the lookup tables and the fact table with the transactional data so that users can analyze the measure data from the Shop_facts table in connection with dimension data from the three Lookup tables. In total you need to create three joins. a)

7.

TBI30

Within the master window of the data foundation connect the join fields by dragging a line between them. You need to create joins between these fields Field

Connected Field

Article_lookup.Article_Id

Shop_facts.Article_id

Calender_year_lookup.Week_id

Shop_facts.Week_id

Outlet_lookup.Shop_id

Shop_facts.Shop_id

Enter the cardinalities for each of the joins. Cardinalities describe if each row in table field A can match “one and only one” or “one or more” rows in table B. Save your data foundation after you have defined the cardinalities. a)

Open one of the joins by double-clicking the line that connects two tables it in the Mster window.

b)

In the Join Definition Details window click the Detect button. The detected cardinality is correct in this case and can be accepted by clicking OK.

c)

Perform the previous step for each join in the data foundation. Continued on next page

100


2012

TBI30


d) 8.

Click on File → Save

Create a new business layer U##_eFashion for the data foundation with the name U##_eFashion. The business layer is intended for strategic sales reporting. That means amount and quantity of sold goods should be analyzed in connection with shop data, article data, and the time period when the sale took place. Do not create dimensions and folders automatically in this business layer. Provide the following dimensions and measures for your reporting users: Folder name Dimension / measure name

Table field

Type

Article data

Article Name

Article_lookup. Article_label

String

Category

Article_lookup. Category

String

Sale Price

Article_lookup. Sale_price

Numeric

Shop Name

Outlet_lookup. Shop_name

String

City

Outlet_lookup. City

String

State

Outlet_lookup. State

String

Week in Year

Calendar_year_lookup. Week_In_Year

Numeric

Calendar Year

Calendar_year_lookup.Yr

String

Sales Revenue

Shop_facts. Amount_ sold

Numeric

Quantity

Shop_facts. Quantity_sold

Numeric

Store Data

Time

Measures

a)

Select the local project folder U##_Relational_Data

b)

Choose File → New → Business Layer

c)

Choose U##_Relational_Data and click on OK

d)

Choose Relational Data Source and click on Next Continued on next page

2012


101


TBI30

e)

Enter U##_eFashion as Resource Name and click Next.

f)

Choose data foundation U##_eFashion and click OK. Uncheck Automatically create classes and objects.

g)

Click the Finish button.

h)

Select the top node U##_eFashion in the Business Layer window, click the Insert Object icon and select Folder. Enter the name of the first folder stated in the table above into the Name field.

9.

i)

Repeat the last step for all folders.

j)

Select the first folder and choose the Insert Object icon again. Choose Dimension.

k)

Enter the name and data type of the first dimension into the Name field and Data type field. Click the SQL Assistant button beside the Select area.

l)

Choose the respective table field from the Tables area and drag it into the SQL Expression area. Click OK and do not change any of the other settings in the dimension.

m)

Repeat the last three steps for all dimension objects in the table above.

n)

Select the Measures folder and choose the Insert Object icon. Choose Measure.

o)

Enter the name and data type of the first measure into the Name field and Data type field. Click the SQL Assistant button.

p)

Choose the respective table field from the Tables area and drag it into the SQL Expression area. Click OK and do not change any of the other settings in the measure.

q)

Repeat the last three steps for all measure objects in the table above.

Create a query using the Query Panel in Information Design Tool on the business layer. Use different dimension and measure objects and execute the query to check if the results are displayed correctly. a)

In the bottom part of the business layer window choose Queries.

b)

Choose the Insert Query icon

c)

Drag Article Name, Shop Name, and Sales Revenue into the Result Objects area and click OK.

d)

In the Query Properties click the Execute query button.

– the Query Panel opens.


102


2012

TBI30


10. Publish the business layer as a universe to the BI Platform repository. Save the universe file into the folder Universes\webi universes. Run all possible integrity checks. Note that the universe will have the same file name as the business layer.

2012

a)

Right-click the U00_eFashion.blx business layer and choose Publish → To a Repository...

b)

Choose Check all and click the Check Integrity button. Click Next.

c)

Select folder Universes\Webi universes and click Finish.


103


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Work with projects, relational database connections, data foundations and business layers

104


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Creating an OLAP Universe with the Information Design Tool

Lesson: Creating an OLAP Universe with the Information Design Tool Lesson Overview This lesson describes how to provide access to OLAP data sources with the Information Design Tool.


Create connections and business layers for OLAP data sources

Business Example Business users in your organization need to access OLAP data sources with SAP BusinessObjects client tools.

Data Sources for OLAP Universes For an OLAP connection in Information Design Tool version 4.0 you can use different XMLA middleware drivers to connect to Microsoft Analysis Services and different SAP BusinessObjects data sources such as Planning and Consolidation. There is also a SAP NetWeaver BW BICS (BI Consumer Services) connection which cannot be part of a data foundation or business layer. This connection can only be published to the repository and enables SAP BusinessObjects client tools to access SAP data sources directly without a universe.

2012


105


TBI30

Figure 44: OLAP Connection Options

In order to create and publish an OLAP universe you have to build all the necessary resources for the universe first. Here you have to create a project, an OLAP connection and a business layer. For an OLAP connection it is not possible – and not necessary – to create a data foundation. The first step here is to create an new project in the Local Projects View or to choose an existing one. After you have chosen a project in Information Design Tool you can create a new OLAP connection within the project folder by selecting it and choosing File → New → OLAP Connection. Enter the following information: • • •

Name for the Connection Middleware for the target Database Here you can choose between different types of XMLA middleware drivers. Authentication parameters to connect to the database system For Authentication there are three different options: 1. 2.

3.

106

Use specified user name and password – enter login details in the connection definition Use BusinessObjects credential mapping – the user is prompted for a database user&password associated with the SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform account to refresh a report Use Single Sign On when refreshing reports at View Time: When selected, the username and password used to log on to BI Platform are automatically used as the database login parameters.


2012

TBI30


• •

The XMLA server URL coming from a provider such as Microsoft Analysis Services Whether you want to choose a cube from the OLAP data source or not. If you choose a cube users of the universe are only able to work with this cube. If you decide not to choose a cube, users can select a cube when opening the connection. Note: See SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform Administrators Guide for information about setting up Single Sign-On (SSO). Also see Information Design Tool User Guide for more information about the settings for the different database connection drivers.

The OLAP connection cannot be used in a data foundation so all you have to do now is to create a business layer on the connection: • • • •

•

•

Select the project folder in the Local Projects View Select File → New → Business Layer Enter that the business layer is based on an OLAP data source, name the business layer and choose one of the available OLAP connections. Now you can choose detect measure aggregation function (e.g. sum). If you choose not to detect aggregation, the default setting is database delegated for all measures, that means a query must be refreshed in the client tool to retrieve an aggregated value for a measure. If you choose create attribute from technical name there will be an attribute for the technical name of the dimension, this can be helpful for some reporting requirements. Now you can select which objects (i.e. dimensions, measures, named sets) you want have created in the business layer.

Figure 45: Business Layers Based on OLAP Connections

The Business Layer objects pane contains the metadata objects you imported from the OLAP data source. The following objects are only available in OLAP universes:

2012


107


TBI30

Hierarchies

Represent hierarchies in the OLAP cube. A hierarchy can contain levels, attributes, named sets and calculated members.

Named Sets

A named set is a collection of members of a hierarchy.

Calculated Members

A calculated member is a member of a hierarchy that is calculated using an MDX expression (e.g. with mathematical operators)

Analysis dimensions

Allow you to logically group dimensions in the business layer

When you work with OLAP universes in queries the query panel offers you a member selector. Use the “Member Selector” to select members of OLAP universe hierarchies to: • •

Create queries based on hierarchies or members of hierarchies Define members that will be excluded from queries

Figure 46: OLAP universes in Query Panel

108


2012

TBI30


The member selector can be opened when you drag an object with hierarchy information in the “Result Objects” pane. Now you can select members or levels of the hierarchy for reporting. After you have successfully created the Business Layer and checked it by executing a query created with the query panel in Information Design Tool you have to publish it to the SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform repository. Make sure that the connection has also been published before.

2012


109


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create connections and business layers for OLAP data sources

110


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Creating Multisource Universes

Lesson: Creating Multisource Universes Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn to create multisource universes with the Information Design Tool and different kinds of data sources.


Create different relational connections, a data foundation for multisource universes and a corresponding business layer Publish multisource universes and use them in the query panel

Business Example You need to provide the contents of several databases for reporting in only one semantic layer so that users can consolidate and analyze data from different operational systems easily within the SAP BusinessObjects client tools.

Multisource Universes Multisource-enabled data foundations support one or more relational connections. You can add connections when you create the data foundation and anytime later. Only in multisource universes you can use SAP NetWeaver BW and SAS connections. Note that these connections are relational that means the fact, dimension, and masterdata tables in SAP NetWeaver BW will be accessed via SQL.

2012


111


TBI30

Figure 47: Reasons for Multisource Universes

In order to create and publish a universe with a multisource data foundation you have to build all the necessary resources for the universe first. Note that multisource-enabled data foundations only support secured connections. Universes based on this type of data foundation can only be published to a repository and can not be published locally. After you have built the a desired relational connections in the SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform repository you need to create a multisource data foundation by following these steps: • •

•

112

Select a Project in Information Design Tool and choose File → New → data foundation from the menu You can select multiple connections when you create the data foundation. You can also add connections to an existing multisource-enabled data foundation You can add more connections later by opening the data foundation in Information Design Tool and choosing the Add connection... icon.


2012

TBI30


The connections in a multisource-enabled data foundation have the following additional properties: •

• •

A short name used to identify the connection in the data foundation and to modify the table name in SQL expressions. You specify the short name when adding the connection. A color for the connection. This color is used in the table header in data foundation views. You select the color when adding the connection. For SAP NetWeaver BW connections, properties related to the automatic insertion of tables and joins. Default setting is automatic insertion of table, unselect the Detect tables check box in the advanced properties of the connection when you are adding the connection to change this setting.

After you have added connections to your data foundation you can insert tables from the different sources to your data foundation. As in a single source data foundation you now define database keys, joins and cardinalities for the tables. In a multisource universe you can define joins that connect different data sources. Follow these steps to create joins over different data sources in a multisource data foundation: •

To insert tables into a data foundation, select Insert Tables from the Insert menu in the data foundation view. The Insert Tables dialog box lists the connections defined in the data foundation. Expand the connection to see the database tables referenced in the connection. Note: Joins between tables from multisource-enabled data foundations, only joins between tables referenced by the same connection are detected while you are inserting tables.

•

After you have inserted tables create joins between the tables in the data foundation or have them detected automatically. To detect joins between tables referenced by different connections, use the Detect Joins command. Detect cardinalities saves the cardinalities of the joins as they are in the database joins. Cardinalities can also be edited manually.

•

Business Layers on multisource universes can be created in the same way as business layers for relational universes and allows you to create folder, dimensions, measures, and filters based on the table schema you have created in the data foundation.

2012


113


TBI30

Multi Source Universes and SAP NetWeaver BW InfoProviders Within the Information Design Tool there are two options to access SAP NetWeaver BW data: 1. 2.

Create relational connections on the tables of an InfoProvider and use these connections in multi-source data foundations and business layers Use direct BICS (BI Consumer Service) access without having to create a universe

A general recommendation is to use the direct access with BICS on a Business Explorer query. The advantage here is that no universe has to be created and maintained and that all elements of the Business Explorer query can be used to prepare data for the needs of reporting users. Query elements are for example filters, restricted key figures, calculated key figures, variables, hierarchies. If you use relational connections on an InfoProvider these elements are not available and you to create them otherwise:

Business Explorer query feature

Relational Universe workaround

Calculated key figures, restricted key figures, formulas

Use SQL expressions in measure definition in the universe

BW variables

Define prompts in dimension definition in the universe. There are limitations, for example for exit variables.

Filters

Create filters in dimension definition in the universe

Hierarchies

No workaround available

A use case for relational connections on SAP NetWeaver BW is when you want to combine several data sources with one of them being SAP NetWeaver BW. Here it is useful to create multi-source universes. Be aware that when you use an InfoCube in a relational data foundation it can easily get confusing. An InfoCube can have a fact table, up to 16 dimension tables and each dimension can contain up to 248 characteristics which are connected with master data tables.

114


2012

TBI30


When you add an SAP NetWeaver BW connection to a multisource-enabled data foundation, tables and joins are automatically inserted. • •

Based on the InfoProvider specified in the SAP NetWeaver BW connection parameters, inserts the fact table and its related master data and text tables. Creates families for each type of table: Prefixes the fact table name by the letter I (InfoCube) and assigns it to family “InfoProvider Fact Table”. Prefixes master data tables by the letter D (Dimension) and assigns them to family “Dimension Table” Prefixes text tables by the letter T (Text) and assigns them to family “Text Table”

The automatic insertion helps you to create all necessary joins for the tables of the InfoCube. However you can turn off automatic detection when you are adding a connection to a multi-source universe, for example if you want to use only few tables of the InfoProvider and join them with another data source. As a conclusion there can be three different scenarios where you have to decide how to access SAP NetWeaver BW which can summarized as follows:

Figure 48: Connecting to SAP NetWeaver BW

2012


115


116


TBI30

2012

TBI30


Exercise 4: Create a Multisource Universe Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Learn how to create relational connects to tables of SAP NetWeaver BW InfoProviders • Merge different relational connections in a multisource data foundation, create a business layer and publish a universe

Business Example You are searching for information about phone calls that customers have made at the customer support organization in different data sources. Business users want to analyze calls for materials, material groups, and material types. The information on the calls is stored on the SQL Server database but material information is stored in SAP NetWeaver BW.

Task 1: Create relational connections to a SQL Server database and a SAP NetWeaver BW InfoCube where the customer data is stored. 1.

Open Information Design Tool and create a new project U##_Multisource_Data in the standard project location on your local disk if this project does not already exist in your local projects.

2.

Create a new relational connection in your local project with the resource name U##_SQL_CallData on a MS SQL Server 2005 database (ODBC driver) with the following settings: Authentication Mode


User name

guest

Password

bobobo

Data Source Name

Warehouse

Do not change any of the Configuration Parameters or Custom Parameters. 3.

Publish the connection to the BI Platform repository in the folder Connections\Relational Connections and create a shortcut in your local folder. Use the following credentials to log on: Continued on next page

2012


117


4.

TBI30

System

wdflbmt2268

User Name

User##

Password

Your password

Authentication

SAP

Create a new relational connection in the BI Platform repository with the resource name U##_BW_CallData on a SAP NetWeaver BW InfoCube. Use the following logon credentials for SAP NetWeaver BW: Authentication Mode

Use single sign on

Client

800

Language

EN

System ID

RWB

Application Server - Server Name

wdflbmt2281.wdf.sap.corp

System Number

40

InfoProvider

IP_CUSTOM

Do not change any of the Configuration Parameters or Custom Parameters.

Task 2: Create a multisource data foundation and create joins between the data sources you just created. 1.

Create a multisource data foundation with the resource name U##_MSU_CallData and use the connection shortcuts U##_SQL_CallData.cns and U##_BW_CallData.cns in the data foundation. Make sure you do not automatically create tables and joins for the SAP Netweaver BW connection (check Advanced settings of the connection properties).

2.

Insert the following tables from the connections into the data foundation. From the connection U##_BW_CallData insert table D0MATERIAL and T0MATERIAL. From the connection U##_SQL_CallData insert table CUSTOMERCALLS from Warehouse.dbo.


118


2012

TBI30


3.

Detect Keys of the tables and insert a calculated column with the name BWMATERIALID into the table CUSTOMERCALLS. Use the SQL statement concat('CP-00',toString(PRODUCTID)). This statement adds a prefix CP-00 to each Product ID in the SQL database and harmonizes the key with the Material IDs in SAP NetWeaver BW.

4.

Create Joins between the tables and add the correct cardinality: T0MATERIAL.0MATERIAL → D0MATERIAL.0MATERIAL (cardinality 1:1) D0MATERIAL.0MATERIAL → CUSTOMERCALLS.BWMATERIALID (cardinality 1:n) Do not forget to save the data foundation.

Task 3: Use the multisource data foundation that you have just created in a business layer, check if query results are correct and export it as a universe to the BI Platform repository. 1.

Create a new business layer U##_MSU_CallData and make sure that the objects in the business layer are not created automatically because you would get many objects which the users would not need for reporting. Create the following dimensions and measure: Object

Table field

Dimension: Material Name

T0MATERIAL.0CAPTION

Dimension: Material Group

D0MATERIAL.0MATL_GROUP

Dimension: Material Type

D0MATERIAL.0MATL_TYPE

Measure: Number of Calls Aggregation: Sum

CUSTOMERCALLS.NBCALLS

Do not forget to save the business layer. 2.

2012

Switch to the query view and create a new query with result objects Material Group, Material Type, Material Name and the measure Number of Calls. Execute the query and check the results. Publish the business layer as universe to BI Platform repository.


119


TBI30

Solution 4: Create a Multisource Universe Task 1: Create relational connections to a SQL Server database and a SAP NetWeaver BW InfoCube where the customer data is stored. 1.

2.

Open Information Design Tool and create a new project U##_Multisource_Data in the standard project location on your local disk if this project does not already exist in your local projects. a)

Open Information Design Tool under Start → Programs → SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 4.0 → SAP BusinessObjects BI platform Client Tools → Information Design Tool.

b)

Choose File → New → Project

c)

Enter U##_Multisource_Data and click Finish.

Create a new relational connection in your local project with the resource name U##_SQL_CallData on a MS SQL Server 2005 database (ODBC driver) with the following settings: Authentication Mode


User name

guest

Password

bobobo

Data Source Name

Warehouse

Do not change any of the Configuration Parameters or Custom Parameters.

3.

a)

Select the project U##_Multisource_Data and choose File → New → Relational Connection

b)

Enter U##_SQL_CallData as Resource Name and click Next

c)

Choose Microsoft → MS SQL Server 2005 → ODBC Drivers and click Next.

d)

Enter the four parameters in the table above and click Test Connection and then Finish. You do not need to change any other parameters in this connection.

Publish the connection to the BI Platform repository in the folder Connections\Relational Connections and create a shortcut in your local folder. Use the following credentials to log on: Continued on next page

120


2012

TBI30


4.

System

wdflbmt2268

User Name

User##

Password

Your password

Authentication

SAP

a)

Select the connection U##_SQL_CallData in your local project folder.

b)

Choose File → Publish → Publish Connection to a Repository.

c)

Enter the credentials given above and log on to BI Platform by clicking Connect.

d)

Choose the folder Connections → Relational Connections and click Finish.

e)

When asked for the creation of a shortcut choose Yes and then click Close.

Create a new relational connection in the BI Platform repository with the resource name U##_BW_CallData on a SAP NetWeaver BW InfoCube. Use the following logon credentials for SAP NetWeaver BW: Authentication Mode

Use single sign on

Client

800

Language

EN

System ID

RWB

Application Server - Server Name


System Number

40

InfoProvider

IP_CUSTOM


2012


121


TBI30

Do not change any of the Configuration Parameters or Custom Parameters. a)

In the Repository Resources area of Information Design Tool navigate to wdflbmt2268:6400 \ Connections \ Relational Connections.

b)

In the context menu of the folder Relational Connections choose Insert Relational Connection.

c)

Enter U##_BW_CallData as resource name and click Next.

d)

Choose SAP → SAP NetWeaver BW → SAP Java Connector (JCO) and click Next.

e)

Enter the system and user information stated in the table above.

f)

Select the button on the right side of the InfoProvider field. Click the Search icon and enter IP_CUSTOM. Select the cube and click OK then click Finish.

g)

Confirm to create a shortcut by clicking Yes and select the project U##_Multisource_Data if you get asked for it.

Task 2: Create a multisource data foundation and create joins between the data sources you just created. 1.

Create a multisource data foundation with the resource name U##_MSU_CallData and use the connection shortcuts U##_SQL_CallData.cns and U##_BW_CallData.cns in the data foundation.


122


2012

TBI30


Make sure you do not automatically create tables and joins for the SAP Netweaver BW connection (check Advanced settings of the connection properties). a)

Select the project U##_Multisource_Data and choose File → New → Data Foundation.

b)

Enter U##_MSU_CallData as Resource Name and click Next.

c)

Choose Multisource-Enabled and click Next.

d)

If there is no active CMS session use the following data to log on System

wdflbmt2268

User Name

User##

Password

Your password

Authentication

SAP

and click Next. e)

Activate the checkboxes next to the selections U##_SQL_CallData.cns and U##_BW_CallData.cns and click Next.

f)

Do not change Short Names or Colors for Table Headers. Hint: In the connection Properties of connection U##_BW_CallData, click Advanced and un check Automatically create tables and joins Click Next and click Finish.

2.

Insert the following tables from the connections into the data foundation. From the connection U##_BW_CallData insert table D0MATERIAL and T0MATERIAL. From the connection U##_SQL_CallData insert table CUSTOMERCALLS from Warehouse.dbo. a)

Open the tree of connection U##_BW_CallData and drag the tables D0MATERIAL and T0MATERIAL into the Master area

b)

Open the tree of connection U##_SQL_CallData

c)

Open the Warehouse.dbo element

d)

Drag the table CUSTOMERCALLS to the master area


2012


123


3.

4.

TBI30

Detect Keys of the tables and insert a calculated column with the name BWMATERIALID into the table CUSTOMERCALLS. Use the SQL statement concat('CP-00',toString(PRODUCTID)). This statement adds a prefix CP-00 to each Product ID in the SQL database and harmonizes the key with the Material IDs in SAP NetWeaver BW. a)

Press Ctrl-A In the Master Area to select all tables and choose Detect → Detect Keys....

b)

Right-click the table header of CUSTOMERCALLS and choose Insert Calculated Column... in the context menu.

c)

In the Insert Calculated Column dialog box enter the Name BWMATERIALID

d)

In the Select area type in concat('CP-00',toString(PRODUCTID)) click Validate. If the expression is valid click OK.

Create Joins between the tables and add the correct cardinality: T0MATERIAL.0MATERIAL → D0MATERIAL.0MATERIAL (cardinality 1:1) D0MATERIAL.0MATERIAL → CUSTOMERCALLS.BWMATERIALID (cardinality 1:n) Do not forget to save the data foundation. a)

To create Joins drag lines from the table field T0MATERIAL.0MATERIAL to the table field D0MATERIAL.0MATERIAL. Do the same for D0MATERIAL.0MATERIAL and CUSTOMERCALLS.BWMATERIALID

b)

Detect the cardinalities by choosing Detect → Detect Cardinalities in the master area. In the Detect Cardinalities dialog box click Check all and Detect Selected.

c)

Click Save to save the multisource data foundation.

Task 3: Use the multisource data foundation that you have just created in a business layer, check if query results are correct and export it as a universe to the BI Platform repository. 1.

Create a new business layer U##_MSU_CallData and make sure that the objects in the business layer are not created automatically because you would get many objects which the users would not need for reporting. Create the following dimensions and measure:


124


2012

TBI30


Object

Table field

Dimension: Material Name

T0MATERIAL.0CAPTION

Dimension: Material Group

D0MATERIAL.0MATL_GROUP

Dimension: Material Type

D0MATERIAL.0MATL_TYPE

Measure: Number of Calls Aggregation: Sum

CUSTOMERCALLS.NBCALLS

Do not forget to save the business layer. a)

Select the project U##_Multisource_Data and choose File → New → Business Layer in the menu.

b)

Choose Relational Data Source and click Next.

c)

Enter U##_MSU_CallData as resource name and click Next

d)

Select Data foundation U##_MSU_CallData, uncheck all checkmarks because classes and objects should not be created automatically. Click Finish.

e)

Drag the table field 0CAPTION from the table T0MATERIAL to the Business Layer area of the screen. Double-click the dimension object that appears and change the name to Material Name.

f)

Drag the table field 0MATL_GROUP from the table D0MATERIAL to the Business Layer area of the screen. Double-click the dimension object that appears and change the name to Material Group.

g)

Drag the table field 0MATL_TYPE from the table D0MATERIAL to the Business Layer area of the screen. Double-click the dimension object that appears and change the name to Material Type.

h)

Drag the table field NBCALLS from the table CUSTOMERCALLS to the Business Layer area of the screen. Change the dimension object to a measure by right-clinking it and choosing Turn into measure(s).

i)

Double-click the measure object that appears and change the name to Number of Calls and set Aggregation function to Sum.

j)

Save the business layer.


2012


125


2.

126

TBI30

Switch to the query view and create a new query with result objects Material Group, Material Type, Material Name and the measure Number of Calls. Execute the query and check the results. Publish the business layer as universe to BI Platform repository. a)

In Information Design Tool switch in the open business layer U##_MSU_CallData to Queries view.

b)

Click the Insert Queries icon and drag Material Group, Material Type, Material Name, and Number of Calls to the Result Objects area (in that order).

c)

Click OK and the button Execute query. You should see values in all of the columns in the query result.

d)

Right-click the business layer in the local project U##_Multisource_Data and choose Publish → To a Repository.. from the context menu.

e)

You do not need to check integrity here, click Finish and Close and save the universe to the folder Universes \ WebI Universes


2012

TBI30


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create different relational connections, a data foundation for multisource universes and a corresponding business layer • Publish multisource universes and use them in the query panel

2012


127

Unit Summary

TBI30

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the concept of the semantic layer • Explain new features of the Semantic Layer in SAP Business Intelligence 4.0 • Describe the components of a BI 4.0 Universe that has been designed in the Information Design Tool • Work with projects, relational database connections, data foundations and business layers • Create connections and business layers for OLAP data sources • Create different relational connections, a data foundation for multisource universes and a corresponding business layer • Publish multisource universes and use them in the query panel

128


2012

Unit 4 SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Unit Overview This unit provides you an overview on SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence and describes how to create Web Intelligence documents.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • •

Classify the main target groups as well as the main business scenarios where users can benefit from using SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Discuss the positioning of SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence within the SAP Business Intelligence portfolio Explain basic Web Intelligence functions Explain how to use advanced Web Intelligence functions Create a Web Intelligence document with advanced functions on an universe Explain the SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse connectivity options Explain how to use BEx queries in Web Intelligence using BICS connection Describe the elements of SAP NetWeaver BW OLAP universes Describe how SAP NetWeaver BW objects are mapped and used in an universe

Unit Contents Lesson: Introduction to SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence .........130 Exercise 5: Create a Web Intelligence document based on an Existing Universe .....................................................................141 Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence: Advanced Functions.146 Exercise 6: Enhance the Presentation of a Web Intelligence Document....................................................................153 Lesson: Web Intelligence and SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Data Sources...........................................................................160 Exercise 7: Create a Web Intelligence Document on SAP NetWeaver BW Data Sources...........................................................177

2012


129

Unit 4: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence

TBI30

Lesson: Introduction to SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Lesson Overview This lesson provides an introduction to SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence and how to create Web Intelligence document based on existing Universes.


Classify the main target groups as well as the main business scenarios where users can benefit from using SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Discuss the positioning of SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence within the SAP Business Intelligence portfolio Explain basic Web Intelligence functions

Business Example You plan to implement Web Intelligence with SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse access as your query and ad hoc reporting solution. You need to evaluate if SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence will cover the requirements of your business user target group.

Introducing SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence is a BI tool focusing on the concept of self service reporting. It provides the user the ability to create ad hoc new reports or change existing reports based on new business requirements. SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence empowers the user to answer business questions using a simple and intuitive user interface and typically providing access to a broader range or data.

130


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Introduction to SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence

Figure 49: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence 4.0 delivers

Broad access to Data and Content • • •

Single user experience for access to relational, BW, and MSAS data, Web Services and Excel files Combine multiple heterogeneous data sources in a single report Merging multiple data sources done by creator of report without IT

Flexible User Experience • • •

Interactivity on formatted reports without hitting the data source Click-simple, guided analysis, and report navigation Business Users can modify formatted reports to answer their own questions

Combination of Web and Offline • • •

2012

Unique online/offline capabilities, support traveling users A single interface for all business users: Office, mobile and remote One file output, readable by any deployment option


131


TBI30

Use Cases and Target Groups for SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence

Figure 50: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence

SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence allows business users to dynamically create data-relevant queries; apply filters to the data; sort, slice, and dice through data; drill down; find exceptions; and create calculations. In addition, SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence is for casual users looking for an intuitive BI tool for ad hoc reporting and analysis. Using SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence, you can easily create a simple sales report showing revenue broken down by several dimensions. Or you can change the sales report to show the top 10 areas based on revenue. In addition, SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence allows you to reduce your IT department’s workload of creating or changing reports and provide your users with a real self-service reporting environment.

132


2012

TBI30


Figure 51: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence: Enable Users to Answer Their Own Questions

The following graphic outlines the different users Web Intelligence target:

Figure 52: Web Intelligence Target Groups

Querying with SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence allows you to perform querying, reporting, and analysis tasks in a single tool.

2012


133


TBI30

To gather the data you require, you begin by creating a SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence document and selecting the data source that will give you access to the appropriate data (for example, a SAP BusinessObjects Universe or a BEx query). Next, you use the SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Query Panel to add and organize the objects and building queries.

Figure 53: Web Intelligence Query Panel

When you build a query in the SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Query Panel, you select the universe objects and query filters that represent your business question. The query is sent to the SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence server, if you are connected to the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform, which generates the final query statements. The query is then sent to the database to retrieve the data mapped to the objects you selected. The database returns the data to the SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence server, which populates the data as a data provider. This information is then formatted and displayed in a SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence document as a simple table, or even a complex chart, ready for your analysis.

134


2012

TBI30


Figure 54: About the Query Process in Web Intelligence

A BusinessObjects Web Intelligence document can contain multiple reports and each report may have been built using different queries. Once you run the query and retrieve the data that interests you, you can structure and organize the data as you wish in the SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence document.

Reporting with SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence You can use SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence document features to create professional reports from the data you retrieve. Once you have the data you need, you can display or present it in multiple ways. • • •

2012

As a table (horizontal, vertical, form, or cross tab) As a chart (for example bar, line, pie, or radar) As a multiple-block report containing large amounts of data


135


TBI30

Figure 55: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Documents Formats

Analyzing with SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence You can analyze your reports and switch your business perspective by dragging and dropping objects, inserting calculations, and changing the display to make the important information easy to see at a glance. You can also perform multidimensional analysis by looking at results at a global level or drilling down to a more detailed level of information.

136


2012

TBI30


Figure 56: Report Drill Down in SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence

Explain Basic Functions of SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence You perform interactive analysis with SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence by creating new Web Intelligence documents based on data you want to analyze, or by opening pre-existing documents. Creating a new document involves two steps: • •

Choosing the appropriate data source Using the Web Intelligence Query Panel to create a query that will determine which data is extracted from the database

Users can choose to access Web Intelligence either as a stand-alone application on their desktop, or as a web application from within the BI Launch Pad.

Working in Application Modes You build queries, documents, and reports and analyze the data in reports using three application modes: Data, Reading and Design. Depending on the mode you choose, the toolboxes and toolbars relevant to the mode are made available and other toolboxes and toolbars are either invisible or disabled.

2012


137


138

TBI30

Mode

Description

Data

In Data mode you create, edit and manage queries that supply data to reports. You can, for example, create a new data provider, rename a data provider, or change the source from which a data provider draws its data. All the data providers used by the current document appear in a list in Data mode, and all toolboxes not related to working with data providers are disabled. Data view is not available in the HTML interface.

Reading

Reading mode allows you to view existing reports, search for text in reports, track changes in report data or drill down on report data. The main application toolbar and the Left Panel are available in Reading mode. Toolboxes are not available.

Design

Design mode allows you to perform a wide range of analysis tasks. You can, for example, add and delete report elements such as tables or charts, apply conditional formatting rules, and enhance reports with formulas and variables. You can work with the report structure only in Design mode, or with the report populated with data. Working with the report structure only allows you to make modifications without accessing the server. When you work with reports populated with data, each change you make is applied on the server. If you are making numerous modifications, we recommend to work with the report structure only, and to populate the report with data when you have finished your modifications.


2012

TBI30


SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Application Structure

Figure 57: Web Intelligence User Interface Components

Filtering Data in SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence You limit the data returned to the document by applying filters when you define the query. You can apply filters at two levels within a document: Comparing query filters and report filters Filter

Description

Query filter

This filter is defined on the query; they limit the data retrieved from the data source and returned to the document. A query filter is created in the Query panel. There are four types of query filters that you can use in Web Intelligence: • • •

2012

Predefined query filters – these are built right into the universe Single and multi value filters Prompted filters


139


• Report filter

TBI30

Complex filters

This filter allows you to restrict the data shown in the report simply by hiding the data you are not interested in. The data is still contained in the document; it is just hidden from the report display. A report filter is created in the Report panel in the Design mode.

Displaying Data in Tables The simplest style for displaying data is tables. Web Intelligence provides four different types of tables: vertical, horizontal or financial tables, cross tab, and form. When you first create a new document by building and running a query, the data retrieved is generally displayed in a vertical table.

Displaying Data in Charts You can create charts in one of three ways: • • •

140

You can select an existing table or cross tab and convert it to a chart using the right-click menu. You can right-click in the Report panel and select Insert. Then Choose a chart type. You can create a blank chart by dragging a chart type from the Report Elements tab into the Report panel, then dragging objects from the Available objects pane to fill the new chart with data values.


2012

TBI30


Exercise 5: Create a Web Intelligence document based on an Existing Universe Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a Web Intelligence report based on an existing universe

Business Example Your organization uses Web Intelligence to view, analyze, and create reports based on data about sales, products, and stores. You need to get familiar with the basic functions of Web Intelligence.

Task: Create a Web Intelligence document based on an existing universe Create a new Web Intelligence document based on the existing eFashion.unx. 1.

Launch SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Desktop.

2.

Create a query with the dimensions State, Store name and the measure Sales revenue (in that order) and execute it to view the results.

3.

Rename the Report Title to Sales Revenue Report.

4.

Edit the document you just created to include a listing for Quantity sold by Year and Quarter.

5.

Create a query filter to show only data for the store e-Fashion Dallas.

6.

Create a report filter to show only data for the year 2004.

7.

Switch from the Design mode to Reading mode and compare the displayed toolboxes and toolbars. Note: In the Reading mode you perform simple viewing tasks, while the Design mode lets you modify the document that you are viewing.

8.

2012

Save your report in the BusinessObjects BI platform folder Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## with the name U## Sales Revenue Report


141


TBI30

Solution 5: Create a Web Intelligence document based on an Existing Universe Task: Create a Web Intelligence document based on an existing universe Create a new Web Intelligence document based on the existing eFashion.unx. 1.

Launch SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Desktop. a)

2.

3.

Select Start → Programs → SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 4.0 → SAP BusinessObjects BI platform Client Tools → Interactive Analysis Desktop

Create a query with the dimensions State, Store name and the measure Sales revenue (in that order) and execute it to view the results. a)

Select the Universe data source.

b)

Enter your user information and click Log On. Field Name

Value

System

Assigned system

User name

user## (replace ## with your assigned group number)

Password

Enter your password

Authentication

SAP

c)

In the Universe window, select the eFashion.unx universe.

d)

In the Query Panel, expand the node Store and drag State into the Result Objects pane.

e)

Expand the node Store and drag Store name into the Result Objects pane.

f)

Expand the node Measures and drag Sales revenue into the Result Objects pane.

g)

Click Run Query

.

Rename the Report Title to Sales Revenue Report. a)

Double-click the title Report 1 tab and enter Sales Revenue Report in the New value field.


142


2012

TBI30


4.

Edit the document you just created to include a listing for Quantity sold by Year and Quarter. a)

Open the Data Access tab and click Edit

b)

Expand the node Time period and drag Year and Quarter into the Result Objects pane left to State.

c)

Expand the node Measures and drag Quantity sold into the Result Objects pane.

d)

Click Run Query

e)

Drag the added objects into the report panel. Your report should appear as shown below:

.

.

Figure 58: Sales Revenue Report


2012


143


5.

6.

7.

TBI30

Create a query filter to show only data for the store e-Fashion Dallas. a)

In the Data Access tab, click Edit

b)

Select Store name and drag it into the Query Filters pane

c)

Click the arrow on the right of the query filter and select Value(s) from List.

d)

Select the store name e-Fashion Dallas and add it to the Selected Value(s) pane.

e)

Click OK.

f)

Execute the report by clicking Run Query

.

.

Create a report filter to show only data for the year 2004. a)

Click on the year column and navigate to the Analysis tab.

b)

Select Filter → Add Filter.

c)

Add the year 2004 to the Selected Value(s) and click OK.

Switch from the Design mode to Reading mode and compare the displayed toolboxes and toolbars. Note: In the Reading mode you perform simple viewing tasks, while the Design mode lets you modify the document that you are viewing. a)

8.

144

Click Reading in the main toolbar and compare it with the Design mode.

Save your report in the BusinessObjects BI platform folder Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## with the name U## Sales Revenue Report a)

Click the arrow next to Save on the toolbar in the File tab and select Publish to... to display the Publish a document to the server dialog box.

b)

Navigate to the folder Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## and enter the name U## Sales Revenue Report.

c)

Click Save.

d)

Close Interactive Analysis Desktop.


2012

TBI30


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Classify the main target groups as well as the main business scenarios where users can benefit from using SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence • Discuss the positioning of SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence within the SAP Business Intelligence portfolio • Explain basic Web Intelligence functions

2012


145


TBI30

Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence: Advanced Functions Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn about advanced functions in SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence.


Explain how to use advanced Web Intelligence functions Create a Web Intelligence document with advanced functions on an universe

Business Example You decided to use SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence as ad hoc reporting tool for your business users. You need a comprehensive overview of advanced functions of Web Intelligence.

Using Advanced Functions in SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence is a query, reporting, and analysis tool that allows you to access the data in your corporate databases directly from within SAP BusinessObjects BI Launch Pad and to present and analyze this information in a Web Intelligence document. As you edit your reports in Web Intelligence documents, several functions are available to help you structure and enhance your reports so that they show exactly the information you need in the clearest way possible.

Using Breaks Breaks allow you to structure the data in a table into groups and make the data easier to view and interpret. You apply breaks on the data and values that you select. When you apply a break, Web Intelligence separates all the data for each unique value of the selected variable. It inserts a blank row or column after each value, which allows you to easily insert subtotals for the group of data. As a long table can be tedious to read and understand, you can apply breaks to the table. The data becomes much clearer and simpler to read.

146


2012

TBI30

Lesson: SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence: Advanced Functions

Figure 59: Using Breaks in a Web Intelligence Document

Note: When you insert a break on a dimension, the values for the dimension are automatically sorted in ascending order.

Using Calculations Web Intelligence provides standard calculation functions to help you make quick calculations on the data in your reports. The following standard calculations are available: Using calculations

2012

Calculation

Description

Sum

Calculates the sum of the selected data.

Count

Counts all rows for a measure object or count distinct rows for a dimension or detail object.

Average

Calculates the average of the data.

Minimum

Displays the minimum value of the selected data.


147


TBI30

Maximum

Displays the maximum value of the selected data.

Percentage

Displays the selected data as a percentage of the total. The results of the percentage are displayed in an additional column or row of the table. Note: Percentages are calculated for the selected measure compared to the total results for that measure on the table or break. To calculate the percentage of one measure compared to another measure, you need to build a custom calculation.

Default

Applies the default aggregation function to a standard measure, or the database aggregation function to a smart measure.

When you apply standard calculations to table columns, the calculation results appear in footers. One footer is added for each calculation. If standard calculations are not sufficient for your needs, you can use the formula language to build custom calculations. A custom calculation is a formula that can consist of report objects, functions and operators. Formulas have a calculation context that you can specify explicitly if you choose. For example, you can show the average revenue per sale using a custom calculation: You have a report with Sales Revenue and Number Sold objects. To add revenue per sale to the report, the calculation [Sales Revenue] / [Number Sold] gives this value by dividing the revenue by the number of items sold in order to give the revenue per item.

Grouping Information with Sections Sections allow you to split report information into smaller, more comprehensible parts. For example, you can group quarterly revenue results into sections on a report. The grouped value appears as a header outside the block instead of remaining within the block when you are using breaks.

148


2012

TBI30


Figure 60: Grouping Information with Sections

Using Sorts You can apply sorts to the results displayed in tables, to organize the order in which results are displayed in a column or row. You can apply sorts to any dimensions, measures, or details displayed in a table. Sorting dimensions and details helps you organize results chronologically, while sorting measures helps you see highest or lowest results at a glance. Sorts in Web Intelligence allow you to apply the following orders: •

Default This is sometimes referred to as the “natural” order. Depending on the type of data in the column or row, the results are sorted as follows:

• • •

– Ascending numeric order for numeric data – Ascending chronological order for date – Ascending alphabetical order for alphanumeric data Ascending Descending Custom You define your own sort order. Custom sorts allow you to define your own order for the data displayed in a report. For example, to display the month names in chronological order, you can apply a custom sort.

2012


149


TBI30

Figure 61: Apply a Custom Sort in Web Intelligence

Using Input Controls Input controls provide a convenient, easily accessible method for filtering and analyzing report data. You define input controls using standard windows controls such as text boxes and radio buttons. You associate these controls with report elements such as tables or section headers, and use the controls to filter the data in the report elements. When you select values in the input control, you filter the values in the associated report elements by the values you selected. You can also define tables and charts as input controls. When you select a value in the table or chart, you filter the values in the associated report elements by the values you selected. You can use input controls to analyze different scenarios by changing the value of variables. You define a variable with a constant value, then assign an input control, for example a slider, to the variable. You can then change the value of the variable using the slider control; if the variable is part of a formula, you can use the slider control to examine different formula results based on the variable value. Input controls are report-specific. They are grouped on the Input Controls tab on the Left Pane.

Formatting Reports You can use the Format toolbar to format tables and charts in your Web Intelligence document. For example, you can select a background color for your table or a single cell, adjust the font size, or define alternate row and column colors.. The Page Setup toolbar allows you to modify the layout of your document.

150


2012

TBI30


Highlighting Data Using Conditional Formatting Conditional formatting enables you to highlight results or change formatting based on data. You can, for example, conditionally format results to highlight particularly high or low results with specific colors or with text comments, such as “High Performer” or“ Low Performer” .

Managing Queries with the Web Intelligence Data Manager Data Manager is an application perspective in Web Intelligence allowing to manage all your data from one single place: • • •

Data Providers – Insert, Delete, Update, Change Source, View results Local Variables – Create, Modify, Delete Merged Dimensions – Create, Modify, Delete

You can use the Data Manager to view, explore, and manage all the queries in a document. It consists of a Data pane that you use to explore the queries, and a list display that changes depending on the selection in the Data pane. You use the Data Manager by switching to Data view. In Data view, the toolboxes in the Data Access group only are available.

Changing the Data Source of a Query You can change the data source of a query without losing query definition, document structure and formatting. This is useful, for example, when you want to develop a document on a universe in a test environment, then change to a universe in a production environment. Another use case is, when you want to use an existing document as a template for formatting. You can change the source of the data by mapping objects to different objects in the same query or in a different query. It is not possible to change between all data sources. The following table lists the possible changes:

2012


151


TBI30

Changing the data source of a query Personal BEx query data provider (csv, Excel)

UNV universe

UNX universe on relational data source

UNX universe on OLAP data source

Change possible

Change possible

Change possible

Change possible

UNX universe on relational data source

Change possible

Change possible

Change possible

UNX universe on OLAP data source

Change possible

Change possible

Change possible

UNV universe

Advanced Analysis workspace

Change possible

Personal data provider (csv, Excel)

Change possible

BEx query Advanced Analysis workspace

Change possible

When you choose the query whose data source you want to change, you are presented only with those data sources to which a change is possible. You can change the data source in the Java interface or Web Intelligence Desktop only. In Web Intelligence Desktop, you also have the option to change the data source of queries based on personal data files such as Excel files.

152


2012

TBI30


Exercise 6: Enhance the Presentation of a Web Intelligence Document Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Use breaks, sections and calculations to organize the presentation of data in a report

Business Example You need to learn how to improve the presentation of a report to make information easier to understand.

Task: Create a new Web Intelligence document using the eFahion.unx universe and enhance the presentation of your report using breaks, sections and calculations. 1.

Launch SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Desktop.

2.

Create a query showing State, Year, Quarter and the measure Quantity sold. Use the existing eFashion.unx universe as datasource.

3.

Apply a break on the State and Year columns and set break properties.

4.

Add a sum and percentage to the Quantity sold column

5.

Filter your report to show only data for Colorado.

6.

Save your report in the BusinessObjects BI platform folder Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## with the name U## WebI Breaks. Do not close the application.

7.

Remove all breaks and filter.

8.

Create sections on State and Year.

9.

Save your report in the BusinessObjects BI platform folder Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## with the name U## WebI Sections.

10. What is the difference between applying breaks and sections to a report?

2012


153


TBI30

Solution 6: Enhance the Presentation of a Web Intelligence Document Task: Create a new Web Intelligence document using the eFahion.unx universe and enhance the presentation of your report using breaks, sections and calculations. 1.

Launch SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Desktop. a)

2.

Select Start → Programs → SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 4.0→ SAP BusinessObjects BI platform Client Tools→ Interactive Analysis Desktop.

Create a query showing State, Year, Quarter and the measure Quantity sold. Use the existing eFashion.unx universe as datasource. a)

Select the Universe datasource.

b)

If requested, enter your user information and click Log On. Field name

Value

System

Assigned system

User name


Password

Enter your password

Authentication

SAP

c)

In the Universe window, select the eFashion.unx universe.

d)

In the Query Panel, expand the node Store and drag State into the Result Objects pane.

e)

Expand the node Time period and drag Year and Quarter into the Result Objects pane.

f)

Expand the node Measures and drag Quantity sold into the Result Objects pane.

g)

Click Run Query.


154


2012

TBI30


3.

Apply a break on the State and Year columns and set break properties. a)

Select the State column and select Analysis → Display → Break → Add Break.

b)

Repeat the previous step for the Year column.

c)

Select Analysis → Display → Break → Manage Breaks....

d)

In the Manage Breaks window, select State and choose Duplicate values → Merge. Deselect the Break Header checkbox.

e) 4.

Repeat the previous step for Year and click OK.

Add a sum and percentage to the Quantity sold column a)

Select the Quantity sold column and select Analysis → Functions → Sum.

b)

Select the Quantity sold column and select Analysis → Functions → More → Percentage.


2012


155


5.

TBI30

Filter your report to show only data for Colorado. a)

Select the State column and select Analysis → Filters → Add Filter.

b)

In the Report Filter window, select Colorado and add it to the Selected value(s).

c)

Click OK. Your report should display as follows:

Figure 62: Using Breaks to Organize Data in a Report

6.

Save your report in the BusinessObjects BI platform folder Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## with the name U## WebI Breaks. Do not close the application. a)


b)

Navigate to the folderPublic Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## and enter the name U## WebI Breaks.

c)

Click Save.

d)

Do not close the application.


156


2012

TBI30


7.

8.

Remove all breaks and filter. a)

Select a cell in the report and select Analysis → Display → Remove All Breaks

b)

Select the State column and select Analysis → Filters → Remove Filter.

Create sections on State and Year. a)

Right-click the State column and choose Set as Section.

b)

Repeat the previous step for the Year column. Your report should display as follows:

Figure 63: Using Sections to Organize Data in a Report

9.

Save your report in the BusinessObjects BI platform folder Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## with the name U## WebI Sections. a)


b)

Navigate to the folder Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## and enter the name U## WebI Sections.

c)

Click Save.


2012


157


TBI30

10. What is the difference between applying breaks and sections to a report? Answer: The difference is that by applying sections the grouped value appears as a header outside the block instead of remaining within the block. A break only groups within a block, whereas sectioning groups the entire report.

158


2012

TBI30


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain how to use advanced Web Intelligence functions • Create a Web Intelligence document with advanced functions on an universe

2012


159


TBI30

Lesson: Web Intelligence and SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Data Sources Lesson Overview This lesson provides an overview of the connectivity options of Web Intelligence to SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse.

Lesson Objectives After completing this lesson, you will be able to: • • • •

Explain the SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse connectivity options Explain how to use BEx queries in Web Intelligence using BICS connection Describe the elements of SAP NetWeaver BW OLAP universes Describe how SAP NetWeaver BW objects are mapped and used in an universe

Business Example You plan to implement SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence with SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse access as your query and ad hoc reporting solution. You need a comprehensive overview of the connectivity options and how they integrate and complement each other. You need this information to understand the relationship between BEx queries and universes.

Connectivity Options to SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse The SAP data sources available from Web Intelligence are: •

SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse – –

160

Direct access to BEx queries via BI Consumer Services (BICS) SQL access to BW InfoProviders (Relational universe 4.0 created with the Information Design Tool)


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Web Intelligence and SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Data Sources

Figure 64: Options to Access SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse

Note: • •

The universe 4.x to InfoProvider line is an SQL approach and not really recommended (except multisource). The recommended connectivity is direct access via BICS

Using Business Explorer Queries in Web Intelligence With SAP BusinessObjects BI 4.0 SAP introduced a new access method – direct access, which allows you to connect to a BEx query directly without creating an universe. We recommend to use this BI Consumer Services connectivity to access your SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse data.

2012


161


TBI30

Figure 65: Connect directly to BEx Query

Accessing BEx queries is similar to accessing an universe except they are not part of the BI platform: • • • •

The starting point is an OLAP connection to enable access to the SAP BW system from the BI platform. OLAP connections are shared across the product suite (SAP Crystal Reports, Analysis, Web Intelligence) Passing from the BI platform to one or more SAP BW systems is seamless, the user browses from the BI platform up to the BEx query transparently. SSO is needed or BW credential must be set in the OLAP connection.

The OLAP connection let you define access to: • • •

162

SAP NetWeaver BW system InfoCube / MultiProvider BEx Query


2012

TBI30


Figure 66: Select a BW BEx Query

In the Web Intelligence Query Panel you are presented the metadata provided by SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse.

Describing Query Elements in SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Query elements include characteristics, key figures, calculated key figures (formulas), restricted key figures, and reusable structures. Queries may have filters on characteristic values or filters on key figure values (conditions) assigned to select a certain slice of information from the InfoProvider. They may be parameterized by query variables. All characteristics, navigational attributes, and key figures available through an InfoProvider are available for use in the Query Designer. Upon selection of an InfoProvider, the designer will see a list of metadata defining the following elements: •

Structures These are collections of selections and formulas that provide layout criteria for a row or column that may be used by queries for a particular InfoProvider. Structures may contain a combination of key figures, characteristics, and formulas. A reusable structure is a particular, commonly used collection of key figures or characteristics stored in the Metadata Repository for reuse in multiple queries (for example, a plan/actual variance or a contribution margin schema).

•

2012

Filters


163


TBI30

Predefined filter criteria for the whole query that may be reused in all queries for a particular InfoProvider. A filter may contain any combination of characteristics and their filter values. A filter specifies the size of the subcube, as well as the initial navigation state displayed at query startup. •

Key Figures A type of InfoObject used to record quantitative facts or measures. All of the key figures for a particular InfoProvider are available for queries. A calculated key figure is a formula consisting of basic, restricted, or other calculated key figures available in the InfoProvider stored in the Metadata Repository for reuse in multiple queries (for example, an average discount rate). A restricted key figure has an associated filter on certain characteristic values stored in the Metadata Repository for reuse in multiple queries (for example, year to date (YTD) sales of the previous year). A query consists of metadata elements arranged in rows, columns, and free characteristics. All key figures are presented with the Unit and Formatted Value in the Web Intelligence Query Panel

•

Dimensions Dimensions refer to the grouping of characteristic InfoObjects in InfoCubes.

Before using BEx Queries in Web Intelligence Note: Only BEx queries with the flag Allow External Access to the Query are eligible for reporting (only these queries are visible for selection within Web Intelligence). Before setting the BEx query MDX flag Allow External Access to the Query, the administrator must ensure that the BEx query complies with reporting constraints concerning the query definition. These are described in the following table:

164

BEx Query Feature

Web Intelligence Limitation

Linked nodes

Linked nodes are not displayed.

Lower level nodes

Lower level nodes are always shown after the main node.

Decimal number

The BEx query decimal number definition is not consumed in Web Intelligence. Use the formatted value instead if you need to keep the exact decimal setting in your report. You can also apply the decimal setting in the table and chart of your report.


2012

TBI30

2012


Variable orders

Variables are displayed with respect to the variable dependency (less dependent first) rather than the order defined in the BEx query.

Number of objects allowed in a query

Do not use more than 50 objects in a BEx query, otherwise an error occurs.

Variables dependent on compound characteristics and the parent object

When there are dependencies between variables in compound characteristics and their parent, the dependencies are not guaranteed.

Row/Column display as hierarchy

It is not possible to show an overall hierarchy out of an axis hierarchy. The characteristics, hierarchies, and key figures that make up the hierarchy are retained.

Variables on default values

default values are fully supported

Filters as default values

Not supported, these are removed from the BEx query. The filter will be ignored, or, if a variable is used, the variable prompt will display, but the user response is ignored. Move any restriction based on a variable into the filter zone in order for it to be taken into account for reporting.

Expand to level

By default, hierarchies are not expanded to a given level. To reproduce this behavior, expand the table and chart in the report, then save the document.

Query exceptions

These are not taken into account in Web Intelligence. Apply conditional formatting in Web Intelligence instead.

Complex selection

When a variable is defined to support the complex selection, there is no equivalent. This is limited to range selection.

Zero suppression

Rows of zero values are not removed from the result table.

Query default layout

Default positions of characteristics in Rows / Columns are not reproduced.

Position of lower level nodes

These are always below the upper levels.


165


TBI30

Local calculations (Rank, Minimum...) These are removed from the Bex query. Avoid the use of these, prefer the equivalent calculation function in the report. Formula with calculation

It is recommended to avoid Formula with calculation depending on the layout (“Percentage share of result” ) that are not supported. You can use equivalent calculation function in the Web Intelligence report.

Hierarchical measure structures

Hierarchical measure structures are displayed as a flat list of measure.

Conditions

Conditions are not supported.

Creating a Web Intelligence Document on a Multi Structure Query A SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse query can contain up to two structures. By creating such a query the user defines a report with a grid type of layout. When creating a Web Intelligence query on top of an SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse query with multiple structures, the structure with the characteristic is turned into a hierarchy, and the member selector can be used to find objects in the Query Panel.

Using Universes on SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse InfoProviders in Web Intelligence In the previous BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.x releases you created universes when connecting to your SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse system. Universe Design Tool that has been used for creating universes on top of SAP BW InfoProviders or queries in SAP BusinessObjects XI 3.x is still shipped with SAP BusinessObjects BI 4.0. That is, to enable a smooth transition and to protect your past investment. That means XI 3.x universes will work as is in Web Intelligence 4.0. However, we recommend using SAP BusinessObjects 4.0 in combination with the new BICS direct connectivity.

166


2012

TBI30


How SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Objects are Mapped and Used in the Universe

Figure 67: Mapping SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse and SAP BusinessObjects XI 3.1 Universe

All InfoObjects in the BEx Query set as rows, columns, free characteristics, and filters are exposed to the universe. This includes characteristics, hierarchies, key figures, structures, and variables Hierarchies are mapped, allowing Web Intelligence users to drill down according to BW hierarchies. For InfoCubes, all the dimensions, key figures, and hierarchies are mapped. The following table shows the universe objects created for each BW object. Dimensions and Characteristics SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse object

Universe objects created

Dimension Group

Class

Characteristic

Subclass with dimension and detail objects

Characteristic with hierarchy

2012

If data source is a BEx Query: Subclass containing dimension and detail objects for each hierarchy level in the currently defined hierarchy.


167


SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse object

TBI30

Universe objects created If data source is an InfoCube: Subclasses containing dimension and detail objects for each hierarchy level for all hierarchies defined for the characteristic.

Attributes SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse object


Navigational attribute

Subclass with dimension and detail objects (identical to characteristic)

Display Attribute

Detail object for the dimension

Structures SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse object


Structure based on Characteristics (BEx Queries only)

Class with single dimension object for the structure

KeyFigure Structure

Class

KeyFigures

168

SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse object


Key Figure

Measure object in the class for the Key Figure structure with dimension objects for units/currency

Calculated Key Figure (BEx Queries only)

Measure and dimension objects (same as Key Figure)

Restricted Key Figure (BEx Queries only)

Measure and dimension objects (same as Key Figure)


2012

TBI30


Variables SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse object


Variables (BEx Queries only)

Filter mandatory in query In the class for the dimension to which the variable applies, two dimension objects supporting the list of values, one for caption, one for description.

Key date variable (BEx Queries only)

Universe parameters defining key date variable in the universe

Characteristics in the Filters section of the BEx Query are not mapped. However, the filtering applies to the universe. If the filter has a fixed value, the filter is applied transparently when running the Web Intelligence query. If the characteristic has a variable defined, the variable is mapped with these limitations: • •

The variable always behaves like a mandatory variable Hierarchy and hierarchy node variables are not supported

To avoid these limitations, we recommend moving the characteristic from the Filter section to the free section of the BEx Query.

Leveraging the Semantic Layer As part of SAP BusinessObjects 4.0 you can leverage the direct BICS connectivity (recommended) or leverage the semantic layer. By leveraging the semantic layer you can create an universe with a relational view on top of SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse in the Information Design Tool. The relational view on top of SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse is helpful when you need to combine data from multiple sources and one of them being SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse.

Using SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Objects in Web Intelligence 4.0 A general recommendation is to use the direct access with the BI Consumer Services (BICS) connectivity on a Business Explorer query. The advantage here is that no universe has to be created and maintained and that all elements of the Business Explorer query can be used to prepare data for the needs of reporting users. Web Intelligence automatically maps data from the BEx query to hierarchies, attributes, dimensions and measures as in universe-based hierarchical queries. The following table shows how the BEx Query Elements are mapped with Web Intelligence 4.0:

2012


169


TBI30

How BEx Query Elements are mapped in Web Intelligence 4.0 BEx Query Element

BI Client Tool mapping

Characteristic

Each Characteristic is available with all modeled descriptions and all modeled Display Attributes.

Hierarchies

All hierarchies are available as part of the available metadata and can be leveraged in the reporting tool.

Key Figures

All key figures are available as numeric value and a separate field for the Unit and for the Formatted Value is available.

Calculated / Restricted Each calculated / restricted key figure is treated in the Key Figure same way as a key figure. The user does not have access to the underlying definition in the BI Client tool. Filter

Filters will be applied to the underlying BEx query but the user does not have access to the actual filter definition.

Navigational Attributes

Navigational Attributes are being treated identical to a characteristic.

Display Attribute

Display attributes are available as subordinates of the characteristic.

Variables

Variables from the BEx query are treated as prompts and are available to the BI Client Tool.

Structure

Structures are available and elements of a structure can be selected / deselected. Conditions are not supported.

Conditions Display Settings

Mostly supported as of SAP BusinessObjects 4.0 (Exceptions like local calculations). Further enhancements are planned.

Objects Mapping for Reporting off SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse in Web Intelligence The following tables show the objects for reporting of SAP NetWeaver BW in Web Intelligence:

170


2012

TBI30


Objects mapping for reporting off SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse in Web Intelligence Web Intelligence Dimension

Relational Universe (.UNX created in Information Design Tool)

InfoCube Characteristic Navigational Attribute

Attribute

Display Attribute

Measure

Key Figure

Measure Attribute Key Figure Attribute Currency/Unit Key Figure Formatted Value

N/A The BEX Query is "NA" because you do not use a universe in 4.x to access a BEx query , only a connection.

Dimension

Hierarchy Level Navigational Attribute Key Figure Attribute Currency/Unit Key Figure Formatted Value

Hierarchy Level Navigational Attribute Key Figure Attribute Currency/Unit Key Figure Formatted Value

Attribute (former Detail)

Display Attribute

Display Attribute

Measure

Key Figure

Key Figure

OLAP Universe (.UNV created in Universe Design Tool)

Dimension

Characteristic Navigational Attribute

Attribute

Display Attribute

Measure

Key Figure

Measure Attribute N/A

BEx Query

2012

BEx Query

Key Figure Attribute Currency/Unit Key Figure Formatted Value

Hierarchy

Hierarchy structure

Level

Level


171


TBI30

Using SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Hierarchies in Web Intelligence This section explains how to leverage SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse hierarchies into Web Intelligence including hierarchy and hierarchy node variables. A hierarchy is an ordered series of related dimension objects that are used for multidimensional analysis. For example, a geographical hierarchy could group together dimension objects such as Country, Region, and City. Multi-dimensional analysis is a technique for manipulating data so that it can be viewed from different perspectives and at different levels of detail. SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence 4.0 delivers new hierarchical capabilities for users. These new hierarchical capabilities include a hierarchical member selector, hierarchical prompting, hierarchical charting, and hierarchical navigation in the reports.

Figure 68: Integration of Hierarchical Concepts in Web Intelligence 4.0

You can select which members appear in the result set by using the Member Selector. In the Member Selector you can select hierarchy levels, and use OLAP-style selection on, for example, children, descendants, or parents.

172


2012

TBI30


Figure 69: Select Hierarchy Members

In hierarchical data sources, hierarchies are associated with a dimension and appear beneath the dimension with which they are associated in the list of available objects. With SAP BusinessObjects BI 4.0 using the Query Panel, you can navigate via hierarchies that are created in SAP NetWeaver BW query definition and display in report. You can access node, children, descendents, and so on, without having to create an universe. All hierarchies created on a characteristic in SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse are available as part of the available metadata and can be leveraged in Web Intelligence.

2012


173


TBI30

Figure 70: SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Hierarchies

Accessing SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Queries with Hierarchy Variables and Hierarchy Node Variables In case of a query with a hierarchy or a hierarchy node variable, Web Intelligence prompts for the hierarchy node variable when executing the query.

Figure 71: Hierarchy and Hierarchy Node Variable Prompt

Using SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Variables in Web Intelligence SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse variables can be interpreted as user prompts defined in the BEx Query. Variables can be mandatory or optional, and can have default values.

174


2012

TBI30


Variables for characteristics are used to filter values for a characteristic. Variables are populated with values when a query is executed. They can store characteristic values, hierarchies, hierarchy nodes, texts, and formula elements. The following table shows a detailed list of the Variable Type User Entry / Default Value only and how those are leveraged in Web Intelligence.

Variables Type Characteristic

Single value prompt

Supported

Multiple single value prompt

Supported

Interval prompt

Supported

Selection option prompt

Only as interval prompt

Precalculated value set

Supported

Text

Partially Supported

Formula

Supported

Hierarchy

Supported

Hierarchy node

Supported

Hierarchy Version

Not Supported

Key date

Supported

The following table shows Web Intelligence support for other processing types of BW variables: User Entry variables can be mandatory or optional, and can have default values. Optional Variables become optional prompts in Web Intelligence. Mandatory Variables become mandatory prompts in Web Intelligence. Note: Variables will only be prompted with an effect if they are added to the Filter tab in the Characteristic Restrictions area. Note: A mandatory filter is hidden and cannot be selected in the Query Panel in Web Intelligence.

2012


175


TBI30

Figure 72: Variable Prompts in Web Intelligence

Hint: To ensure the best possible performance, it is best to utilize SAP NetWeaver BW variables to filter data returned from SAP NetWeaver BW. The other option would be to just leverage filtering capability in the Web Intelligence Query Panel Filter area – this would then add the filter criteria in the MDX statement passed to BW.

176


2012

TBI30


Exercise 7: Create a Web Intelligence Document on SAP NetWeaver BW Data Sources Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a Web Intelligence report on SAP NetWeaver BW data using the BICS connectivity for direct access • Create a Web Intelligence report on SAP NetWeaver BW data using an existing multisource universe • Navigate in Web Intelligence using hierarchies and variables.

Business Example Your organization uses BEx Query Designer for defining queries on top of BW InfoProviders. You have created BW queries with hierarchies and variables which allow you to customize queries flexible. You want to use one BW query definition as a foundation that allows you to analyze the sales volume for different sales organizations in Web Intelligence. Then, your business requirements indicate that you need to use the multisource capabilities of the semantic layer to analyze the tables of an InfoProvider.

Task 1: Creating a Web Intelligence document on SAP NetWeaver BW data using the BICS connectivity for direct access Create a Web Intelligence document based on a BW query with hierarchies and an optional variable using Web Intelligence Desktop. Query information Field name

Value

SAP NetWeaver BW Query Sales by Material (Hierarchy) [P_SALES_MAT_HIER] InfoProvider

MultiProvider - Customer Sales [P_SALES01]

1.

Launch SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence.

2.

Create a Web Intelligence query against the SAP NetWeaver BW query with the description Sales by Material (Hierarchy). Continued on next page

2012


177


TBI30

Log on information

3.

Field name

Value

System

wdflbmt2268

User name


Password

Enter your password

Authentication

SAP

Drag the following objects into the Result Objects panel. Type

Value

Hierarchy

Product Hierarchy for material MARA

Measure

Sales Volume EUR

Select only the Product hierarchy node and all its descendents of the hierarchy and run the query. 4.

In the report, you only want to see data from Sales Organization Germany Frankfurt [1000]. Hint: To see the list of values, you have to Refresh Values

5.

Navigate through the report.

6.

Set Product Hierarchy as Section.

7.

Navigate through the report again to see the effect of sections.

8.

Remove the sections by undoing your changes.

9.

Duplicate the report table.

.

10. Turn the second table into a column chart. 11. Change the Report Title to Product Hierarchy - Sales Volume EUR. 12. Save your report in the BusinessObjects BI platform folder Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## with the name U## Product Hierarchy.


178


2012

TBI30


Task 2: Create a Web Intelligence report on SAP NetWeaver BW data using an existing multisource universe Create a new Web Intelligence document on the multisource universe U##_MSU_CallData.unx using BI Launch Pad. 1.

2.

Launch BI Launch Pad and log on with the following details: Field name

Value

System

wdflbmt2268

SAP System

RWB

SAP Client

800

User Name


Password

Enter your password

Authentication

SAP

Create a Web Intelligence query against a SAP NetWeaver BW InfoProvider. Log on information

3.

Field name

Value

SystemAssigned system

Assigned system

User name


Password

Enter your password

Authentication

SAP

Create a query with the dimensions Material Name, and the measure Number of Calls. Set a query filter to see results that have more than 1 call. Make sure that the descriptions of the values for Material are displayed in the result.

4.

2012

Save your report in the SAP BusinessObjects BI platform folder All Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## with the name U## WebI Multisource Universe.


179


TBI30

Solution 7: Create a Web Intelligence Document on SAP NetWeaver BW Data Sources Task 1: Creating a Web Intelligence document on SAP NetWeaver BW data using the BICS connectivity for direct access Create a Web Intelligence document based on a BW query with hierarchies and an optional variable using Web Intelligence Desktop. Query information Field name

Value

SAP NetWeaver BW Query Sales by Material (Hierarchy) [P_SALES_MAT_HIER] InfoProvider

1.

Launch SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence. a)

2.

MultiProvider - Customer Sales [P_SALES01]

Select Start → Programs → SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise BI platform 4.0 → SAP BusinessObjects BI platform Client Tools → Interactive Analysis Desktop.

Create a Web Intelligence query against the SAP NetWeaver BW query with the description Sales by Material (Hierarchy). Log on information Field name

Value

System

wdflbmt2268

User name


Password

Enter your password

Authentication

SAP

a)

Choose Bex as data source for your new document.

b)

Enter your logon information provided the instructor.

c)

Select Customer Sales Multiprovider. Continued on next page

180


2012

TBI30


3.

d)

Enter the description of the query Sales by Material (Hierarchy) in the search field and click Enter.

e)

Choose the query and click OK.

Drag the following objects into the Result Objects panel. Type

Value

Hierarchy

Product Hierarchy for material MARA

Measure

Sales Volume EUR

Select only the Product hierarchy node and all its descendents of the hierarchy and run the query. a)

In the Query Panel, expand the node Material and drag Product Hierarchy for material MARA into the Result Objects pane.

b)

Drag Sales Volume EUR into the Result Objects pane.

c)

Click the arrow on the hierarchy element in Result Objects pane. The Member Selector window opens.

4.

d)

In the Member Selector window, select the checkbox left to Product hierarchy.

e)

Right-click Product hierarchy and choose Descendents.

f)

Click OK.

g)

Click Run query.

In the report, you only want to see data from Sales Organization Germany Frankfurt [1000]. Hint: To see the list of values, you have to Refresh Values a)

.

In the Prompts window, select Sales Org (Multi/Optional) and choose Germany, Frankfurt. Hint: Display the keys for the available values using the Hide/Show keys values button

.

b)

Select Hierarchy Node (Material) in the left pane. Do not make any selection here.

c)

Click OK. Continued on next page

2012


181


5.

Navigate through the report. a)

6.

Expand the hierarchy nodes by clicking the Plus signs.

Remove the sections by undoing your changes. a)

9.

Right-click Product Hierarchy and choose Set as Section.

Navigate through the report again to see the effect of sections. a)

8.

Expand the hierarchy nodes by clicking the Plus signs.

Set Product Hierarchy as Section. a)

7.

TBI30

Click Undo

until the initial report is displayed.

Duplicate the report table. a)

Right-click on the border of the table and choose Copy.

b)

Right-click under the table and choose Paste.

10. Turn the second table into a column chart. a)

Right-click on the duplicated table and choose Turn Into → Column.

11. Change the Report Title to Product Hierarchy - Sales Volume EUR. a)

Double-click Report 1 and enter Product Hierarchy - Sales Volume EUR.

12. Save your report in the BusinessObjects BI platform folder Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## with the name U## Product Hierarchy. a)


b)

Navigate to the folder Public Folders→ BI Training → User Area → User ## and enter the name U## Product Hierarchy.

c)

Click Save.

Task 2: Create a Web Intelligence report on SAP NetWeaver BW data using an existing multisource universe Create a new Web Intelligence document on the multisource universe U##_MSU_CallData.unx using BI Launch Pad. 1.

Launch BI Launch Pad and log on with the following details:


182


2012

TBI30


2.

Field name

Value

System

wdflbmt2268

SAP System

RWB

SAP Client

800

User Name


Password

Enter your password

Authentication

SAP

a)

Select Start → Programs → SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise BI platform 4..0 → Custom Link to BI Launchpad.

b)

In the home page of BI Launch Pad, click Applications → Web Intelligence Application to start Web Intelligence.

Create a Web Intelligence query against a SAP NetWeaver BW InfoProvider. Log on information

3.

Field name

Value

SystemAssigned system

Assigned system

User name


Password

Enter your password

Authentication

SAP

a)

Click New.

b)

Choose Universe as data source for your new document.

c)

If requested, enter your logon information.

d)

Select the multisource universe U##_MSU_CallData.unx.

Create a query with the dimensions Material Name, and the measure Number of Calls. Set a query filter to see results that have more than 1 call.


2012


183


TBI30

Make sure that the descriptions of the values for Material are displayed in the result.

4.

184

a)

Drag Material Name into the Result Objects pane

b)

Drag Number of Calls in the Result Objects pane.

c)

Drag Number of Calls in the Query Filters pane and set it Greater than 1.

d)

Click Run query.

Save your report in the SAP BusinessObjects BI platform folder All Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## with the name U## WebI Multisource Universe. a)

Click the arrow next to Save on the toolbar in the File tab and select Publish As... to display the Publish a document to the server dialog box.

b)

Navigate to the folder All Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## and enter the name U## WebI Multisource Universe.

c)

Click Save.


2012

TBI30


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse connectivity options • Explain how to use BEx queries in Web Intelligence using BICS connection • Describe the elements of SAP NetWeaver BW OLAP universes • Describe how SAP NetWeaver BW objects are mapped and used in an universe

2012


185

Unit Summary

TBI30

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Classify the main target groups as well as the main business scenarios where users can benefit from using SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence • Discuss the positioning of SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence within the SAP Business Intelligence portfolio • Explain basic Web Intelligence functions • Explain how to use advanced Web Intelligence functions • Create a Web Intelligence document with advanced functions on an universe • Explain the SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse connectivity options • Explain how to use BEx queries in Web Intelligence using BICS connection • Describe the elements of SAP NetWeaver BW OLAP universes • Describe how SAP NetWeaver BW objects are mapped and used in an universe

186


2012

Unit 5 SAP Crystal Reports Unit Overview Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • • •

Identify the two different versions of SAP Crystal Reports Choose the right version for your reporting needs Create a new report in SAP Crystal Reports 2011 on a relational database Work with basic formatting options in SAP Crystal Reports 2011 Use the SAP Toolbar to create a Crystal Report on with a SAP NetWeaver BW query Understand how SAP NetWeaver BW metadata can be used in Crystal Reports Work with hierarchies and variables in Crystal Reports Create a Crystal report with database tables in a SAP system Create a new report in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise on an universe Work with basic formatting options in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Create a report in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise with a SAP BEx query as a data source Work with BEx query elements

Unit Contents Lesson: Introduction to SAP Crystal Reports ...............................189 Lesson: SAP Crystal Reports 2011...........................................195 Exercise 8: Create a Report with Crystal Reports 2011 on a Relational Data Source .................................................................207 Lesson: SAP Crystal Reports 2011 and SAP Data Sources ..............217 Exercise 9: Creating a New Crystal Report Against SAP Tables ....227 Lesson: SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise ................................238 Procedure: To define a new report you need to follow these steps: .239 Exercise 10: Create a Basic Report in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise....................................................................251

2012


187

Unit 5: SAP Crystal Reports

TBI30

Lesson: SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise and SAP BW as Data Source ............................................................................259 Exercise 11: Create a Report Against SAP NetWeaver BW Using a Hierarchy Variable and Hierarchy Node Variable in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise......................................................269

188


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Introduction to SAP Crystal Reports

Lesson: Introduction to SAP Crystal Reports Lesson Overview This lesson introduces the two versions of SAP Crystal Reports.


Identify the two different versions of SAP Crystal Reports Choose the right version for your reporting needs

Business Example You want to access your organization’s data and transform it into actionable information to improve performance. By delivering the most-requested pieces of information reliably and securely – via the Web or embedded in enterprise applications – reports can serve as the foundation of a successful business intelligence (BI) strategy. SAP Crystal Reports software enables you to easily design interactive reports and connect them to virtually any data source. Your users can benefit from on-report sorting and filtering – giving them the power to execute decisions instantly.

SAP Crystal Reports SAP Crystal Reports is the industry leader for enterprise reporting, allowing you to create highly formatted reports and interactive reports to your users.

Target Groups for SAP Crystal Reports Report designers and business users.

2012


189


TBI30

Figure 73: SAP Crystal Reports

Use Cases SAP Crystal Reports is a tool that allows you to create a broad range of reports. You can create legal or form-based reports such as an actual tax report or a customer invoice. SAP Crystal Reports also provides you the flexibility to create very complex report, for example financial reports involving hierarchies. SAP Crystal Reports also provides the functionality to create reports with charts and other visualization elements and includes user interactivity such as drill-down and interactive filtering.

Advantages of SAP Crystal Reports SAP Crystal Reports provides comprehensive functionality to design, explore, visualize, and deliver compelling reports. With SAP Crystal Reports, you can: • • • • • • •

190

Leverage professional reporting Empower users to explore reports with on-report sorting and parameters Minimize IT and developer effort with interactive reports Develop powerful data mash-ups Save valuable report design time Embed professional-looking reports in Java and .NET applications Tailor your solution by adding report management and viewing tools


2012

TBI30


Figure 74: SAP Crystal Reports Business Value

Crystal Reports 2011 versus SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise 4.0 In SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence 4.0 SAP offers Crystal Reports in these 2 versions: • •

SAP Crystal Reports 2011 SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise 4.0

Figure 75: SAP Crystal Reports 2011


2012


191


TBI30

In SAP Crystal Reports 2011 the UI and the associated processing servers remain the same as in Crystal Reports 2008. It is more an incremental update with a few new features. With Crystal Reports 2011 SAP continues to provide the current functionality as-is for existing customers. The new features compared to Crystal Reports 2008 are: • •

Export functionality to XSLX from the designer New read-only report format as .rptr file

Figure 76: SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise In SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise SAP provides a major update & re-design of the Crystal Reports Designer and the associated processing servers. The development focus was defined on a streamlined report design, reporting against the new BI 4.0 Universes & against SAP BW data. SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise provides the foundation for all future releases of Crystal Reports.

When to use SAP Crystal Reports 2011 & SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Depending on the Data Source & Usage Type there is a recommendation which version of SAP Crystal Reports should be used. See the table below for more details. Data Source & Usage Type

General Recommendation

SAP BusinessObjects BI 4.0 Relational SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Universe (UNX)

192

BEx Query in a SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse 7.x


BEx Query in a SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse 3.5 or below



2012

TBI30


SAP Profitability Cost Management / SAP Strategy Management / SAP Budget, Planning and Consolidation / SAP Extended Analytics

SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise through Analysis View

SAP ERP


BI Platform Driven Alerting


Can SAP Crystal Reports 2011 and SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise 4.0 co-exist? SAP Crystal Reports 2011 and SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise 4.0 can run side-by-side on the same desktop client. Also their processing servers and job servers can run side-by-side on the same BI Platform server. • • •

All servers are installed by default Managed reports will run on their respective servers Move managed reports to the Crystal Reports for Enterprise servers by using the Crystal Reports for Enterprise Designer

What are the Benefits of this side-by-side approach? • • •

You can choose to use Crystal Reports 2011 or Crystal Reports for Enterprise based on the features they need You can move to Crystal Reports for Enterprise at your own pace Your investments in reports is preserved –

–

2012

Reports created in the Crystal Reports 2011 Designer will open in the Crystal Reports Enterprise Designer (required so that the data connection can be migrated for the Enterprise stack) Problem View informs users where feature differences may exist


193


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Identify the two different versions of SAP Crystal Reports • Choose the right version for your reporting needs

194


2012

TBI30

Lesson: SAP Crystal Reports 2011

Lesson: SAP Crystal Reports 2011 Lesson Overview This lesson introduces basic functions of SAP Crystal Reports 2011 and how to create a Crystal Reports document on a relational data source.


Create a new report in SAP Crystal Reports 2011 on a relational database Work with basic formatting options in SAP Crystal Reports 2011

Business Example You want to visualize Customer Sales for employees of the sales department. The data is stored in a relational database and you need to create a report document in which you can insert and format the contents of the database fields..

Create a New SAP Crystal Reports 2011 Document When you launch SAP Crystal Reports 2011 the start page appears first:, it includes links to recent reports you’ve opened, report creation methods, the help system, and other useful resources. Here you can choose to create a new blank report.

Figure 77: Start Page in Crystal Reports 2011

2012


195


TBI30

You can create a new report with Crystal Reports using these methods: •

•

•

Use one of the Report Wizards provided. Many users will find it easier to design a report using one of the Wizards, sometimes referred to as Experts. You step through the report-building process of a specific type of report when using an Expert. Construct the report manually, piece by piece. You can custom design a report using this method by starting with a blank report and building the elements of the report from scratch. Create a report from another report. Another quick method to build a report is to create it from an existing report. This existing report can be used as a template since it may already contain much of the information and formatting you need.

Specify the Datasource For any new report you want to create, the first step is to specify the data source. Regardless of which option you select from the “Start a new Report” the next step is to specify the data source from either an existing connection or by creating a new connection. If you choose to use a blank report as the basis of your new report, the Database Expert opens automatically. The options in the Database Expert are: • •

My Connections This option shows all data sources that you are currently connected to. Create New Connection This folder contains a number of subfolders of data source options. The data you use to create reports in your organization is stored in either a data source on a server such as Microsoft SQL Server or an SAP system, or a local database such as Microsoft Access. Note: SAP Crystal Reports 2011 enables you to connect to many different relational or OLAP data sources - see the SAP Crystal reports 2011 user guide for detail information.

196


2012

TBI30


Figure 78: Crystal Reports 2011 Database Expert

Choose create new connection in the database expert and enter the corresponding connection options for the data source type. After selecting the data source, you can add one or more tables in the database expert for your report. If your report contains data from two or more database tables, you will need to link the tables when creating your reports. Linking requires that you use a field that is common to both tables. You link database tables so records from one table match related records from another. You define the linking setup in the Links tab of the Database Expert. Auto Link in the Database Expert Links tab automatically chooses links for your tables based on common fields in tables

SAP Crystal Reports 2011 Basic Functions In order to create a report you have to select fields from the data source first and decide how to position and size them. Once you have placed fields or objects on your report, you may want to change their appearance. Crystal Reports enables you to change many of the format attributes.

2012


197


TBI30

Figure 79: Crystal Reports 2011 Overview

The table fields of the selected data source appear in the Field Explorer Window in Crystal Reports (dimension and measure objects from OLAP sources will also be displayed as “fields”). You can drag and drop the respective objects from there to the sections (e.g. Header or Detail) in the Design Window. Follow these steps. 1.

2. 3.

After selecting a data source choose View → Field Explorer to show the Field Explorer Window. To speed the report building process, this window remains on screen until you close it. You can move it wherever you want. Expand the Database Fields folder to see all the tables that have been chosen from the database. Expand the respective nodes in the Field Explorer and select the field you want to appear in the report. Drag it into the report or choose Insert to Report in the context menu. A checkmark appears next to an object that is used in the report.

Insert Special Fields Special fields contain information that is not included in the database, but is useful to the overall presentation quality of the report, making your report more readable. They can be found in the Field Explorer beneath the node Special Fields. Some of the more commonly used special fields such as: • • • •

198

Page N of M: prints the current page number of the total number of pages. Page Number: prints the current page number Print Date: prints the current date. Report Title


2012

TBI30


Preview Reports Once you have placed data fields on your report, you are ready to preview your design. Choose View → Preview in the menu. Crystal Reports gathers the data, makes the necessary calculations, and displays the report in the Preview tab. With the data in place, you can review the spacing and formatting of your report and see the actual results of all your summaries, formula calculations, and record and group selections. The first time the Preview tab is used, it retrieves data from your underlying data source(s) and saves it with the report (unless you have set up Crystal Reports not to save data). From that point on, saved data is used whenever you preview the report unless you specifically refresh it or add a field that requires the program to retrieve new data. Note: You retain full design capabilities in the Preview tab.

Position and Resize Objects in the Design Window In Crystal Reports you can position the different objects at pixel level to create the desired report layout. To move an object click the object to select it and drag it to the desired position. To resize the object drag one of the handles on the broken line frame that appears. Another possible way to resize an object is to right-click and open the context menu. Choose Size and Position. In the Size and Position dialog box you can define the position on the X and Y axis as well as the Width and Height very precisely. Hint: To resize objects based on a main object, press CTRL and click the objects once to select them. The last object you have selected is the main object. The size of the main object is used to resize the other selected objects. Choose Size from the context menu of the main object and select Same Width, Same Height, or Same Size

Select (Filter) Records In most reports you need to select or filter the records that are displayed dimension or measure values. For example if you only want to see values for a particular division or only the order volumes that are greater than a million euros. To do this, you set the record selection of your report to include only the data you want as result. To activate the Select Expert, you can: 1. 2. 3.

2012

Click Select Expert on the Expert Tools toolbar Choose Report → Select Expert from the menu Right-click a field in the report and choose Select Expert from the context menu


199


TBI30

Figure 80: Crystal Reports 2011 Select Expert

The first step in record selection is to define your criteria for selection. For example, do you want to focus on one city or state, or are you interested in specific regions. Maybe a date range or all records below a particular value will work best. Using the drop-down list, you can build selection criteria that meet your needs. Depending on the field you select the drop-down list offers options such as: • • • • • • •

is equal to is one of / is not one of is greater than / is less than is greater than or equal to / is less than or equal to is between / is not between is like / is not like (allows use of wildcard characters ? and *) is in the period / is not in the period

Sort Records If you do not specify a sort order, Crystal Reports sorts the records in the default order, that is the order in which they appear in the Field Explorer, the default sort direction is ascending. Open the Record Sort Expert under the menu path Report → Record Sort Expert.... In the Record Sort Expert fields can be used in the Sort Fields list where a sort direction and a sort order can be assigned.

Group Records You may want to break data into meaningful groups. For example, you may want all the customers from one country together in one group. You are not limited to one level of grouping within Crystal Reports. You can have groups within groups. For example, you can create a report of all customers, broken down by country, and each country broken down by region. Crystal Reports can then summarize the information in each group. You can group information based on report fields, on fields that are not in the report, and on formula fields. When you group records, you add new areas to your report. These new areas are visible in the left margin of the Design window. Once you

200


2012

TBI30


have created a group, a Group Header and Group Footer surround the Details area. Each group you create has its own header and footer. Also, when you insert a group, the Group Name field is automatically created in the Group Header. Report without Group Country

Customer

Sales Volume

Germany

Schmidt

2000

Germany

Maier

1000

Germany

Schulz

800

USA

Smith

2000

USA

Jones

500

USA

Taylor

1000

Total

7300

Report with Group on field Country Country

Customer

Sales Volume

Germany

Schmidt

2000

Maier

1000

Schulz

800

Germany Total USA

3800 Smith

2000

Jones

500

Taylor

1000

USA Total

3500

Report Total

7800

To insert a Group follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

2012

Choose Insert → Group in the menu to open the Group Expert. In the first drop-down list, select the field you want to group on. You get a new group for every change in this value. Select a sorting option from the second drop-down list. When you have finished defining your group(s), click OK. The dialog box closes and returns to the report. Preview your report


201


TBI30

Figure 81: Groups in Crystal Reports 2011

Summarize Data One of the primary purposes for breaking data into groups is to run calculations on each group of records instead of all records in the report. When Crystal Reports summarizes data, it sorts the data, breaks it into groups, and then summarizes the values in each group automatically. Depending on the data type of the field you plan to summarize, you can: • • • •

Sum the values in each group Count all the values or only those values that are distinct from one another. Determine the maximum, minimum, average, or Nth largest value. Perform various calculations

To insert a summary follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Choose Insert → Summary in the menu. Select the desired field to summarize. Select a summary operation. Select a location (i.e. a section of the Report) in which to place the summary.

Format Fields Using the Formatting Toolbar The Formatting toolbar includes such options as font formatting, text formatting and alignment, and highlighting. Database fields can be formatted to print with the colors, fonts, and attributes that you prefer. These fields can also be formatted to change the way the data displays on your report. For example, you might prefer your numbers to be printed with two decimal places and your dates to be in the North American format. These attributes can be combined.

202


2012

TBI30


Figure 82: The Formatting Toolbar in Crystal reports 2011

Format Fields Using the Format Editor

Figure 83: The Format Editor in Crystal Reports 2011

Using the Format Editor is another, more complex method of formatting.

2012


203


TBI30

Some of the frequently used features of the Format Editor are the options listed on these tabs are: •

•

•

•

Common tab: On the Common tab, you can suppress the field, keep the field together if a record spans more than one page, control borders of the field, limit the number of lines the field can print, rotate and align text, add tooltip text, and lock the size and position of the selected object. Border Tab: On the Border tab, you can select line styles, drop shadows, and the color for the border and the background. Clicking Background opens a second color selection list for you to choose a fill color for the text object. Font tab: On the Font tab, your options include the changing the font, style, size, and color. You can also add a strikeout (a line through text) and underline effects. The sample box shows you the results of your choices. Number Tab: If you select a numeric field to format, the Format Editor offers options to change for example Number Format, Currency Symbol or Decimals.

Insert Charts Crystal Reports enables you to include sophisticated, colorful charts in your reports. You will typically chart on summary and subtotal information at the group level. Each chart becomes an object on your report, and therefore can be moved, resized, and so on. Not all chart styles work with all data. For example, a report that shows the total sales for each state would make a good pie chart but a meaningless stacked bar chart, since only one series of data exists. On the other hand, if you had a report that showed inventory levels of certain items for each quarter of the year, that information would make an excellent stacked bar chart, but not work in a single pie chart. Where you place your chart determines what data is displayed and where it is printed. For example, if you place a chart in the Report Header section, the chart includes data for the entire report. If you place it in a Group Header or Group Footer section, the chart displays group-specific data. Follow these steps to insert a chart into a Report: 1. 2. 3.

4.

204

Choose Insert → Chart in the menu. Position the top-left corner of the frame in the target location for the new chart. Depending on where you place the chart, the Chart Expert opens automatically or you may need to right-click the chart once it is placed and select the Chart Expert from the context menu. The Chart Expert allows you to select the chart type, the data that is visualized and to change the formats of the chart elements. Click OK after you have finished customizing the chart.


2012

TBI30


Figure 84: Crystal Report

Add Graphical Elements If you want to make specific data or summaries stand out from the rest of the report or just want to improve the overall appearance, you can use graphic elements to enhance your report. When working with graphic elements, you may prefer to work in the Design window; it is easier to see in which area you are working, and easier to ensure that graphic elements such as lines, boxes, and pictures are positioned correctly. You can insert the following graphical elements: • • • •

Text Objects Lines Boxes Pictures

To format graphical elements open the Format Editor in the context menu of the element.

Save and Export a Report Save a Report Choose Save As… in the file menu to save a Crystal Report to your local disk or to SAP Business Objects BI Platform server (if available). Use the save Icon in the SAP Toolbar to save a Crystal Report to a BW system. If the checkmark Save Data with Report is set the data that you can see in the Preview tab is saved with the report. Export a Report Finished reports can be exported to various formats under File → Export → Export Report. For example, you may want to use the report data to project trends in an Excel spreadsheet. Other formats are for instance HTML, MS Word, ODBC, PDF, RTF, CSV, Text, XML.

2012


205


206

TBI30


2012

TBI30


Exercise 8: Create a Report with Crystal Reports 2011 on a Relational Data Source Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a simple report with SAP Crystal Reports 2011 on a relational data source.

Business Example The Sales Director needs an overview over all orders world wide for which the order amount is over 10000 US Dollars.

Task 1: Create a Crystal Reports 2011 document with Sales Data from a relational database

Figure 85: Sample Solution (Partial)

1.

Launch Crystal Reports 2011and create a new report. Create a new Connection via ODBC to the database XtremeSQL2005. Use the following ODBC connection information:


2012


207


TBI30

Data Source Name

XtremeSQL2005

User ID

boadmin

Password

BOTraining

Database

xtreme

2.

Still in Database Expert navigate to the xtreme ODBO connection that you have just created and select the tables Customer and Orders.

3.

Enable visibility for the Field Explorer and place the fields Customer Name from the Customer table and Order ID and Order Amount from the Orders table in the Details section of the design area with a small space between the fields.

4.

Insert a Group on the Country field of the Customer table.

5.

Use the Select Expert on record level and filter the records displayed in the report so that only records with an Order Amount value greater than 10000 are displayed.

Task 2: Task 2: Format the Crystal Report. 1.

Insert a Group Summary for all levels for the field Order Amount

2.

Remove decimal places from the Group Summary of Order Amount.

3.

Insert a single border above and double border line below the grand total summary figure.

4.

Move the Group Summary results from the Group Footer to the Group Header.

5.

Insert a title for the report: Order Amount over $ 10000 per country. Make the font color Navy and font size 16.

6.

Change the font style for the column headings to bold and underlined and change the font size to 12.

7.

Insert a page number in the center of the Page Footer.

8.

Insert a pie chart in the Report Header visualizing the sums of the order amounts per country. Change the Chart Title to Sum of Order Amounts per country

9.

Preview your report and check the results. Afterwards save the report to the My Documents folder of your local drive with the file name U## Order Amount per Country.


208


2012

TBI30


10. Make your report available to other users by Saving it under the same name U## Order Amount per Country in the BI Platform repository and by exporting it as PDF to your local My Documents folder. Use the following credentials to log on to BI Platform:

2012

Server

wdflbmt2268

User

user##

Password

Your password

Authentication

SAP


209


TBI30

Solution 8: Create a Report with Crystal Reports 2011 on a Relational Data Source Task 1: Create a Crystal Reports 2011 document with Sales Data from a relational database

Figure 86: Sample Solution (Partial)

1.

Launch Crystal Reports 2011and create a new report. Create a new Connection via ODBC to the database XtremeSQL2005. Use the following ODBC connection information:


210


2012

TBI30


2.

3.

4.

Data Source Name

XtremeSQL2005

User ID

boadmin

Password

BOTraining

Database

xtreme

a)

Click Start → Programs → Crystal Reports 2011 → Crystal Reports 2011.

b)

On the Crystal Reports start page, choose Blank report.

c)

In the Database Expert expand Create New Connection and click the [+] icon next to ODBC (RDO)

d)

Enter the remaining details and then click Finish.

Still in Database Expert navigate to the xtreme ODBO connection that you have just created and select the tables Customer and Orders. a)

In the Database Expert navigate to ODBC (RDO) → XtremeSQL2005 → xtreme → dbo.

b)

Select Customer and Orders. Transfer to the selected tables section by clicking the [>] button and choose OK.

c)

Do not change the tabe links that have been created automatically and choose OK.

Enable visibility for the Field Explorer and place the fields Customer Name from the Customer table and Order ID and Order Amount from the Orders table in the Details section of the design area with a small space between the fields. a)

Select the menu path View → Field Explorer.

b)

In the Field Explorer, expand Database fields → Customer and drag Customer Name into the Details section.

c)

Expand Database Fields → Orders and drag Order ID and Order Amount to the Details section of the report. Keep a slight distance between the fields.

Insert a Group on the Country field of the Customer table. a)

Open the Group Expert by selecting Report → Group Expert.

b)

Drag the field Country underneath the Customer table to the Group By: section and choose OK.


2012


211


5.

TBI30

Use the Select Expert on record level and filter the records displayed in the report so that only records with an Order Amount value greater than 10000 are displayed. a)

Select the menu path Report → Select Expert → Record.

b)

Within the Choose Field dialog select the Orders.Order Amount field and click OK.

c)

Choose is greater than as operator and enter 10000 as the value. Click OK.

d)

Choose Refresh Data.

Task 2: Task 2: Format the Crystal Report. 1.

2.

3.

4.

Insert a Group Summary for all levels for the field Order Amount a)

Right-click the field Order Amount in the detail section and then choose Insert → Summary from the context menu.

b)

Choose Order Amount as the field, Sum as the summary function, and Grand Total in the summary location.

c)

Select the checkbox Add to all group levels and click OK.

Remove decimal places from the Group Summary of Order Amount. a)

Switch to Design View by choosing View → Design.

b)

Right-click Order Amount summary field in the Group Footer #1 and Report Footer. Use the Ctrl key to select both fields.

c)

Within the formatting tool bar press the icon Decrease Decimals twice. (This is the last icon on the formatting tool bar.)

Insert a single border above and double border line below the grand total summary figure. a)

Right click the grand total of the field Order Amount in the Report Footer section and select the Format Field option. Click on the Border tab.

b)

Choose Top: Single, Bottom: Double.

c)

Click OK.

Move the Group Summary results from the Group Footer to the Group Header. a)

Click the Order Amount summary in the Group Footer and drag it to the Group Header. Continued on next page

212


2012

TBI30


5.

6.

7.

Insert a title for the report: Order Amount over $ 10000 per country. Make the font color Navy and font size 16. a)

Right click in the Report Header section and select Insert Text Object from the context menu.

b)

Expand the text object to the size that is needed in the Report Header section.

c)

Double-click the text object and enter Order Amount over $ 10000 per country.

d)

Select the text, then right-click and select Format Text from the context menu.

e)

Select the Font tab and change the Style to Bold, the Size to 16, and the Color to Navy.

f)

Click OK.

Change the font style for the column headings to bold and underlined and change the font size to 12. a)

Select all headings in the Page Header section. Use the Ctrl key to select and highlight both fields.

b)

Right click on top of one of the headings and select Format Objects from the context menu.

c)

Click the Font tab and select bold from the Style drop down box and select 12 in the Size drop down box. Mark the check box underline.

d)

Click OK.

Insert a page number in the center of the Page Footer. a)

Within the Field Explorer expand Special Fields.

b)

Drag the special field Page Number into the center of the Report Footer.


2012


213


8.

9.

TBI30

Insert a pie chart in the Report Header visualizing the sums of the order amounts per country. Change the Chart Title to Sum of Order Amounts per country a)

Select the Insert option in the menu bar and choose Chart.

b)

Drag the chart into the Report Header section.

c)

Right-click on the chart and select the Chart Expert from the context menu.

d)

Click the Type tab and then select Pie from the Choose your chart type list.

e)

Click the Text tab and uncheck Auto-Text for the Title field. Enter Sum of Order Amounts per country and click OK.

Preview your report and check the results. Afterwards save the report to the My Documents folder of your local drive with the file name U## Order Amount per Country. a)

View the report by choosing View → Preview.

b)

Align the field size if required.

c)

Save your report. Choose File → Save As ... in the menu. Choose the folder My Documents and enter the description U## Order Amount per Country. Press Save.

10. Make your report available to other users by Saving it under the same name U## Order Amount per Country in the BI Platform repository and by exporting it as PDF to your local My Documents folder. Use the following credentials to log on to BI Platform:


214


2012

TBI30

2012


Server

wdflbmt2268

User

user##

Password

Your password

Authentication

SAP

a)

Choose File → Save As ... in the menu. Choose Enterprise and log on with the credentials stated above.

b)

Navigate to the folder BI Training → UserArea → User## and enter the file name U## Order Amount per Country. Press Save

c)

Choose File → Export → Export Report nad select Format: PDF and Destination: Disk File. Choose OK and select All as page range. Enter U## Order Amount per Country as file name and save to the My Documents folder.

d)

Click Save.

e)

Open the PDF file using Windows Explorer.


215


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create a new report in SAP Crystal Reports 2011 on a relational database • Work with basic formatting options in SAP Crystal Reports 2011

216


2012

TBI30

Lesson: SAP Crystal Reports 2011 and SAP Data Sources

Lesson: SAP Crystal Reports 2011 and SAP Data Sources Lesson Overview This lesson provides you with an overview of SAP Crystal Reports 2011 in combination with SAP data sources.


Use the SAP Toolbar to create a Crystal Report on with a SAP NetWeaver BW query Understand how SAP NetWeaver BW metadata can be used in Crystal Reports Work with hierarchies and variables in Crystal Reports Create a Crystal report with database tables in a SAP system

Business Example You are a report designer and need to create a Crystal Report object on top of an SAP NetWeaver BW query or on a SAP table in an ECC system to report directly on operational data.

SAP Crystal Reports 2011 Connectivity to SAP NetWeaver BW Systems For SAP NetWeaver BW, SAP Crystal Reports 2011 can directly access BEx Queries and as well access Data Store Objects or InfoCubes directly without a BEx query objects. In other words, SAP Crystal Reports provides flexibility for delivery information and data at multiple levels.

2012


217


TBI30

Figure 87: Connectivity Overview to SAP NetWeaver BW

When creating new reports against SAP NetWeaver BW there are two options: • •

Using the SAP toolbar. Using the Database Expert.

Integrated within SAP Crystal Reports, the SAP Tools toolbar facilitates tasks associated with reporting off BW queries. It allows you to logon to SAP NetWeaver BW, work with its data sources, save reports to SAP NetWeaver BW, and publish reports immediately to BusinessObjects Enterprise via SAP NetWeaver BW. The SAP specific toolbar and the SAP specific menu items offer you the typical SAP open and save dialogs that are also used in the Business Explorer. They also allow you to store the Crystal Report object directly into SAP NetWeaver BW roles. The following table shows all available menu options of the SAP toolbar:

218


2012

TBI30


Figure 88: SAP Toolbar

SAP Netweaver BW metadata in Crystal Reports 2011 When you connect to an SAP NetWeaver BW query in SAP Crystal Reports, the underlying metadata from the SAP NetWeaver BW query is leveraged, and matched to SAP Crystal Reports elements The table below shows how SAP NetWeaver BW metadata is used in SAP Crystal Reports

2012

BW Query element

SAP Crystal Reports element

Characteristic

Separate fields for key and description per characteristic.

Hierarchy

Fields representing a parent-child relationship.

Key Figures

Measure element in a grouping called Key figure. Each Key figure can have up to three elements: numeric value, unit, and formatted value.

Calculated Key Figure

Measure element in the folder Key figure. (Information about the details of the calculated key figure is not available in SAP Crystal Reports.)

Restricted Key Figure

Measure element in the folder Key figure (Information about the details of the restricted key figure is not available in SAP Crystal Reports.)

Filter

Filters will be applied to the underlying query but are not visible in the SAP Crystal Reports.


219


TBI30

BW Query element

SAP Crystal Reports element


Separate fields for key and description per navigational attribute.

Display attribute Each display attribute becomes one field in the field explorer. The display attributes are grouped together with the actual characteristic. SAP variables

Parameters.

Building a Crystal Report on top of such an SAP NetWeaver BW query will result in the following elements representing SAP NetWeaver BW master data: •

• •

Each characteristic in the query will result in an element in the field explorer with a key and a description item (For example: Region Key and Region Name). Each characteristic will also generate a Node ID and a Parent Node ID, which can be used for hierarchical reporting. Each characteristic will also generate a Member Unique Name field, which represents the technical key value.

Each key figure used in an SAP NetWeaver BW query can have up to three elements: • • •

Numeric value of the key figure Unit or currency information Formatted value, representing the user-specific formatting

Working with Variables Variables in SAP Business Explorer queries allow the user to enter a variable before the query is run. This is useful if for instance a filter value has to be chosen so that not all available values are loaded. Variables in SAP Business Explorer are represented by Parameters in Crystal Reports 2011. Parameters have a very similar function. They also allow to select different kinds of values whenever a report is refreshed. There are different kinds of variables in SAP Business Explorer: • • • •

220

Characteristic Variables – choose one or more characteristic values for a filter or a selection in the query Hierarchy Variables – choose one of different hierarchies that are available to be applied to a characteristic Hierarchy Node Variables – choose a Hierarchy Node of a given hierarchy for a filter or a selection in the query Formula Variable – enter a number that can for instance be used for calculations in a formula


2012

TBI30


•

Text Variable – enter a text that is displayed in the header of a selection in the query or as query title.

Variables can be defined as optional or mandatory – mandatory means the user has to enter a value for the variable. When the SAP variable is optional SAP Crystal Reports creates a prompt, which is optional and the user can set the value to Null. When setting the value to Null, SAP Crystal Reports removes the SAP variable from the underlying MDX statement that is sent to SAP NetWeaver BW. As a result SAP NetWeaver BW checks first for a personalized value for the particular user, second for an existing default value and third for any value that was entered. The order of priority for the SAP Variable is: 1. 2. 3.

Personalized Variable value (defined for a specific SAP NetWeaver BW user) Default Variable value (can be defined when creating the variable in SAP BEx Query Designer) Manually entered value.

For example: SAP Crystal Reports created a report with an optional prompt based on an SAP NetWeaver BW query with an optional variable and the user is setting the value to Null. In the case the SAP variable has a default value defined, the result set will be based on the default value even though the user set the prompt to Null.

2012


221


TBI30

Figure 89: Crystal Report Based on BW Query with Variable

Note: It is generally recommendable to use variables in SAP BEx queries when accessing SAP NetWeaver BW data. The advantage of variables is that before the query is run the user can filter the results to the values that are actually needed. This can improve performance in a significant way.

Working with Hierarchies The activated hierarchy from the underlying SAP NetWeaver BW query will result in a parent-child relationship being represented in SAP Crystal Reports 2011 by the fields “Node ID” and “Parent Node ID”. These fields are created as a subordinate field under the field for each characteristic object.

222


2012

TBI30


Figure 90: Crystal Report Based on BW Query with Hierarchy

SAP Crystal Reports 2011 supports hierarchical display of the characteristics and key figures in the report. To display data hierarchically you have to follow these steps: 1. 2. 3.

Create a group on the Node ID of the characteristic and define the characteristics name as group name field Open Report → Hierarchical Grouping Options Check Sort Data Hierarchically, select the Parent Node ID of the characteristic field as Parent Field and enter aGroup Indent.

The disadvantage of this approach is that all the fields in the report will get the same indentation. Some times it is necessary only to indent the characteristic objects but not the corresponding key figure values in the report. For this scenario SAP Crystal Reports 2011 offers some additional formulas and functions that allow the user to create a better report design and provide conditional formatting even in the context of a hierarchy. You have to follow these additional steps to indent only a particular report field: 1. 2. 3.

2012

Remove the Group indent under Report → Hierarchical Grouping Options Right-click the report field you want to indent and choose Size and Position in the context menu. Click the formula icon next to the X-Axis Value and enter the following code: HierarchyLevel (Grouping Level (Material Node ID)) * . For number of pixels enter the indent that you want to have per hierarchy level. Enter 100 and the first level will have an indent of 100, the second will have 200 and so on.


223


TBI30

With formulas you could also change ofter formatting options for the hierarchy levels. For example you could use different font sizes per hierarchy level if you use the formula in the format editor in a similar way.

Connecting to other SAP systems Enterprise reporting is often a starting point for business intelligence in companies. SAP Crystal Reports 2011 enables you to access SAP ERP/ECC data sources directly without a universe or other semantical layer object. You can use the following objects in a SAP system for direct access: • • • •

Classic InfoSets SAP Queries and InfoSet queries ABAP Functions Tables and Cluster (Open SQL)

Figure 91: Connectivity with SAP Crystal Reports 2011 to SAP Systems

Note: In this lesson we will focus on SAP table connections. Creating objects like ABAP functions can not be covered in this lesson.

Connecting to SAP Tables At the most basic level, SAP ERP data is stored in a standard relational database system such as Oracle or SQL Server. This data is then abstracted in ERP to represent the various entities used by the ERP applications. These definitions, with the exception of ABAP functions and ABAP data clusters, are stored in the ABAP dictionary. The SAP Tables, Function, and Cluster connectivity provides access to these entities for reporting. The ABAP dictionary is referenced by the SAP Tables, Function, and Cluster connectivity to retrieve the definitions for each of the entities described above excluding ABAP functions and ABAP data clusters. Definitions of the entities include the long text of tables such as Sales Document: Item Data instead of

224


2012

TBI30


the more cryptic name VBAP, the long text of fields such as Material instead of MATNR, and finally the type of the field itself (for example, numeric, text, date, and so on). The dictionary also maintains these definitions for each language that is configured in the system and provides the appropriate description according to the language the user has specified at logon. The SAP Tables, Function, and Cluster connectivity provides access to several low-level objects within SAP, for example: •

•

•

Transparent Tables This type of database object is similar to the traditional database table. Transparent tables contain the majority of the SAP application data. Most SAP applications use one or more transparent tables to store and retrieve business transactions. You can link these tables to other transparent tables to pull information from other application areas of the SAP system. Pool and Cluster Tables Pool and cluster tables are made up of a logical grouping of other database tables. They are primarily used to store application configuration and control information rather than the actual application data. These tables are only a logical view of several tables combined, they are accessible only through the SAP Tables, Function, and Cluster connectivity. Native database access does not provide the same view of this data. Views A view appears as one table with a list of fields, but actually consists of several tables linked together. Views provide a more abstract view of the data and allow you to build reports without having to worry about linking multiple tables in a report. Views are maintained within SAP and need to be configured before you use them for reporting.

ABAP Functions While technically not a table, an ABAP function is often used in ERP reporting to provide calculations and to retrieve data that is based on parameters passed into the function. For example, an employee number passed to a function that returns the employee’s address. For this reason, the SAP Tables, Cluster and Function connectivity provides the ability to call ABAP functions and use their results in a report. ABAP functions are also useful in situations where complex pre processing of the data must occur before viewing or in circumstances where you may wish to further optimize the performance of a query. For functions to be used in SAP Crystal Reports, they must meet two conditions: • •

2012

Functions must have defined return types for each of the output parameters Functions must not have whole tables as input parameters


225


TBI30

Classic InfoSets The combined InfoSet/ABAP query driver allows you to use an existing SAP query or InfoSet as a data source for a Crystal Report object. The SAP query or InfoSet is built within SAP by a content expert, who then makes the data available to the business user. Through the SAP Crystal Reports connectivity the user can design multiple reports by quickly referencing the same query or InfoSet. Since an InfoSet can be built on top of a logical database in SAP, it can inherit all of the business logic and security that is programmed into the logical database. Reports that are based on SAP queries and InfoSets behave similarly to reports that are based on stored procedures in mainstream databases. You can insert subreports that are based on different queries or InfoSets into the main report as well.

InfoSet Queries The SAP query tool allows you to create SAP queries and InfoSet queries in a single tool. The query itself leverages the InfoSet as a data source, therefore the InfoSet needs to be created, and be assigned to the proper user groups before you start creating the SAP query. The difference between an InfoSet query and an SAP query is the actual tool itself and the output format. The InfoSet query tool is a single-screen tool whereas the SAP query tool is a screen-byscreen approach. On the output format, the SAP query offers more capabilities like a ranked and statistical list than the InfoSet query, which only offers a basic list output. SAP Crystal Reports is able to leverage the outcome of the SAP query tool with the combined InfoSet and SAP query connectivity. 382

226


2012

TBI30


Exercise 9: Creating a New Crystal Report Against SAP Tables Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a new report against SAP tables • Create an additional parameter to prompt the user for detailed selection

Business Example You are a report designer and need to create SAP Crystal Report objects using SAP tables.

Task 1: Create a new report using the SAP Tables, Cluster, and Function connectivity Follow the following steps to create a new report against SAP tables. 1.

Start SAP Crystal Reports 2011.

2.

Create a new report using the SAP Tables, Cluster, and Function connectivity. Connection Information Field Name


System

RWB

System Number

40

Application Server


Client

800

User

user##

Password

Assigned password

Generate RFC Trace Files

No

Note: The list of available SAP systems is retrieved from SAP Logon.


2012


227


TBI30

Data Source Information Field Name

DD (Data Dictionary) Tables Fields

Value (replace ## with your assigned group number) • •

SCARR (Airline) SFLIGHT (Flight)

• •

SCARR.CARRID (Airline Code) SCARR.CARRNAME

•

SFLIGHT.CONNID (Flight Connection Number) SFLIGHT.FLDATE (Flight date) SFLIGHT.PRICE (Airfare) SFLIGHT.CURRENCY (Local currency of airline)

• • • Link

• •

MANDT (Client) CARRID (Airline Code)

Application Server


Client

800

User

user##

Password

Assigned password


No

Note: The SAP Table, Cluster, or Function connectivity is broken into three areas. The Data Cluster (CL) entry provides access to ABAP clusters; the Data Dictionary (DD) entry offers access to the ABAP Dictionary; and the ABAP Function module (FN) offers access to ABAP Functions. 3.

Set display option Show Both and filter the tables inside Data Dictionary (DD) using SFLI%.

4.

Select the two tables SFLIGHT(Flight) and SCARR (Airline). Note: To select the table SCARR you have to change the filter option from SFLI% to SCAR%.


228


2012

TBI30


5.

Link the two tables on fields MANDT (Client) and CARRID (Airline Code)

6.

Select the fields as described in the table above.

7.

Define Grouping by SCARR.CARRID (Airline Code)

8.

Define Summary with function SUM on SFLIGHT.PRICE (Airfare).

9.

Use Default Group Sorting for SCARR.CARRID.

10. Do not use a Chart in the report. 11. Do not restrict the data selection. 12. Do not use a Template.

Task 2: Ajust some field layout settings Adjust the layout setting of the filds flight date and Price . 1.

Display Flight Date in the format MM/DD/YYYY

2.

Define Price to be displayed without currency symbol

Task 3: Save your report Save the report to BusinessObjects Enterprise. Field Name


Save in

BI Training/User Area/User ##/

Name

U## SFLIGHT data

System

wdflbmt2268

User

user##

Password

Assigned password

Authentication type

SAP

1.

Save the report to BusinessObjects Enterprise using your SAP user account.

Task 4: View report in BI Launchpad View the report in BI Launchpad 1.

Launch BI Launchpad and logon with the following details:


2012


229


230

TBI30

Field Name


System

wdflbmt2268:6400

SAP System

RWB

Client

800

User name

user##

Password

Assigned password

Authentication

SAP


2012

TBI30


Solution 9: Creating a New Crystal Report Against SAP Tables Task 1: Create a new report using the SAP Tables, Cluster, and Function connectivity Follow the following steps to create a new report against SAP tables. 1.

Start SAP Crystal Reports 2011. a)

2.

Choose Start → Program → Crystal Reports 2011 → Crystal Reports 2011.

Create a new report using the SAP Tables, Cluster, and Function connectivity. Connection Information Field Name


System

RWB

System Number

40

Application Server


Client

800

User

user##

Password

Assigned password


No

Note: The list of available SAP systems is retrieved from SAP Logon. Data Source Information Field Name


DD (Data Dictionary) Tables Fields

• •

SCARR (Airline) SFLIGHT (Flight)

• •

SCARR.CARRID (Airline Code) SCARR.CARRNAME Continued on next page

2012


231


TBI30

Field Name

Value (replace ## with your assigned group number) • • • •

Link

• •

SFLIGHT.CONNID (Flight Connection Number) SFLIGHT.FLDATE (Flight date) SFLIGHT.PRICE (Airfare) SFLIGHT.CURRENCY (Local currency of airline) MANDT (Client) CARRID (Airline Code)

Application Server


Client

800

User

user##

Password

Assigned password


No

Note: The SAP Table, Cluster, or Function connectivity is broken into three areas. The Data Cluster (CL) entry provides access to ABAP clusters; the Data Dictionary (DD) entry offers access to the ABAP Dictionary; and the ABAP Function module (FN) offers access to ABAP Functions. a)

Select the menu File → New Report → Standard Report.

b)

Expand the folder Create New Connection.

c)

Expand the folder SAP Table, Cluster, or Function.

d)

Select the SAP system RWB and click Next.

e)

Enter the Client, Username, Password, and click Next.

f)

Leave the check box Generate RFC trace files unchecked and click Finish.


232


2012

TBI30


3.

Set display option Show Both and filter the tables inside Data Dictionary (DD) using SFLI%. a)

Right-click the entry Data Dictionary (DD) and select Options.

b)

Select the Show Both option under Tables and Fields.

c)

Enter SFLI% in the Table name LIKE text box.

d)

Click OK.

e)

Right-click the entry Data Dictionary (DD) and choose Refresh (F5).

f)

Double-click the entry Data Dictionary (DD). Note: The list of available tables is filtered based on the settings from the Options dialog.

4.

Select the two tables SFLIGHT(Flight) and SCARR (Airline). Note: To select the table SCARR you have to change the filter option from SFLI% to SCAR%.

5.

a)

Select the table SFLIGHT(Flight).

b)

Click the right arrow to move the table to the right-hand screen and click Next.

c)

Right-click the entry Data Dictionary (DD) and select the menu Options.

d)

Enter SCAR% in the Table name LIKE text box.

e)

Click OK.

f)

Right-click the entry Data Dictionary (DD) and choose Refresh (F5).

g)

Select the table SCARR (Airline).

h)

Click the right arrow to move the table to the right-hand screen and click Next.

Link the two tables on fields MANDT (Client) and CARRID (Airline Code) a)

Use the default link and click Next.


2012


233


6.

Select the fields as described in the table above. a)

b) 7.

8.

Select the fields. Click the right arrow to bring them to the Fields to Display window. • •

SCARR.CARRID (Airline Code) SCARR.CARRNAME

• • • •

SFLIGHT.CONNID (Flight Connection Number) SFLIGHT.FLDATE (Flight date) SFLIGHT.PRICE (Airfare) SFLIGHT.CURRENCY (Local currency of airline)

Choose Next.

Define Grouping by SCARR.CARRID (Airline Code) a)

Click SCARR.CARRID (Airline Code) .

b)

Click the right arrow.

c)

Click Next.

Define Summary with function SUM on SFLIGHT.PRICE (Airfare). a)

9.

TBI30

Use the suggested default and click Next.

Use Default Group Sorting for SCARR.CARRID. a)

Click Next.

10. Do not use a Chart in the report. a)

Click Next.

11. Do not restrict the data selection. a)

In the Record Selection screen choose Next.

12. Do not use a Template. a)

Select No Template.

b)

Click Finish.


234


2012

TBI30


Task 2: Ajust some field layout settings Adjust the layout setting of the filds flight date and Price . 1.

2.

Display Flight Date in the format MM/DD/YYYY a)

Right-click the Flight date column.

b)

Choose Format Field...

c)

Select 03/01/1999.

d)

Click OK.

Define Price to be displayed without currency symbol a)

Right-click the Price column.

b)

Choose Format Field...

c)

Uncheck the Display Currency Symbol checkbox.

d)

Click OK.

Task 3: Save your report Save the report to BusinessObjects Enterprise. Field Name


Save in

BI Training/User Area/User ##/

Name

U## SFLIGHT data

System

wdflbmt2268

User

user##

Password

Assigned password

Authentication type

SAP

1.

Save the report to BusinessObjects Enterprise using your SAP user account. a)

Choose File → Save As.

b)

Select Enterprise on the left pane

c)

Specify the System name, user name, and password.

d)

Select SAP as the authentication.

e)

Click OK.

f)

Navigate to the folder and save the report as U##SFLIGHT data.

g)

Click Save. Continued on next page

2012


235


TBI30

Task 4: View report in BI Launchpad View the report in BI Launchpad 1.

236

Launch BI Launchpad and logon with the following details: Field Name


System

wdflbmt2268:6400

SAP System

RWB

Client

800

User name

user##

Password

Assigned password

Authentication

SAP

a)

Go to Start → Programs → BusinessObjects BI platform 4.0 → Custom Link to BI Launchpad.

b)

Specify the Server: wdflbmt2268

c)

Logon with your user name and password when prompted

d)

Click on the Documents Tab

e)

Navigate to Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ## folder you will see your report.

f)

Double-click U## SFLIGHT data.rpt.


2012

TBI30


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Use the SAP Toolbar to create a Crystal Report on with a SAP NetWeaver BW query • Understand how SAP NetWeaver BW metadata can be used in Crystal Reports • Work with hierarchies and variables in Crystal Reports • Create a Crystal report with database tables in a SAP system

2012


237


TBI30

Lesson: SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Lesson Overview This lesson introduces basic functions of SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise and how to create a report on a report based on an universe.


Create a new report in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise on an universe Work with basic formatting options in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

Business Example The IT department has designed an universe that connects to the data you need for your report. You now want to use SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise to design the report.

238


2012

TBI30

Lesson: SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

To define a new report you need to follow these steps: 1.

Log on to the SAP BI Platform

2.

Select the data source

3.

Add elements

4.

Format data

5.

Select records

6.

Group and sort data

Introducing the Report Design Environment of SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise The repot design screen of SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise consists of different areas.

Figure 92: SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Design Environment

Basic Functions In the area of the basic functions you find the following options • • • • •

2012

Create new, open, save Print, export Undo, redo Cut, copy, paste Format painter


239


TBI30

Toolbars There are three different toolbars in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise •

Insert Here you can insert new elements into your report like textboxes, groups, charts and so on.

•

Format Here you find all option for changing the format of an element like font size, font type, colors, alignment of the elements and so on.

•

Data Here you can edit the query, define sorts, add interactive filters and so on.

240


2012

TBI30


Left Panels There are different left panels available. Depending on the mode Structure or Page the correspondending panels are displayed and others are hidden. •

Data Explorer Use the “Data Explorer” side panel to insert, modify, or delete objects in your report. When you create a new report or open an existing report, the “Data Explorer” side panel opens adjacent to the report canvas. Objects that you add in the Query Panel are stored in the “Data Explorer” where they can be added to the report. – – – – –

Result Objects Formulas Parameters Running Totals Predefined Objects

Expand the area by clicking the area name. •

Outline The “Outline” panel shows the content of the report in a tree view. The root node is the report itself, while the first-level nodes represent the sections of the report. Within each section, the report's objects and elements are listed. You can modify the objects using the context menu.

•

Group Tree The “Group Tree” panel shows a tree view of groups and subgroups in the report. Any item you select in the "Group Tree" is selected on the report canvas.

•

Search Use the “Search” side panel to search the report for any specific value. Type a word or phrase into the text box and press Enter. The search results appear in the side panel.

2012


241


TBI30

Report Sections The report layout is divided in sections. Each section has its own properties and is used in a different way. See the following list for further details. •

Report Header This area is generally used for the report title and other information you want to appear at the beginning of the report. It can also be used for charts and cross-tabs that include data for the entire report.

•

Page Header This area is generally used for information that you want to appear at the top of each page, such as chapter names, the name of the document, and other similar information. This area can also be used to display object titles above the objects on a report.

•

Body This area is used for the body of the report, and is printed once per record. The bulk of the report data generally appears in this section.

•

Report Footer This area is used for information you want to appear only once at the end of the report (such as grand totals) and for charts and cross-tabs that include data for the entire report.

•

Page Footer This area usually contains the page number and any other information you want to appear on the bottom of each page.

If a group is added to the report, the program creates two additional sections: •

Group Header This area typically holds the group name object, and can be used to display charts or cross-tabs that include data specific to the group. It is printed once at the beginning of a group.

•

Group Footer This area generally holds the summary value, if any, and can be used to display charts or cross-tabs. It is printed once at the end of a group.

Create a New SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Document When you launch SAP Crysal Reports for Enterprise the start page appears first:, it includes links to recent reports you’ve opened, to reate a new report, the help system, and other useful resources. Here you can choose to create a new blank report.

242


2012

TBI30


Figure 93: Start Page in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

Select a Data Source Crystal Reports supports connecting to the following data sources: • • •

Universe SAP BEx Query Analysis view Note: Before you can connect to a data source you must first be connected to an SAP BI Platform server.

After you have choosen the datasource the Edit Query panel appears. You can now select elements to include in your query. Note: If you connect to an Analysis view, the query panel will not appear because Analysis views contain pre-designed queries. The report canvas will appear.

2012


243


TBI30

Figure 94: Edit Query Panel in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

Hint: When you keep the Generate Report flag activated the system automatically generates a standard layout of the report. This feature is helpful for basic report needs. When your report becomes more sophisticated it might be usefull to deactivate that flag.

Add Elements to the Report A Report consists of different elements. A selection of the most important elements are described below. •

Result objects Result objects are objects that display data from the data source. Much of the data displayed on a report is from result objects. Normally, result objects will be placed in the Body area, but under certain circumstances, they will be placed in other sections of the report.

•

Formulas To display data that is a calculated value, you need to create a formula and place that formula on the report. For example, if the data source stores only the order dates and ship dates for orders, but you need to display the number of days it takes to ship the order, you must create a formula that will calculate the number of days between ordering and shipping.

•

244

Parameters


2012

TBI30


Parameters allow you to filter report data for specific users. For example, in a report used by salespeople, you might create a parameter that prompts the user to choose a region. When the user chooses a region, the report returns the results for the specific region instead of returning the results for all regions. •

Running total elements To display a total that evaluates each record and provides a running sum of all the values in an object (or all the values in a certain set of values), a running total element needs to be created and placed in the report. If the first three values in an object were 2, 4, and 6, a running total would print 2, and then 6 (the sum of 2 + 4), and then 12 (the sum of 2 + 4 + 6).

•

Predefined objects Predefined objects include Page Number, Record Number, Group Number, Print Date, and Total Page Count objects. Use the commands in the Predefined Objectsarea of the Data Explorer side panel to add predefined objects to your report.

•

Text elements Text elements are mostly used to hold text, but they can also hold result objects to create custom form letters and more. You can use text elements to combine result objects, insert titles, label totals, and other data on your report.

•

Picture When designing reports, there will be times when you want to include a picture. For example, you may want to insert a company logo in the Report Header.

Formulas Usually when you create a report, the data needed already exists in the database folder objects. For example, to prepare an order list you would place the appropriate objects on the report. Sometimes, however, you need data that does not exist in any of the data objects. In such cases, you need to create a formula. For example, to calculate the number of days it takes to process each order, you need a formula that determines the number of days between the order date and the ship date. SAP Crystal Reports makes it easy for you to create such a formula.

2012


245


TBI30

Figure 95: Advanced View of the Formula Workshop

Here you find some examples for typical formulas.

Use Case

Formula in Crystal Reports Syntax

Adding calculated objects

{Orders_Detail.Unit Price} *.85

To calculate a price discounted 15% Formatting text To change letters to uppercase Extracting parts of a date

UpperCase ({Customer. CUSTOMER_NAME}) Month ({Orders.Order Date})

To determine what month an order was placed

Parameter Parameters generate prompts that require the user of a report to enter information before SAP Crystal Reports can generate reports. Think of a parameter as a question that the user needs to answer before the report is generated. The information users enter, or the way they respond, determines what appears in the report. For example, in a report used by salespeople, there might be a parameter that asks the user to choose a country. The report would return the results for the specific country, instead of returning the results for all countries. By using parameters in formulas, selection formulas, and in the report itself, you can create a single report that can change according to the needs of the viewers of the report. Parameters can also be used in subreports.

246


2012

TBI30


Figure 96: Creating a New Parameter

Note: Parameters created within SAP Crystal Reports can only be used in filters which filter data after it is retrieved from the database. Parameters do not affect the database query itself. Parameters allow users to guide their analysis without running a new database query. To edit the database query, use the Query Panel.

Format the Data There are different ways to format your data in a report. The Formatting toolbar includes such options as font formatting, text formatting and alignment, and highlighting. Database fields can be formatted to print with the colors, fonts, and attributes that you prefer. These fields can also be formatted to change the way the data displays on your report. For example, you might prefer your numbers to be printed with two decimal places and your dates to be in the North American format. These attributes can be combined. Using the Formatting Dialog is another, more complex method of formatting.

2012


247


TBI30

Figure 97: Formatting Options

Group and Sort Data Group Grouped data is data that is sorted and separated into meaningful groups. For example, a customer list may be grouped by Postal Code or Region. In a sales report, a group might consist of all orders placed by a particular customer or orders generated by a particular sales representative. When data is grouped, the following sort and group direction options are available. Direction refers to the order in which the values are displayed: •

•

•

248

Ascending order means smallest to largest (1 to 9, A to Z, False to True). The program sorts the records in ascending order and then begins a new group whenever the value changes. Descending order means largest to smallest (9 to 1, Z to A, True to False). The program sorts the records in descending order and then begins a new group whenever the value changes. Specified order is an order that you customize for your needs. The program places each record into the custom group that you specify, leaving the records in each group in original order; or, it sorts them in ascending or descending order, depending on your instructions.


2012

TBI30


Sort When you sort, Crystal Reports asks you to define two things: the sort direction (ascending or descending), and the object you want the sort to be based on (sort object). Sort objects let you determine the order in which data appears on your report. Almost any object can be used for sorting, including formulas. An object's data type determines how the data from that object is sorted. In single object sorting, all the records used in the report are sorted based on the values in a single object. Sorting an inventory report by stock number or sorting a customer list by customer number are examples of single object sorts. In multiple object sorts, Crystal Reports first sorts the records based on the values in the first object selected, putting them in ascending or descending order as specified. If two or more records have a matching object value in the first sort object, the matching records are sorted by the value in the second sort object. For example, if you choose to sort first by Country and then by Region, both in ascending order, the report would appear with countries listed in alphabetic order, and regions within each country listed in alphabetic order. Any other objects, such as the postal codes within each region, would remain unsorted.

2012


249


250

TBI30


2012

TBI30


Exercise 10: Create a Basic Report in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a basic report against an universe with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

Business Example You need to display data in a predefined layout and want to use SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise for that. The data connection is provided by your IT department via an universe.

Task 1: Create a report using a universe store it in the SAP BI Platform Follow the steps in this exercise to create a first basic report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise and then format the report. 1.

Start Crystal Reports for Enterprise and maintain the server connection

2.

Define a new report against the eFashion Universe showing Year, State, City, Sales revenue and Margin. Display the data grouped by Year.

3.

Add two new elements into the your report showing the number of cities and the total sales revenue into the Group Footer 1 section.

4.

Save your report to the BI Platform server and in addition generate a PDF-File to check the report.

Task 2: Change the layout of your report Use different layout options to change the appearance of the report. 1.

Remove the Modification Date from the report and change the date format of the Print Date.

2.

Adjust the color of the elements in the report header and report footer

3.

Define a page break so that every year is displayed on a new page.

4.

Adjust the alignment of some elements.

5.

Save the report again to the BI Platform server


2012


251


TBI30

Task 3: View the report in BI Launchpad View the report in BI Launchpad 1.

252

Launch the BI Launchpad and logon with the following details: Folder


System

wdflbmt2268

SAP System

RWB

Client

800

User name

user##

Password

Assigned password

Authentication

SAP


2012

TBI30


Solution 10: Create a Basic Report in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Task 1: Create a report using a universe store it in the SAP BI Platform Follow the steps in this exercise to create a first basic report with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise and then format the report. 1.

Start Crystal Reports for Enterprise and maintain the server connection a)

Click Start → Programs → Crystal Reports for Enterprise 4.0 → Crystal Reports for Enterprise 4.0

b)

Click Edit → Server Connections.

c)

Select the predefined Server wdflbmt2268

d)

Enter your user user## into the field User Name:

e)

Choose SAP as Authentication Type:

f)

Use the Test Connection button to check the connection. Enter your password when prompted

g)

Click OK.


2012


253


2.

TBI30

Define a new report against the eFashion Universe showing Year, State, City, Sales revenue and Margin. Display the data grouped by Year. a)

Click File → New Report.

b)

When promoted, log on to the BI Platform server with the following credentials: Server Connections:

wdflbmt2268

User name:

user##

Password:

your assigned password

c)

Click OK

d)

In the New Data Source Connection screen choose Universe as Data Source Type

e)

Open the folder Universes → Webi Universes

f)

Choose the eFashion.unx universe

g)

Click Next >

h)

Drag the following objects from the left side to the Result Objects for Query #1 area. • • • • •

Time period → Year Store → State Store → City Measures → Sales revenue Measures → Margin

i)

Keep the Generate report option checked

j)

Click Finish

k)

In the Insert tab click on the Group button.

l)

Keep the standard settings (Year, at group level 1 and ascending) and click Insert.


254


2012

TBI30


3.

Add two new elements into the your report showing the number of cities and the total sales revenue into the Group Footer 1 section. a)

In the Insert tab click the Total button.

b)

Define the new total as • • • •

c)

Click Insert

d)

In the same way create a new total with the following options: • • • •

4.

Distinct count of City for each grouping of Year below data

Sum of Sales revenue for each grouping of Year below data

Save your report to the BI Platform server and in addition generate a PDF-File to check the report. a)

Choose File → Save

b)

Select the My Favorites folder which can be found on the left part of the screen under All Folders → My Folders → My Favorites.

c)

Type in U## My first CR for Enterprise report (replace ## with your group number)

d)

Click on Save Hint: You can see that the name of the document is automatically used as report title.

e)

Choose File → Export → PDF

f)

Click OK

g)

Click To Application

h)

Review the PDF file close the Adobe Reader application by clicking File → Exit.


2012


255


TBI30

Task 2: Change the layout of your report Use different layout options to change the appearance of the report. 1.

2.

Remove the Modification Date from the report and change the date format of the Print Date. a)

Select the field Modification Date that can be found under the Title of the report and choose Edit → Delete to remove it from the report

b)

Select the field Print Date that can be found in the top right hand side of the page Header and choose Format → Format Predefined Element...

c)

Click Format and choose Saturday, April 01, 2006 as format on the left side of the screen

d)

Click Close

Adjust the color of the elements in the report header and report footer a)

Use the CTRL Key to select the fields ReportTitle, PageNofM and PrintDate at the same time. Use the Font Color icon on the Format tab to change the font color to a dark red.

b)

click on the line underneath the Report Title and choose Format Line... from the context menu. In the Appearance change the field Color to dark red.

c)

Click Close.

d)

Go to the last page of your report and click into the Report Footer section. Use the Background Color icon on the Format tab to change the font color to a light red.

3.

Define a page break so that every year is displayed on a new page. a)

Navigate to the first page of your report again.

b)

Click into the Group Footer 1 section and choose Format Section... In the Paging area select the New Page after 0 visible groups option and change the 0 to 1.

c) 4.

256

Click Close

Adjust the alignment of some elements. a)

Select the fields Sales revenue and Margin using the CTRL key.

b)

Click on the Align right button in the Format tab.

c)

Click the Total field for the City and click the Align left button. Continued on next page


2012

TBI30


5.

Save the report again to the BI Platform server a)

Click on File → Save

Task 3: View the report in BI Launchpad View the report in BI Launchpad 1.

2012

Launch the BI Launchpad and logon with the following details: Folder


System

wdflbmt2268

SAP System

RWB

Client

800

User name

user##

Password

Assigned password

Authentication

SAP

a)


b)

Enter the servername wdflbmt2268

c)


d)

Click the Documents Tab.

e)

Click the Favorites folder.

f)

Double-click U## My first CR for Enterprise report.


257


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create a new report in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise on an universe • Work with basic formatting options in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

258


2012

TBI30

Lesson: SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise and SAP BW as Data Source

Lesson: SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise and SAP BW as Data Source Lesson Overview In this lesson you learn how to create report documents with Crystal Reports for Enterprise using SAP NetWeaver BW data provided by Business Explorer queries.


Create a report in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise with a SAP BEx query as a data source Work with BEx query elements

Business Example You need to create formatted reports for executives in your organization. The data for this reports is stored in SAP NetWeaver BW InfoProviders.

Using SAP NetWeaver Data Sources in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise In SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise you have two connectivity options: •

•

2012

SAP BEx query data acess which requires an OLAP connection that has to be created in Information Design Tool or Central Management Console before. SAP BEx query elements like filters, variables, restricted or calculated key figures can be leveraged in Crystal reports for Enterprise. The standard and most convenient way to access data from SAP NetWeaver BW is with SAP BEx query data access via BI Consumer Services API. This is why this lesson focuses on this connectivity option. Connectivity to universes that have been designed with the Information Design Tool and serve as semantic layer, that means as a business representation of corporate data using common business terms. SAP NetWeaver BW InfoProviders can also be the data source for a relational multi-source universe. These universes allow access to SAP NetWeaver BW


259


TBI30

data via SQL but do not support query elements. This kind of universe can be beneficial if data from other non-BW data sources has to be merged with SAP NetWeaver BW InfoProviders. Note: If you need to combine data from multiple InfoProviders in SAP NetWeaver BW, create a MultiProvider and access it via a SAP BEx query.

Figure 98: SAP NetWeaver BW Connectivity Options

You cannot directly access Tables, Clusters, ABAP Functions, or Infosets in SAP systems with SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise. Use SAP Crystal Reports 2011 for this functionality. When you connect to an SAP NetWeaver BW query in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise, the underlying metadata from the BEx query can be used in the query panel. The table below shows how SAP NetWeaver BW metadata is used in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise.

260

BW Query element

SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise element

Characteristic

Dimension object

Hierarchy

Hierarchy object for each existing hierarchy. Hierarchy objects are sub-objects of dimension objects.

Key Figures

Measure element with up to two sub-objects: unit or currency and formatted value.

Calculated Key Figure

Measure element (Information about the details of the calculated key figure is not available in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise.)


2012

TBI30


BW Query element

SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise element

Restricted Key Figure

Measure element (Information about the details of the restricted key figure is not available in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise)

Filter

Filters (characteristic restrictions and restricted key figures) will be applied to the underlying query but are not visible or changeable in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise.


Dimension object

Display attribute Each attribute is represented by an attribute object that belongs to the dimension object. Attribute objects are separated into key and text objects. SAP BEx variables

Parameters

Selecting Data in the Query Panel Each SAP BEx query provides characteristics and key figures for analysis. The BEx query results can be restricted with filters or variables. Though the queries are pre-designed, you can use the query panel to choose dimension objects and measures or create additional filters and prompts before you run the report.

2012


261


TBI30

Figure 99: SAP BEx Query Elements in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

To leverage a SAP BEx query in Crystal Reports for Enterprise follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Before you connect to an SAP BEx query, log on to an SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform server. Click File → New Report. The New Data Source Connection dialog box appears. From the Data Source Type list, choose SAP BEx Query Data Access. On the Name panel, select an OLAP connection and select Next. The query panel appears. Note: The OLAP connection has to be defined in Information Design Tool or Central Management Console but cannot be created in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise. If no query has been specified in the connection you can now select one.

5.

You can now select objects from the data source to include in your Crystal Reports for Enterprise document by just dragging them into the Result Objects area. Adding objects into the Query Filters area allows you to create new or additional filters for the query.

If the SAP BEx query contains a variable, a dialog box appears prompting you to enter the variable value for your query before it can be executed.

Working with Hierarchies Characteristics in SAP BEx queries can include multiple hierarchies. You can choose one of the hierarchy objects that belong to the dimension object in the query panel and insert it into the Result Objects area. Now you can select members of the hierarchy that you want to use in the SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise document. You can also choose hierarchy nodes with all or a selection of subordinate members.

262


2012

TBI30


Figure 100: Member Selector

To select a member by hierarchal relationship use the Member Selector. You can open the Member Selector by clicking the arrow icon on the right side of the hierarchy object in the query panel. In the member selector you can: •

Select hierarchy nodes and hierarchy members by activating the check boxes. Unchecked nodes and members will be excluded from the query results. When you right-click a hierarchy node you can activate all children or descendants of this node in the context menu. Note: If you select a parent node and one of its child nodes, all children nodes will be selected in the query.

• •

Search within the hierarchy structure Sort the hierarchy. Sorting in the member selector is only for easier selection of members and will not be applied to the actual report. Count children of hierarchy nodes to estimate the amount of records you will have in your report.

•

In the selection area of the member selector you can see an overview of the selected elements of the hierarchy. By clicking the [X] icon you can delete selections.

Visualizing Hierarchies in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Hierarchical structures can be displayed as a crosstab or with group indents. With crosstabs you can visualize hierarchy data very easily but the layout and formatting options of the crosstab are limited. Crosstabs can only be placed in report Headers, group headers, and group footers. In group headers and footers they only contain the data for the respective group.

2012


263


TBI30

With group indents you define an indentation for each hierarchy level. Using indents is more complex but also gives you more options for layout and formatting. You have to create a group for the hierarchy object and you have to create a formula for the horizontal position of the group name field in order to create the indent. Creating a crosstab with hierarchy objects

Figure 101: Hierarchy Crosstab

To create a crosstab with a hierarchical structure add a hierarchy object into the result objects area in the query panel, run the query and follow these steps: 1. 2.

3.

4.

Choose the Insert tab Click Cross-tab in the menu and choose the objects that you want to display in rows and columns. With the [+] icon you can create additional rows and columns in the crosstab. Define how totals are calculated, note that calculations for hierarchies have to be delegated for SAP NetWeaver BW data sources in order to return correct values. Click Insert and insert the crosstab into the report header, a group footer or a group header.

Creating group indents for hierarchies

264


2012

TBI30


Figure 102: Hierarchy with Group Indent

To visualize the hierarchical structure of a hierarchy object using indents run a query and follow these steps: 1. 2. 3.

4.

Choose the Insert tab and click Group. Select the desired hierarchy object from the list. Click Insert. Note that new group header and group footer sections are created in the report structure. Right-click the group name field in the group header and choose Format Group Name Element. Click the formula icon on the right of the X: entry field. Enter the following code for the formula: HierarchyLevel (GroupingLevel ()) * . To add the hierarchy object choose Add Object and select the object from the list. The number of pixels determines the indent that is multiplicated with the hierarchy level.

There might be sections that are empty in your report, you can hide them by right-clicking the section in structure view and choosing Hide.

Working with BEx Variables Variables from SAP BEx queries are converted to parameters in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise. Users of the Crystal Reports documents are then prompted for values that are transferred to the query. Variable restrictions for example in filters are applied before the query results are transferred to Crystal Reports for enterprise.

2012


265


TBI30

Figure 103: BEx variables in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

Parameters created in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise appear in the Data Explorer. Inherited parameters can be used for example in the filter of a report or included in a formula, but they cannot be edited in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise. Parameters can only be edited where they were created, here in SAP BEx Query Designer. All BEx variable types are supported in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise, these variable types are: • • • • •

266

Characteristic value variables Hierarchy node variables Hierarchy variables Formula variables Text Variables


2012

TBI30


Supported features of BEx variables are: •

Basic Settings: Single value Multiple value Interval Optional or mandatory variables Limitation: Selection option variables are only supported as interval parameters.

•

Processing types: Manual entry Replacement path Authorization Exit variables without user entry Authorization Limitation: Replacement path for text variables is not supported. Example: text variables that dynamically display selected filter values in the report.

2012


267


268

TBI30


2012

TBI30


Exercise 11: Create a Report Against SAP NetWeaver BW Using a Hierarchy Variable and Hierarchy Node Variable in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a report against SAP NetWeaver BW using a Hierarchy Variable and a Hierarchy Node Variable in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise

Business Example –

Task 1: Create a report using a query from BW System as data source In this exercise you will create a report with Crystal Reports for Enterprise using a Query from the BW System as datasource. The query contains a hierarchy and a hierarchy node variable. 1.

Define a new report against the query U00 Query Hierarchy Variables [U00_QD_VAR002] showing Material, and Sales Volume EUR. Execute the report choosing PRDHA – Product Hierarchy for material MARA for the hierarchy variable and 0PRDH1/00100 – Machines for the hierarchy node variable.

Task 2: Activate the hierarchical features of your report First of all you want the hierarchy shown all the way down from the selected node. To make the report better readable you want to use an indent for the material description depending on the level of the hierarchy. When executing the report accept the same combination of hierarchy variable and hierarchy node variable again to see the change in your result.

2012

1.

Change the query in your report so that all the elements below the selected hierarchy node are displayed.

2.

Define an indent for the material name so that the end user can see the hierarchical structure.

3.

Save your report to the BI Platform server and open it in the BI Launchpad


269


TBI30

Solution 11: Create a Report Against SAP NetWeaver BW Using a Hierarchy Variable and Hierarchy Node Variable in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise Task 1: Create a report using a query from BW System as data source In this exercise you will create a report with Crystal Reports for Enterprise using a Query from the BW System as datasource. The query contains a hierarchy and a hierarchy node variable. 1.

Define a new report against the query U00 Query Hierarchy Variables [U00_QD_VAR002] showing Material, and Sales Volume EUR. Execute the report choosing PRDHA – Product Hierarchy for material MARA for the hierarchy variable and 0PRDH1/00100 – Machines for the hierarchy node variable. a)

Click Start → Programs → Crystal Reports for Enterprise 4.0 → Crystal Reports for Enterprise 4.0

b)

Choose File → New Report... Note: Click Edit → Server. If connection has not been created, create a new connection. Otherwise click the assigned server name and change the Authentication type to SAP. Click Test Connection and login with your assigned username and password.

c)

When promoted, log on to the BI Platform server with the following credentials Server Connections:

wdflbmt2268

User name:

user##

Password:

your assigned password

d)

Click OK

e)

In the New Data Source Connection screen choose SAP BEx Query Data Access as Data Source Type


270


2012

TBI30


f)

Choose the Customer Sales Multiprovder Connection and click Next Note: The Connection has been defined already in the BI Platform server and points to the BW System RWB and the Infoprovider Multiprovider - Customer Sales [P_SALES01]

g)

Search for the U00 Query Hierarchy Variables query, technical name [U00_QD_VAR002].

h)

Click OK

i)

Drag the following objects from the left side to the Result Objects for Query #1 area. •

Material → Material Note: Open the Material Folder and take the Material Object which reflects the generic hierarchy .

•

Sales Volume EUR

j)

Keep the Generate report flag activated

k)

Click Finish

l)

For the hierarchy variable choose PRDHA - Product Hierarchy for material MARA

m)

For the hierarchy node variable choose 0PRODH1/00100 Machines

n)

Click OK Note: Notice that the displayed values are non hierarchical but do show the hierarchy 1 level further down.


2012


271


TBI30

Task 2: Activate the hierarchical features of your report First of all you want the hierarchy shown all the way down from the selected node. To make the report better readable you want to use an indent for the material description depending on the level of the hierarchy. When executing the report accept the same combination of hierarchy variable and hierarchy node variable again to see the change in your result. 1.

Change the query in your report so that all the elements below the selected hierarchy node are displayed. a)

Click on Data → Edit Query

b)

In the Result Objects area click the hierarchy member selector icon

c)

Check the Machines object Hint: Depending on the selected hierarchy node in the previous exercise step there might be a different level displayed.

d)

In the context menu of Machines choose

e)

Click OK twice to accept your changes and execute the report again.

f)

Accept the same combination of hierarchy and hierarchy node variable values again to see the change in your result by clicking OK

Descendants


272


2012

TBI30


2.

Define an indent for the material name so that the end user can see the hierarchical structure. a)

Choose Insert → Group

b)

Accept all default values and click Insert

c)

Change to the Structure View by clicking View → Show Structure

d)

Hide the Body and the Group Footer 1 section by using the Hide feature from the context menu

e)

Drag the Sales Volume EUR object from the Body into the Group Header 1 section.

f)

Reduce the height of the Group Header 1 section to avoid unused space in the report

g)

Click on the GroupName (Material) field and choose Format Group Name Element... from the context menu

h)

In the section Size and Location click on the Conditional Formula button to the X: field

i)

In the Formula Workshop screen type in the formula HierarchyLevel(GroupingLevel ({U00_QD_VAR002.Material\Material})) * 250 Hint: Instead of typing in {U00_QD_VAR002.Material\ Material} you can drag and drop the Material object from the Data Explorer into the formula.

j)

Click Save and Close.

k)

Click Close.

l)

Switch to the Page View by unchecking View → Show Structure


2012


273


3.

274

TBI30

Save your report to the BI Platform server and open it in the BI Launchpad a)

Choose File → Save

b)

Select Public Folders → BI Training -> User Area-> User ##

c)

Type in U## My CR for Enterprise report with BW variables (replace ## with your group number)

d)

Click Save

e)


f)

Enter the servername wdflbmt2268

g)


h)

Click the Documents Tab.

i)

Navigate to the Public Folder -> BI Training-> User Area -> User ## folder.

j)

Double-click U## My CR for Enterprise report with BW variables.


2012

TBI30


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create a report in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise with a SAP BEx query as a data source • Work with BEx query elements

2012


275

Unit Summary

TBI30

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Identify the two different versions of SAP Crystal Reports • Choose the right version for your reporting needs • Create a new report in SAP Crystal Reports 2011 on a relational database • Work with basic formatting options in SAP Crystal Reports 2011 • Use the SAP Toolbar to create a Crystal Report on with a SAP NetWeaver BW query • Understand how SAP NetWeaver BW metadata can be used in Crystal Reports • Work with hierarchies and variables in Crystal Reports • Create a Crystal report with database tables in a SAP system • Create a new report in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise on an universe • Work with basic formatting options in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise • Create a report in SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise with a SAP BEx query as a data source • Work with BEx query elements

276


2012

Unit 6 SAP BusinessObjects Analysis Unit Overview

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Classify the target groups as well as the main use cases where users can benefit from using Analysis Discuss the positioning of Analysis within the SAP portfolio. Explain the connectivity options to SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse and SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform. Explain basic functions of Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office – Excel client. Use BEx query elements in Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office – Excel client. Work with query components and formulas in Analysis for MS Excel. Save and distribute workbooks with Business Intelligence Platform. Explain basic functions of Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office – PowerPoint client Explain basic functions of SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP Create a workspace with Analysis, OLAP edition on a SAP BEx query Save and share workspaces with Business Intelligence platform Explain the connectivity with SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse and SAP BusinessObjects Analysis. Describe how objects used in SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse BEx queries are represented in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis.

Unit Contents Lesson: Introduction to Analysis ..............................................279 Lesson: Working with Analysis, Edition for Office – Excel Client .........287

2012


277

Unit 6: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis

TBI30

Exercise 12: Create a Simple Report with Analysis, Edition for MS Office on a BEx Query .....................................................295 Exercise 13: Creating an Enhanced Report with Analysis, Edition for MS Office ....................................................................301 Lesson: Working with Analysis, Edition for Office – PowerPoint Client..310 Lesson: Working with Analysis, Edition for OLAP ..........................314 Exercise 14: Create a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP ............................................................327 Lesson: Working with SAP BEx Query Elements in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis ..........................................................................333 Exercise 15: Using Hierarchies and Variables in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis ......................................................................341

278


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Introduction to Analysis

Lesson: Introduction to Analysis Lesson Overview This lesson provides you with an overview of Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office and Analysis, edition for OLAP.


Classify the target groups as well as the main use cases where users can benefit from using Analysis Discuss the positioning of Analysis within the SAP portfolio. Explain the connectivity options to SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse and SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform.

Business Example As a Business Analyst you need to find information in your organization's data by using OLAP operations like slice and dice or by performing drill downs to more detailed data. To perform deep OLAP analysis, you can use SAP BusinessObjects Analysis.

Use Cases and Target Groups for SAP BusinessObjects Analysis

Figure 104: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis – Two Sets of Functionality

2012


279


TBI30

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis is available in two sets of functionality: • •

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office allows you ad hoc multidimensional analysis of OLAP sources in Microsoft Excel, intuitive creation of BI presentations with Microsoft PowerPoint as well as Excel workbook-based application design. SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office is the premium alternative to SAP BEx Analyzer SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for OLAP is the premium web based OLAP analysis client for business analysts to run ad hoc OLAP analyses. The main use cases for SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office are: • • •

Perform advanced analysis of data residing in SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse directly within Microsoft Excel Build and deploy pervasive Excel-based applications with design flexibility and programmatic control of the workbooks Use Live PowerPoint presentations with embedded analysis - Present visuals with timely information directly and transparently refreshed from your SAP NetWeaver BW backend

The main use cases for SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP are: • •

280

Run ad hoc OLAP analyses, and create OLAP workspaces for private use or sharing with others. Analyze data from different data providers – for example, you can view sales data from a Microsoft Analysis Services cube on the same sheet as finance data from an SAP NetWeaver BW cube.


2012

TBI30


Target Groups of SAP BusinessObjects Analysis

Figure 105: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP

Figure 106: SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office

2012


281


TBI30

Target Groups for Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office Target Group

Use Cases

Power User / IT

•

• Business Analyst

•

• Business User

Centralized creation of Analysis content (workbooks & PowerPoint) Sophisticated workbook design (VBA APIs, and so on) Ad hoc data access and data analysis, slicing & dicing, and so on, in Excel Ad hoc embedding of BI data into PowerPoint presentations

Consuming predefined BI content in Microsoft Excel and Microsoft PowerPoint

Target Groups for Analysis, Edition for OLAP Target Group

Use Cases

Power User / IT

• •

Business Analyst

• •

Business User

• •

282


Creation of reusable Advanced Analysis workspaces Not necessarily an expert for sophisticated BI Application Design Ad hoc data access and data analysis, slicing & dicing Creation of Advanced Analysis workspaces for personal use Can use predefined Web workspaces Need to operate between Advanced Analysis and more BI consumer tools like Web Intelligence or Explorer

2012

TBI30


SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office Versus Analysis, Edition for OLAP SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office, is a set of add-ins for Microsoft Office (MS Office). It enables advanced multidimensional analyses of OLAP sources in Microsoft Excel, workbook-based BI application design, and the creation of interactive Microsoft PowerPoint presentations from OLAP sources. From a functionality perspective, the edition for Microsoft Office is a premium alternative to the Excel analyzer tool of the SAP BEx suite (SAP BEx Analyzer). SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP, is a Web-based advanced analysis client for business analysts to run advanced multidimensional analysis of OLAP sources, and create workspaces for private or shared use. From a functionality perspective, the Web edition replaces SAP BusinessObjects Voyager (Voyager) and is a premium alternative to the Web analyzer tool of the SAP Business Explorer suite (SAP BEx Web analyzer).

Connecting SAP BusinessObjects Analysis to SAP NetWeaver BW In the edition for Microsoft Office, you can use the following data sources: • • •

SAP BEx Queries SAP BEx query views SAP Netweaver BW InfoProvider

Figure 107: Analysis, Edition for MS Office – High Level Architecture

2012


283


TBI30

Figure 108: Analysis, Edition for MS Office - Data Connectivity

After you perform an analysis, you can use it in other SAP BusinessObjects applications. You can create, for example, an Analysis view in Analysis, edition for OLAP, and insert it in Analysis, edition for Office.

Managing Analysis Connections in Business Intelligence Platform

Figure 109: Using OLAP Connections in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis

284


2012

TBI30


You can connect directly to a SAP NetWeaver BW system or you can connect using a Business Intelligence platform (SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise or SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence) to include data sources. Typically, you use the Business Intelligence platform of SAP BusinessObjects to store and share workbooks in productive environments, but in test systems, you can also directly connect to a BW system. Using the Business Intelligence platform enables you to save workbooks and presentations with their navigation state in a central management system and to reuse these Analysis views in other applications such as SAP Crystal Reports or Analysis, OLAP edition. Connections to OLAP data sources can be configured and stored as OLAP Connections in the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform so that they can be made available to many users. Note: To connect to a BI 4.0 platform you must use Analysis 1.1 or a later version. Analysis 1.0 can connect to older versions of the BI platform such as SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.1.

2012


285


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Classify the target groups as well as the main use cases where users can benefit from using Analysis • Discuss the positioning of Analysis within the SAP portfolio. • Explain the connectivity options to SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse and SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform.

286


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Working with Analysis, Edition for Office – Excel Client

Lesson: Working with Analysis, Edition for Office – Excel Client Lesson Overview This lesson provides an overview of basic functions of SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for Microsoft Excel.


Explain basic functions of Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office – Excel client. Use BEx query elements in Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office – Excel client. Work with query components and formulas in Analysis for MS Excel. Save and distribute workbooks with Business Intelligence Platform.

Business Example Business analysts need to perform advanced analysis of data residing in SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse through an intuitive user interface directly within their familiar Microsoft Office environment.

2012


287


TBI30

Prerequisites for SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for Microsoft Office The following list outlines the prerequisites of the Analysis 1.1, office edition: •

MS Office 2003 or higher PowerPoint add-in is only available as of MS Office 2007 and higher.

• •

Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 Redistributable Package Primary Interop Assemblies for Microsoft Office Note: During installation the Analysis setup checks whether Microsoft .NET Framework 2.0 is installed on the PC. If not, it provides a link to download this software. The Analysis setup also checks whether Primary Interop Assemblies is installed. If not, the setup installs this component automatically.

•

SAP NetWeaver BW 7.0 or higher We recommend to use SAP NetWeaver 7.3 as there are significant TCO and integration improvements between SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform and SAP NetWeaver.

•

SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI 3.1 or higher Hint: For more information about client sizing and hard- and software requirements for Analysis, see SAP Note 1466118. Note: For productive usage of Analysis, we recommend to use the Business Intelligence platform of SAP BusinessObjects to store and share workbooks.

The following list describes the platform capabilities for SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 4.0: • • • • •

288

Support system-type connection Server-side and client-side Single-Sign-On Saving and sharing workbooks centrally (common xls(x) / ppt(x) InfoObject) Lifecycle Management Interoperability with other clients: Web Intelligence, SAP Crystal Reports, and SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP, based on Analysis View


2012

TBI30


Introduction and Using Basic Functions of Analysis, Edition for Office SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office, is a Microsoft Office add-in that allows multidimensional analysis of OLAP sources in Microsoft Excel, MS Excel workbook application design, and intuitive creation of BI presentations with MS PowerPoint. In the edition for Microsoft Office, you can use SAP BEx Queries, query views, and SAP Netweaver BW InfoProvider as data sources. The data is displayed in the workbook in crosstabs. You can insert multiple crosstabs in a workbook with data from different sources and systems. If the workbook will be used by different users, it is also helpful to add info fields with information on the data source and filter status. The most important navigation tool is the Design Panel. Using the design panel, you can analyze the data and change the view on the displayed data. You can add and remove dimensions and measures to be displayed easily with drag and drop. To avoid single refreshes after each step, you can pause the refresh to build a crosstab. After ending the pause, all changes are applied at once.

Figure 110: MS Excel add-in with Design Panel

2012


289


TBI30

The design panel offers the following views: •

Analysis The Analysis view allows navigation, filtering, changing order of characteristics or key figures, and so on.

•

Information The Information view shows general information on the embedded data source or the workbook itself (that is, last data refresh, created by, and so on). It also shows all relevant information (filters, variables, and so on) at one glance, in one place.

•

Components The Components view shows structural information either from the data source or the worksheet perspective. Here you can edit workbook properties.

The Analysis, edition for Office Excel Client offers some new features for the users like: • • • • • • • •

Define conditional formatting (formerly known as “exceptions”) Define filter by measure (formerly known as “conditions”) Define easy calculations and dynamic calculations Excel commentary on data cells New hierarchy features are introduced Collapse into hierarchical structures (“display hierarchy”) Show/hide hierarchy levels Sort breaking hierarchies

Using Advanced Functions and Interoperability with the Business Intelligence Platform In Microsoft Office edition, you can use SAP BEx queries, query views, and InfoProviders from SAP NetWeaver BW as data sources. Data is displayed in crosstabs in the workbook. You can insert more than one crosstab (with data from different sources and systems) into a workbook. In addition to crosstabs, you can add the following components to your analysis: • • •

290

Charts to provide a graphical presentation of the data in the crosstab. Info fields to provide metadata information. Filters to provide simplified filtering for users.


2012

TBI30


Insert a Dynamic Chart Dynamic charts provide a graphical representation of the data in a crosstab. These charts automatically update when data in the crosstab changes. Dynamic charts are added from the Insert component panel on the Analysis tab. The chart feature is available when any cell in the crosstab is selected. Hint: You can use static charts using standard Microsoft Excel functionality.

Defining Conditional Formatting You can highlight interesting data, emphasize unusual values, and visualize your data with colors based on criteria using the Conditional Formatting feature. You find this feature in the Analysis ribbon of the Analysis add-in. Conditional Formatting is similar to Exceptions in BEx Analyzer.

Working with Filter Elements in Workbooks You can insert a filter component to your analysis to simplify the filtering. This helps you to quickly change the view of the displayed data, for example to different periods of time. To insert a filter component, simply select an empty cell where you want to place the filter component, and choose Filter. then, select one of the listed dimensions to insert a filter component for this dimension. The dimension name and a filter component formula are inserted in the worksheet. The functions used for the formulas are SAPGetDimensionInfo and SAPSetFilterComponent. The formulas are created automatically. For example, if you want to filter sales division, the formula might look like SAPSetFilterComponent =SAPSetFilterComponent("D1"; "0DIVISION";"ALL”).

Working with Formulas in Workbooks In Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office, you can use the standard functions of Microsoft Excel to build formulas. The add-in also contains an own set of functions that you can use to build formulas. You can use these functions to include data and metadata of used data sources into your analysis. For example, you can insert information fields on data source properties, display the measure filter or list the variables of a data source. With the SAPGetData function, you can also define measure values for certain member combinations. A Microsoft Excel formula for Analysis consists of a function and references to the data source, measures and/or dimensions. You can use the text or the key of an object to use it as reference. You can also use a cell value like B10 as reference.

2012


291


TBI30

The formula alias of a data source is displayed and can be changed in the data source properties on the Components tab in the design panel. For measures, dimensions and their members text references are better to read, but if you want to create a multi-language enabled analysis or there are duplicate texts in the metadata of your data source, you should reference these objects with their keys. You can also use these functions in VBA macros. The following Analysis functions are available: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

SAPGetData SAPGetDimensionDynamicFilter SAPGetDimensionEffectiveFilte SAPGetDimensionInfo SAPGetDimensionStaticFilter SAPGetDisplayedMeasures SAPGetInfoLabel SAPGetMeasureFilter SAPGetMember SAPGetSourceInfo SAPGetVariable SAPGetWorkbookInfo SAPListOf SAPListOfDimensions SAPListOfEffectiveFilters SAPListOfMembers SAPListOfMessages SAPListOfVariables SAPSetFilterComponent

Using Style Sets You can influence the layout of your workbooks using style sets. A style set is a collection of Microsoft Excel cell styles that is applied by Analysis to format the cells of a crosstab. Whenever you insert a new crosstab in a workbook, the styles in the current default style set are used to format the crosstab cells. You can change the applied style set in your analysis. With Analysis, the following style sets and their cell styles are installed: • • •

292

SAP Tradeshow Plus SAP Blue SAP Black&White


2012

TBI30


By modifying the cell styles of these style sets, you can create your own style sets and share them with other users. SAP standard styles are available after the installation of the add-in. You can modify them in the Styles group on the Home tab of Microsoft Excel. In addition, you can create custom styles to affect the formatting of your crosstabs.

Defining the Layout in Workbooks Using Formula Mode In formula mode you can use various functions to modify the layout and to perform additional calculations. • • • • •

• •

You can highlight cells by formatting the font and background color. You can insert spaces to make the display easier to read. You can copy parts of the table or individual cells to another position in the workbook to compare particular values. You can reuse cells. You can overwrite a member with another one, or add one to call data that you need from the BI server. If member 3.2007 is used to read the sales revenue for March 2007, for example, you can replace the 3 with a 4, thus using member 4.2007 to obtain the sales revenue for April 2007, provided that the data provider contains this data. You can also calculate additional subtotals. You can create offers based on data from various data providers. Note: Converting to formula mode has the following consequences: • •

Navigating using Drag & Drop is no longer possible. The context menu is not available.

Using Analysis in Other BusinessObjects Client Tools After you perform an analysis, you may want to use other SAP BusinessObjects client tools to communicate your findings and share the analysis. To use an analysis in other applications, you save it as an Analysis view. An Analysis view is a saved navigation state of an analysis, that includes applied filters, hierarchies, and available metadata. Analysis views can be saved with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office, and with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP. They can be inserted in both editions of SAP BusinessObjects Analysis. Like workbooks, Analysis views are saved to the Business Intelligence platform server. While a workbook can comprise several analysis, an analysis view comprises only one analysis.

2012


293


TBI30

Figure 111: Interoperability Between Analysis and Other Client Tools

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis can create and consume the Analysis View. Other client tools such as Web Intelligence or SAP Crystal Reports are able to consume it. Each tool interprets the Analysis View in a way that is consistent with its native environment. Note: To save an Analysis view, you have to be connected to a SAP BusinessObjects BI platform.

294


2012

TBI30


Exercise 12: Create a Simple Report with Analysis, Edition for MS Office on a BEx Query Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Use the basic functions of the SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for MS Office.

Business Example As an Analyst you want to learn how to use BEx query elements in Analysis, edition for MS Office. You have to create a report on a BEx query to analyze your BW data.

Task: Create a report with Analysis for Microsoft Excel on the BEx query Analysis of Sales and navigate within the report. Connection Information Field Name


System

RWB

Client

800

User

user##

Password

Assigned password

1.

Start the Analysis for Microsoft Excel client and insert the Query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] as table starting in cell A1.

2.

Add Sales Organization to the drilldown in the rows and change the order of both elements afterwards.

3.

Change the order of the measures.

4.

Perform multiple changes to the result without the need to refresh after each action.

5.

Remove Division from the drilldown and perform the following filter settings for Sales Organization:


2012


295


TBI30

Step

Field

Filter settings

1.

Sales Organization

Display Germany Frankfurt, France, Paris and USA Denver

2.

Sales Organization

All except Italy, Milan

3.

Sales Organization

Display All again.

6.

Display the attributes Company Code and Statist. curr. for Sales Organization.

7.

Sort Sales Organization in ascending order by text.

8.

You want to display a hierarchy for Material and try the Break Hierarchy feature.

9.

Save your workbook in the BI platform. Connection Information

296

Field Name


System

wdflbmt2268

User

user##

Password

Assigned password

Authentication

SAP


2012

TBI30


Solution 12: Create a Simple Report with Analysis, Edition for MS Office on a BEx Query Task: Create a report with Analysis for Microsoft Excel on the BEx query Analysis of Sales and navigate within the report. Connection Information Field Name


System

RWB

Client

800

User

user##

Password

Assigned password

1.

Start the Analysis for Microsoft Excel client and insert the Query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] as table starting in cell A1. a)

Click Start → Programs → SAP BusinessObjects → Analysis for Microsoft Excel.

b)

Make sure that cell A1 is selected.

c)

In the Analysis tab click Insert → Select Data Source....

d)

Choose Skip in the upcoming logon screen Note: In this case we do not want to connect to the BI platform, but connect directly to a BEx query.

2.

e)

Select your Training System, click Next, and enter your user credentials

f)

Use the Search tab to find the query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

g)

Click OK.

Add Sales Organization to the drilldown in the rows and change the order of both elements afterwards. a)

Drag Sales Organization from the Field Explorer into the Rows area.

b)

To change the order of the elements in the Rows area, drag Division below Sales Organization. Continued on next page

2012


297


3.

4.

TBI30

Change the order of the measures. a)

In the Columns area, expand the Measures node.

b)

Use drag and drop to change the order of the measures.

Perform multiple changes to the result without the need to refresh after each action. a)

Click Pause Refresh.

b)

Change the order of the measures again. Notice that the result area does not change.

c)

Change the order of Division and Sales Organization. Notice again that the result area does not change.

d)

Click Pause Refresh again. Now all the changes are shown in the result area.

5.

Remove Division from the drilldown and perform the following filter settings for Sales Organization: Step

Field

Filter settings

1.

Sales Organization

Display Germany Frankfurt, France, Paris and USA Denver

2.

Sales Organization

All except Italy, Milan

3.

Sales Organization

Display All again.

a)

Drag Division from the Rows into the Field Explorer area.

b)

Use the context menu option Filter By Member... to open the member selector. Use the check boxes to select the Sales Organizations Germany Frankfurt, France, Paris and USA Denver and view your result.

c)

Repeat the previous step to perform the other filter settings described in the above table.


298


2012

TBI30


6.

7.

8.

Display the attributes Company Code and Statist. curr. for Sales Organization. a)

In the Design Panel expand the node Sales Organization, and then expand the Attributes node

b)

Select the attributes Company Code and Statist. curr. and drag them to the Rows area

c)

View your results.

Sort Sales Organization in ascending order by text. a)

In the result area, click the cell where you find the text Sales Organization.

b)

In the Analysis ribbon, click Sort → More Sort Options....

c)

Select Sort Ascending.

d)

In the Sort by list, select Member Display Type.

e)

In the Display list, select Text.

f)

Click OK.

You want to display a hierarchy for Material and try the Break Hierarchy feature. a)

Replace Sales Organization in the Rows with Product Hierarchy for Material MARA.

b)

Use the Filter By Member function to filter to the hierarchy nodes Machines and Vehicles.

c)

Click in cell A2 and choose Hierarchy → Expand to Level → Level 4.

d)

Right-click Sales Volume EUR and select Sort → Descending. Notice that each hierarchy node is sorted.

e)

Select a cell from the measure Sales Volume EUR column, then click Sort → More Sort Options...

f)

Choose Sort Descending → Break Hierarchies. Note that the data is sorted across the hierarchical boundaries.

9.

Save your workbook in the BI platform.


2012


299


TBI30

Connection Information

300

Field Name


System

wdflbmt2268

User

user##

Password

Assigned password

Authentication

SAP

a)

Click the Office Button and choose Save Workbook.

b)

Enter your credentials.

c)

In the Save Document window, navigate to BI Training → User Area → User ##.

d)

Enter U## Workbook 1 in the Name field and click Save.

e)

Close Microsoft Excel.


2012

TBI30


Exercise 13: Creating an Enhanced Report with Analysis, Edition for MS Office Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Work with query components and formulas in Analysis, edition for MS Office. • Save and distribute workbooks with SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform.

Business Example As an analyst you want to learn some features to enhance your report in Analysis, edition for MS Office. Use the Excel client to create some more advanced workbooks.

Task 1: Create a new report on top of a BEx query and add a chart to the workbook. Create a new report on top of the BEx query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] and add a chart to the workbook. 1.

Start the Analysis for Excel client and insert the query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION]. Connection Information Field Name


System

RWB

Client

800

User

user##

Password

Assigned password

2.

Remove Incoming Orders from the drilldown.

3.

Visualize your data with a pie chart.

4.

Navigate within the data to see changes in the chart.

5.

Save your workbook on your local drive with the name U## Workbook with Chart Continued on next page

2012


301


TBI30

Task 2: Enhance the layout of a workbook using formulas and adding additional information. Enhance the layout of a workbook using formulas and adding additional information. 1.

Create a new workbook with the query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] .

2.

Move the result table so that it starts in cell D1.

3.

Prepare the Excel sheet with some additional text information. Add the Data Source Name in cell A1 and B1.

4.

Add the InfoProviderName in cell A2 and B2. Type in the needed formulas manually. Check the previous used formulas to understand the technique behind the syntax and use InfoProviderName instead of DataSourceName.

5.

You now want to add a filter element in cell A4 and B4 that allows the users to select the month they want to see. Use the filter element to filter on all months in 2004 and 2005.

6.

Months are often selected as ranges so the selection of single values is not very handy. Change the existing filter element (in cells A4 and B4) to select a start month and create a second filter element (in cells A5 and B5) to select an end month.

7.

Check your defined formulas for the start month and end month. Filter on all months in 2004 and 2005 again.

8.

Save your workbook and distribute it in the Business Intelligence platform.

Task 3: Optional: Create a new workbook on a BEx query and work with Conditional Formatting Optional: Create a new workbook with the query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] and work with Conditional Formatting

302

1.

Start the Analysis for Excel client and insert the query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

2.

Add Country to the drilldown above Division.

3.

Define a Conditional Formatting setting to highlight the values of Sales Volume EUR that are greater than 1.000.000 in green.

4.

Edit the Conditional Formatting setting. The setting should only be valid for Germany and should not include the result of the Division.

5.

Save your workbook on your local drive with the name U## Workbook Conditional Formatting.


2012

TBI30


Solution 13: Creating an Enhanced Report with Analysis, Edition for MS Office Task 1: Create a new report on top of a BEx query and add a chart to the workbook. Create a new report on top of the BEx query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] and add a chart to the workbook. 1.

Start the Analysis for Excel client and insert the query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION]. Connection Information

2.

Field Name


System

RWB

Client

800

User

user##

Password

Assigned password

a)


b)

In the Analysis ribbon, select Insert → Select Data Source.

c)

Choose Skip in the upcoming logon screen

d)


e)

Use the Search tabstrip to find the query Analysis of Division

f)

Click OK

Remove Incoming Orders from the drilldown. a)

3.

In the Design Panel, expand the node Measures and drag Incoming Orders into the Field Explorer to remove it from the result list.

Visualize your data with a pie chart. a)

In the Analysis ribbon, click Insert Chart.

b)

Drag the chart below the table.

c)

Right-click the chart and select Change Chart Type.

d)

Select Pie on the left side of the window and click OK. Continued on next page

2012


303


4.

Navigate within the data to see changes in the chart. a)

5.

TBI30

Exchange Division with Country.

Save your workbook on your local drive with the name U## Workbook with Chart a)

Click the Office button and choose Save As → Excel Workbook..

b)

Select My Documents and enter the file name U## Workbook with Chart

Task 2: Enhance the layout of a workbook using formulas and adding additional information. Enhance the layout of a workbook using formulas and adding additional information. 1.

2.

Create a new workbook with the query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] . a)


b)


c)


d)


e)


f)

Click OK

Move the result table so that it starts in cell D1. a)

Choose the Components tab in the Design Panel

b)

Expand the Analysis of Division node.

c)

Right-click Crosstab 1 and select Move To.

d)

In the Move to dialog, change the existing location. Enter Sheet1!$D$1.

e)

Click OK.


304


2012

TBI30


3.

Prepare the Excel sheet with some additional text information. Add the Data Source Name in cell A1 and B1. a)

Choose the Information tab in the Design Panel.

b)

The Data Source Name is the first entry in the Information view. Simply drag the information into cell A1.

c)

Cell A1 now contains the formula: =SAPGetInfoLabel(“DataSourceName”)

d)

Cell B1 now contains the formula: =SAPGetSourceInfo(“DS_1”,“DataSourceName”)

4.

Add the InfoProviderName in cell A2 and B2. Type in the needed formulas manually. Check the previous used formulas to understand the technique behind the syntax and use InfoProviderName instead of DataSourceName. a)

Click cell A2 and enter the following formula: =SAPGetInfoLabel(“InfoProviderName”).

b)

Click cell B2 and enter the following formula: =SAPGetSourceInfo(“DS_1”,“InfoProviderName”).

5.

You now want to add a filter element in cell A4 and B4 that allows the users to select the month they want to see. Use the filter element to filter on all months in 2004 and 2005. a)

Click in cell A4 and click the Filter button. Select Cal. year/month

b)

Check the formulas that have been created in the cells A4 and B4

c)

Click in cell B4 and use the Filter icon at the end of the cell to select only the months in 2004 and 2005. (Hint: Uncheck the Select All option first.)

d)

Choose the Information tab in the Design Panel. Here you can see the active filter.


2012


305


6.

7.

8.

TBI30

Months are often selected as ranges so the selection of single values is not very handy. Change the existing filter element (in cells A4 and B4) to select a start month and create a second filter element (in cells A5 and B5) to select an end month. a)

Remove the existing filter for 2004 and 2005 by clicking Select All in the existing filter element.

b)

Change the text in cell A4 to Start Month.

c)

Click cell B4 to change the formula. You can use the Excel Insert Function (fx) button and enter “LOWERBOUNDARY” as Selection Type. Or you can edit the formula directly so that it looks like that: =SAPSetFilterComponent(“DS_1”, “0CALMONTH”, “ALL”, “LOWERBOUNDARY”)

d)

To create the second filter, element simply select the cells A4 and B4 and copy the content to A5 and B5.

e)

Change the text in cell A5 to End Month

f)

Click cell B5 to change the formula. You can use the Excel Insert Function (fx) button and enter “UPPERBOUNDARY” as Selection Type. Or you can edit the formula directly so that it looks like that: =SAPSetFilterComponent(“DS_1”, “0CALMONTH”, “ALL”, “UPPERBOUNDARY”)

Check your defined formulas for the start month and end month. Filter on all months in 2004 and 2005 again. a)

Use the Filter icon next to Start Month and select 01.2004.

b)

Use the Filter icon next to End Month and select 12.2005.

Save your workbook and distribute it in the Business Intelligence platform. a)

Click the Office button and select Save Workbook.

b)

In the Save Documents dialog, navigate to BI Training → User Area → User ##.

c)

Enter U## Workbook with Formulas in the Name field and click Save.


306


2012

TBI30


Task 3: Optional: Create a new workbook on a BEx query and work with Conditional Formatting Optional: Create a new workbook with the query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] and work with Conditional Formatting 1.

2.

Start the Analysis for Excel client and insert the query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION]. a)


b)


c)


d)


e)


f)

Click OK.

Add Country to the drilldown above Division. a)

3.

Drag Country from the Field Explorer into the Rows area. Place it above Division.

Define a Conditional Formatting setting to highlight the values of Sales Volume EUR that are greater than 1.000.000 in green. a)

Choose Conditional Formatting → New....

b)

In the Name field, enter High Sales Volume Germany .

c)

Select Sales Volume and choose Value as Format.

d)

Choose the Definition tab. Choose a green color, select Greater Than and enter the value 1000000.

e)

Click Add.

f)

Check the result by clicking OK. You will notice that all countries and the results are affected by the Conditional Formatting.


2012


307


4.

TBI30

Edit the Conditional Formatting setting. The setting should only be valid for Germany and should not include the result of the Division. a)

Click Conditional Formatting → High Sales Volume Germany → Edit....

b)

Choose the Selection tab and scroll down to Country.

c)

Select Members from the dropdown list.

d)

Click the icon at the end of the row and select Germany and click OK.

e)

Scroll down to Division and select Members from the dropdown list. Hint: If you do not change this setting, the result for all Divisions in Germany will be colored as well.

f) 5.

308

Click OK.

Save your workbook on your local drive with the name U## Workbook Conditional Formatting. a)

Click the Office button and choose Save As → Excel Workbook..

b)

Select My Documents and enter the file name U## Workbook Conditional Formatting.

c)

Click Save.


2012

TBI30


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain basic functions of Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office – Excel client. • Use BEx query elements in Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office – Excel client. • Work with query components and formulas in Analysis for MS Excel. • Save and distribute workbooks with Business Intelligence Platform.

2012


309


TBI30

Lesson: Working with Analysis, Edition for Office – PowerPoint Client Lesson Overview This lesson provides an overview of basic functions of SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for Microsoft PowerPoint.


Explain basic functions of Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office – PowerPoint client

Business Example Reports that have been created with the Analysis Excel client have to be presented to the board members of your company in a PowerPoint presentation.

Working with Analysis for Microsoft PowerPoint

Figure 112: PowerPoint is a Subset of the Excel Functionality

310


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Working with Analysis, Edition for Office – PowerPoint Client

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for PowerPoint is not intended for analysis work, but rather sharing of analysis work done in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for Excel. Therefore, some functionality is restricted or not existent: • • •

There is no display panel Functions associated strictly with analysis of a crosstab, such as calculations and axes swapping are not available Filtering is reduced in scope

Figure 113: Fit Table

An important feature that you should be aware of is used when you add data to a PowerPoint slide. When the data does not fit to a slide you have to choose either to split or to abbreviate the table. The following table explains the difference.

2012


311


TBI30

Figure 114: Splitting vs. Abbreviating Tables

PowerPoint is capable of displaying only 15 rows in a table, forcing you to split longer tables across multiple slides, or trim them to fit within one slide. Choosing Split Table across multiple slides splits the table across multiple slides, each having at most N rows, where N is the value chosen in the dialog. The tables are not split evenly. If there are 42 rows in the info object and it is split at every 15 lines, three slides will be created: two with 15 rows and one with 12 rows. After each data refresh, if the number of total rows in the info object changes, slides are automatically created or deleted as needed. If the number of lines per slide changes by the user, slides will be deleted or created as needed. Choosing Abbreviate Table on this slide truncates the data from the info object at row N, where N is chosen by the user in the dialog. ‘…’ will be displayed, indicating to the user that the display has been abbreviated, but there is more. The remaining rows in the info object are not lost, but merely hidden. E.g. changing the sort criterion will change which rows are displayed if it changes which rows are displayed in the first N rows.

312


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Working with Analysis, Edition for Office – PowerPoint Client

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain basic functions of Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office – PowerPoint client

2012


313


TBI30

Lesson: Working with Analysis, Edition for OLAP Lesson Overview This lesson provides an overview of basic functions of SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP.


Explain basic functions of SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP Create a workspace with Analysis, OLAP edition on a SAP BEx query Save and share workspaces with Business Intelligence platform

Business Example You want to provide an advanced analysis tool for OLAP data that can be opened within the browser of the client computers in your organization.

Introduction and Using Basic Functions of Analysis, Edition for OLAP SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP is a powerful, web-based OLAP analysis tool that can help you to gain insight into business data and make intelligent decisions that impact corporate performance. OLAP data is displayed in the analysis window with crosstabs and charts. You create a workspace, add crosstab and chart objects to the analysis window, connect those objects to OLAP data sources, and then interactively define analyses to explore your data.

314


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Working with Analysis, Edition for OLAP

Prerequisites for SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP The following list outlines the prerequisites of the Analysis, edition for OLAP: • • •

Browser: MS Internet Explorer 7 and 8, Firefox 3.5, Adobe Acrobat 8 and 9, and Safari 4 for Apple Mac SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 4.0 – LCM, authentication, repository services For SAP BW connectivity: SAP NetWeaver BW 7.0 SP 23 or higher or SAP NetWeaver BW 7.0 EHP1 SP5 or higher Note: Recommendation: UseSAP NetWeaver BW 7.3 as there are significant TCO and integration improvements between BI platform and NetWeaver

•

For MSAS connectivity: MS Analysis Services 2005 SP1 and SP2; Microsoft Analysis Services 2008

Explaining Basic Functions of Analysis, Edition for OLAP Analysis for OLAP is intuitive and easy to use, while providing unique analysis capabilities, including the ability to simultaneously view data from different cubes and providers. For example, you can view sales data from a Microsoft Analysis Services cube on the same sheet as finance data from an SAP BW cube. Analysis, OLAP edition is accessed from the SAP BusinessObjects BI launch pad in a web browser. All you need is a connection to an SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence system that has Analysis, edition for OLAP installed. You do not need to install Analysis, OLAP edition on your local machine.

2012


315


TBI30

Figure 115: SAP Business Objects Analysis, edition for OLAP offers some new features for users:

• • • •

Define conditional formatting Define filter by measure Define simple and dynamic calculations Create custom calculations

Before you start working with Analysis, edition for OLAP, it would be useful to understand some basic OLAP and Analysis terminology. The following graphic illustrates the Analysis for OLAP user interface and a typical analysis:

Figure 116: Working with Analysis for OLAP – User Interface

The following table outlines some Analysis terms: Term Cube

Dimension

316

Description A multidimensional or OLAP database in which data is summarized, consolidated, and stored in dimensions, each representing information such as customer, or product line. A collection of hierarchies, or a collection of measures.


2012

TBI30


Hierarchy

A collection of related data members, usually organized in a hierarchical structure. For example, in a Geography hierarchy, countries would comprise one level in the hierarchy, and cities would comprise a lower level.

Member

A base unit of data, representing an entity in a multidimensional OLAP database. For example, in a Geography hierarchy, some members could be Antarctica, Stockholm, and Tibet. A member in a hierarchy can have parent and child members. Sweden would be the parent member of Stockholm. Members are represented in a crosstab by columns and rows, and in a chart by pie slices, risers, lines, or other visualizations.

Measures dimension

Fact dimension

Workspace Analysis

Analysis view

Data source

Analysis window

2012

A dimension that represents the actual data; that is, the numbers. For example, a measures dimension could contain measures such as Sales, Cost, and Profit. A dimension that represents a characteristic of the data and not the data itself. For example, Customers or Products could be fact dimensions. An Analysis data-analysis document. A specific subset of OLAP data. May contain hierarchies, measures, and filters, as well as visual highlighting and user-defined calculations. A saved navigation state of an analysis. The saved information includes applied filters, hierarchies, and available metadata. An analysis view can be shared among applications such as SAP BusinessObjects Analysis (both the Web edition and the edition for Microsoft Office), SAP Crystal Reports, and SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence. An OLAP cube or query. Typically, data sources are located on remote servers. When you add a data source to your workspace, your workspace can access the data within that cube or query. The main Analysis window, containing your crosstab and chart components.


317


Crosstab component Chart component Task panel

A two-dimensional table object that you add to the analysis window to begin analyzing your data. A bar, line, or other type of chart object that you add to the analysis window to visualize your data. The panel at the left side of the Analysis screen, containing the Data, Properties, and Outline panels. The task panel also displays task-specific panels such as the Calculation, Filter, and Conditional Formatting panels. The task panel can be hidden to maximize the analysis window size, and automatically appears when required; for example, when adding a calculation. The Data panel is used to add or remove data sources from the analysis. It also contains the metadata explorer, which you use to perform navigation functions such as adding a hierarchy to the rows or columns, adding a background filter (sometimes called a “slice”), or adding a favorite grouping. The Properties panel displays configurable properties for the selected component; for example, column width, or chart style. The Outline panel provides an overview of the current workspace, which can be useful when the workspace contains many sheets. It can also be used to quickly switch to another analysis in the workspace, and to remove any superfluous analyses.

Metadata explorer

Layout panel

318

TBI30

The area within the Data panel that displays the metadata (measures, dimensions, and hierarchies) contained in a data source. The panel to the left of the analysis window, containing the definition of the selected analysis. You can drag hierarchies and measures into the Layout panel. You can also perform navigational operations on the hierarchies and measures in the Layout panel, including filtering, reordering, and swapping objects. The Layout panel duplicates functionality that is available on the crosstab or chart, but the Layout panel also indicates the members that are part of the background filter. The Layout panel can be hidden to maximize the analysis window size.


2012

TBI30


Background filter

A computer monitor can display only two spatial dimensions, but in Analysis, you can work with many data dimensions simultaneously. You place the dimensions and hierarchies that you want to actively analyze on the rows and columns of a crosstab, but you can also narrow the scope of your analysis by selecting members of other hierarchies to filter the crosstab data. These unseen hierarchies represent background filters. For example, if your data cube contains the three hierarchies Product, Market, and Year, and you want to analyze how your products performed in all markets, but only in the year 2010, you could use the Year hierarchy as a background filter, selecting only the 2010 member from the Year hierarchy. Then only the Product and Market hierarchies would be shown on the crosstab's view axes for analysis.

Header, or member header

The first cell of a member row or column in a crosstab. The member header contains the member text or key.

Axis

Any of the spatial axes on an Analysis crosstab or chart component. For example, a crosstab appears as a two-dimensional table, similar to an Excel spreadsheet. The crosstab has two “view” axes, similar to Excel's vertical and horizontal axes. The two view axes are called the row axis and column axis.

Sheet

Any of the screen pages of an Analysis workspace. New workspaces contain three sheets, but a workspace can contain any number of sheets. An analysis can be added to any sheet, and an existing analysis can be moved from one sheet to another. New sheets can be added, and sheets can be renamed or deleted. Sheets are useful for categorizing analyses. For example, the first sheet could contain four summary charts, with other sheets containing details of each analysis.

Creating an Analysis Workspace from BI Launch Pad You access Analysis, edition for OLAP from within BI launch pad. When starting Analysis for OLAP, the Open Data Source dialog appears automatically. It shows all data sources available for you to access data. A data source is a repository object created by the system administrator, that contains all the information that is required for Analysis to connect to an OLAP server.

2012


319


TBI30

The following data sources are available: •

Cube The data source object points directly to a single OLAP cube on the OLAP server.

•

Query The data source object points directly to a single OLAP query on the OLAP server.

•

System If you select a system, you see the cubes and queries available from that system.

You can add a single data source if you need to analyze data from just one database, or you can add several data sources, and use a different data source with each analysis in your workspace. However, once you have begun to design your analysis, the analysis and its crosstab and chart components are fixed to the data source. You cannot add metadata from one data source to an analysis that already contains metadata from another data source. Once you have connected to a data source, your next step is to define an analysis, and begin working with your data in the analysis window. An analysis is a specific subset of data from the OLAP cube. You create an analysis by adding OLAP data to the crosstab, and then manipulating the data; for example, by sorting and filtering.

Working with Crosstabs The crosstab component is a grid, similar to a spreadsheet, that displays data from a cube. You will usually perform most of your data-analysis tasks using crosstabs. For example, you can sort data in a crosstab, add calculations, add conditional formatting, and filter out data that is irrelevant to your analysis.

320


2012

TBI30


The crosstab comprises three axes, although only two can be displayed on the screen: • • •

Row axis: the vertical axis that displays rows of data. Column axis: the horizontal axis that displays columns of data. Background filter axis, or slice axis: the axis that is perpendicular to the two-dimensional crosstab display. Hierarchies that are placed on the row axis are called row hierarchies. Similarly, you also use column hierarchies and background filter hierarchies in your analyses. With row and column hierarchies, you can see several members simultaneously on the crosstab. With the background filter hierarchy however, you fix a slice of the data in the crosstab at any one time. The member you select in the background filter hierarchy is called the background filter member or slice member. For example, if Week is a background filter hierarchy, you can select any week as the background filter member. With some OLAP providers, for example SAP BW and Microsoft Analysis Services, you can select multiple members of a hierarchy as a background filter. However, you cannot select multiple members of a measures dimension as a background filter. You can also display more than one dimension or hierarchy on a row or column axis; for example, you can place both a Measures dimension and a Years hierarchy on the same axis to show data from the Measures dimension over several years. This is called “nesting hierarchies”.

Working with Charts You can add charts to your workspaces to present your data graphically. Charts can often emphasize irregularities or trends in your data, and help you focus your business analysis on those areas. Chart and crosstab components are linked to analyses. A common analysis scenario is to first create a crosstab component, and then add a chart component as a sub-analysis, linked to the main analysis. Both components display the same data, and both components update simultaneously whenever you make changes to either component. This interaction allows you to repeatedly define and refine your analyses, and see the graphical results of your changes in real time. You can also unlink, or disconnect, a chart sub-analysis from its current analysis, converting it to a new, separate analysis. Charts can be easily customized. You can change the chart type, or change the appearance of the chart to increase clarity. You can also expand data in the chart to examine the data in more detail. Swapping the chart axes can sometimes improve the presentation as well.

2012


321


TBI30

Create Sub-Analysis When you analyze data, typically a crosstab component is the main focus of your analysis. Other components, for example a chart, support your analysis, helping to visualize the data in a different form. Additional crosstab components can also support your analysis, allowing you to focus on specific areas of your analysis while your original crosstab presents a broad view of the data. These supporting components represent “sub-analyses”. When you add sub-analyses, they are linked to a main analysis. For example, if you add a chart sub-analysis, the chart represents the same data as the main analysis. Changes that you make to the main analysis are reflected in the chart. Therefore, if you remove members from an analysis, those same members are automatically removed from the chart sub-analysis. Changes that you make to the sub-analysis though, are not reflected in the main analysis. For example, if you swap the rows and columns in a sub-analysis, the rows and columns in the main analysis do not change.

Using Advanced Functions and Interoperability with the Business Intelligence Platform In Analysis you will often want to enhance your Analysis workspace by using filters, adding calculations or do some conditional formatting.

Using Filters In Analysis, you will often want to narrow the scope of your analysis to focus on important data, by including in your crosstabs and charts only those members that are relevant to your analysis. This action is called filtering.

322


2012

TBI30


Figure 117: Filtering by Member

You can filter members by manually selecting and deselecting them from a list. This is called filtering by member. Or, you can filter members by specifying filter conditions; for example by specifying a condition such as “Greater than 1000”. This is called filtering by measure.

Adding Calculations Crosstabs that contain raw multidimensional data are not always easy to read or understand. The data may hide trends, which can be revealed only when new information is derived from it. Calculations provide a way to reveal these trends. You can add multiple calculations, to enhance your analysis further or to highlight different aspects of the data. When you add a calculation to your analysis, the calculation is added as an additional member. The calculation also behaves like a member; for example, you can filter or apply conditional formatting to all types of calculated members, except for dynamic calculations.

2012


323


TBI30

The following calculation types are available: •

Simple calculations Simple calculations are calculations involving two or more members and one of the four basic arithmetical operators: Add, Subtract, Multiply, and Divide. Simple calculations can involve just two members and an operator; for example Product Price – Product Cost, but you can also add multiple members; for example Price * Sales Tax * Quantity. If you select more than two members or measures, only the addition and multiplication calculations are enabled.

•

Custom calculations Custom calculations are calculations that you define by creating formulas in the Calculation panel. Custom calculations can be as simple as an addition of two members, or can be a complex combination of functions and members.

•

Dynamic calculation Dynamic calculations are a special type of calculation that recalculates when the data changes in its associated members. For example, if you add a “Rank Number” calculation, members are assigned a numerical rank. If you then remove the member ranked 3rd, the member that was previously ranked 4th is now ranked 3rd. Note: Dynamic calculations can be initially applied only to visible measures on an axis. However, removing the measure from the axis does not remove the dynamic calculation.

Defining Conditional Formatting You can apply formatting to the cells in a crosstab to highlight important differences or unexpected results. For example, you might want to add background colors to cells that are greater than or less than a particular value.

Saving and Sharing Workspaces If you want to share your Analysis workspaces over the web with other analysts and users, you have the following possibilities: • • • •

Save a workspace to a public folder in the SAP BusinessObjects BI platform repository Send a workspace to another user Export a workspace to Excel Export a workspace to a PDF file for printing.

Using Analysis in Other BusinessObjects Client Tools After you perform an analysis, you may want to use other SAP BusinessObjects client tools to communicate your findings and share the analysis.

324


2012

TBI30


To use an analysis in other applications, you save it as an Analysis view. An Analysis view is a saved navigation state of an analysis, that includes applied filters, hierarchies, and available metadata. Analysis views can be saved with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office, and with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP. They can be inserted in both editions of SAP BusinessObjects Analysis. Like workbooks, Analysis views are saved to the Business Intelligence platform server. While a workbook can comprise several analysis, an analysis view comprises only one analysis.

Figure 118: Interoperability between Analysis and Other Client Tools

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis can create and consume the Analysis View. Other client tools such as Web Intelligence or SAP Crystal Reports are able to consume it. Each tool interprets the Analysis View in a way that is consistent with its native environment. Note: To save an Analysis view, you have to be connected to a SAP BusinessObjects BI platform.

2012


325


326


TBI30

2012

TBI30


Exercise 14: Create a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Use the basic functions of the SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP

Business Example As an Analyst you want to learn how to use BEx query elements in Analysis, edition for OLAP. You have to create a workspace on a BEx query to analyze your BW data.

Task 1: Create a workspace on top of a BEx query Create a new workspace on top of the BEx query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] and add a pie chart to your workspace. 1.

Start the Analysis edition for OLAP application.

2.

Remove Incoming Orders from the Analysis area.

3.

Change Division with Country.

4.

Add a sub-analysis and visualize the data with a pie chart.

5.

Remove all Nulls and Zeros of the analysis.

6.

Further changes that you make to the crosstab should not be reflected in the pie chart. Unlink the sub-analysis so that it is temporarily frozen in its current state.

7.

Add Sold to party to the main analysis.

8.

Save the Analysis Workspace in your Favorites.

Task 2: Create an enhanced workspace on top of a BEx query Create a new workspace on top of the BEx query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] and enhance the layout of the represented data using filters, calculations and conditional formatting. 1.

Start the Analysis edition for OLAP application.


2012


327


2.

Add a dynamic calculation to see the percentage contribution of each division to the overall sum of all divisions.

3.

Remove the Overall result.

4.

Define a filter so that only data for Germany is displayed.

5.

Define a Conditional Formatting to highlight the values of Sales Volume. Define the rules as described in the table:

6.

328

TBI30

Red

Less Than

5.000.000

Yellow

Between

5.000.000 and 10.000.000

Green

Greater Than

10.000.000



2012

TBI30


Solution 14: Create a Workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, Edition for OLAP Task 1: Create a workspace on top of a BEx query Create a new workspace on top of the BEx query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] and add a pie chart to your workspace. 1.

2.

3.

4.

Start the Analysis edition for OLAP application. a)

Launch BI Launch Pad and log on with your credentials.

b)

Choose Applications → Analysis edition for OLAP.

c)

In the Open Data Source dialog, select RWB System Connection.

d)

Click Next.

e)

Click the Search tab and search for the query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

f)

Click OK.

Remove Incoming Orders from the Analysis area. a)

Right-click Key Figures in the Layout Panel and choose Filter → By member.

b)

Deselect Incoming Orders and click OK.

Change Division with Country. a)

In the Metadata Explorer, click Country and drag it to the Rows area.

b)

Remove Division from the Rows area by dragging it back to the Metadata Explorer.

Add a sub-analysis and visualize the data with a pie chart. a)

5.

6.

Click Insert → Insert a pie chart.

Remove all Nulls and Zeros of the analysis. a)

In the Analysis area, click the crosstab.

b)

Click Display → Nulls & Zeros → Hide all.

Further changes that you make to the crosstab should not be reflected in the pie chart. Unlink the sub-analysis so that it is temporarily frozen in its current state. a)

Click in the Sub-Analysis area with the pie chart and choose Display → Unlink sub-analysis. Continued on next page

2012


329


7.

8.

TBI30

Add Sold to party to the main analysis. a)

Click in the Analysis area with your crosstab.

b)

Drag Sold to party in the Layout panel below Country.

c)

Make sure that the change only is reflected in the crosstab.

Save the Analysis Workspace in your Favorites. a)

Click Save → Save As....

b)

Enter the Filename U## Workspace 1 and click Save.

Task 2: Create an enhanced workspace on top of a BEx query Create a new workspace on top of the BEx query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION] and enhance the layout of the represented data using filters, calculations and conditional formatting. 1.

2.

3.

Start the Analysis edition for OLAP application. a)

Launch BI Launch Pad and log on with your credentials.

b)


c)


d)

Click Next.

e)

Click the Search tab and search for the query Analysis of Division [P_ANALYSISOFDIVISION].

f)

Click OK.

Add a dynamic calculation to see the percentage contribution of each division to the overall sum of all divisions. a)

In the Analysis area, click Sales Volume.

b)

Select Analyze → Calculations → Dynamic Calculation → Percentage Contribution to Parent.

Remove the Overall result. a)

4.

Select Display → Totals & Parents → Display Grand Totals.

Define a filter so that only data for Germany is displayed. a)

Drag Country in the Background Filter area.

b)

Double-click the dimension in the Background Filter.

c)

In the Filter area, select only DE: Germany.

d)

Click OK. Continued on next page

330


2012

TBI30


5.

6.

2012

Define a Conditional Formatting to highlight the values of Sales Volume. Define the rules as described in the table: Red

Less Than

5.000.000

Yellow

Between

5.000.000 and 10.000.000

Green

Greater Than

10.000.000

a)

Select Analyze → Conditional Formatting → New....

b)

In the Name field, enter Sales Volume.

c)

Select Sales Volume and choose Cell Background as Format.

d)

Choose a red color, select Less Than and enter the value 5000000.

e)

Click Add.

f)

Choose a yellow color, select Between and enter the values 5000000 and 10000000.

g)

Click Add.

h)

Choose a green color, select Greater Than and enter the value 10000000 .

i)

Click Add.

j)

Click OK to confirm the settings and see the result.


Click Save → Save as....

b)

Enter the Filename U## Workspace 2 and click Save.


331


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain basic functions of SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP • Create a workspace with Analysis, OLAP edition on a SAP BEx query • Save and share workspaces with Business Intelligence platform

332


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Working with SAP BEx Query Elements in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis

Lesson: Working with SAP BEx Query Elements in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis Lesson Overview This lesson provides you an overview of the connectivity between SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse and SAP BusinessObjects Analysis.


Explain the connectivity with SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse and SAP BusinessObjects Analysis. Describe how objects used in SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse BEx queries are represented in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis.

Business Example You have defined queries on InfoProviders using the BEx Query Designer. Query elements like variables, calculated key figures, hierarchies, filters, or exceptions and conditions are important for the users who create reports using SAP BusinessObjects Analysis.

How SAP NetWeaver BEx Query Elements are Represented in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis All InfoObjects in the BEx query definition set as rows, columns, free characteristics, and filters are exposed to SAP BusinessObjects Analysis. The following table outlines the BEx query elements and how they are represented in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis:

2012

BEx query element

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis

Characteristic

Dimension

Hierarchy

Each available hierarchy is represented in the dimension folder of the related characteristic

Calculated key figure

Measure element Information about the details of the restricted key figure is not available in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis.


333


TBI30

Restricted key figure

Measure element Information about the details of the restricted key figure is not available in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis.

Filter (Characteristic Restriction)

Characteristic Restrictions will be applied to the underlying query and cannot be changed by users at runtime.

Filter (Default Values)

Filters defined as Default Values appear as Background Filter in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis and can be changed by users at runtime.


Treated in the same way as a characteristic.

Display attribute

Display attributes are grouped together with the actual characteristic.

SAP BW Variable

SAP BW Variables are turned into prompts.

Exceptions

Are turned into “read only” conditional formatting.

Conditions

Are turned into “read only” Filter by Measure.

How Characteristics are Represented in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis The following image shows a simple BEx query defined in the SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse Query Designer:

334


2012

TBI30


Figure 119: BEx Query

The query definition contains two characteristics (Sold-to party and Material) and two key figures (Sales Volume (MC) and Sales Volume EUR). All characteristics available in the Rows or Free Characteristics will be available to utilize in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis. In addition, any SAP BW variable will be utilized as Prompt.

2012


335


TBI30

Figure 120: BEx Query Elements in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis

• •

• •

For characteristic Material, each hierarchy is shown and can be used in Analysis. The non hierarchical display for the characteristic Material is listed as an option as well and can be identified based on the name of the characteristic (in Analysis, edition for OLAP) or based on the node Flat Presentation (in Analysis, edition for MS Office). The other characteristics are presented as standard dimensions. The key figures are represented in one group called Key Figures (in Analysis, edition for OLAP) or Measures (in Analysis, edition for MS Office).

Working with SAP BW Variables in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis When creating an SAP BusinessObjects report or workspace based on an SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse query with variables, each variable becomes a prompt in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis. Variables serve as placeholders for members, hierarchies, hierarchy nodes, formula elements, and texts. After defining the variable values, the crosstab is displayed according to the selected values. Hint: To be editable in the prompting dialog, a variable must be defined as input-ready and set to Manual Input in Query Designer.

336


2012

TBI30


Variables may be mandatory or optional, depending on how they are configured in the BEx query. Mandatory variables are variables that you must provide a value for when the Prompts box opens. Mandatory variables are denoted with asterisks in the Prompts dialog box. If allowed, an initial value, denoted with a number sign (#) can be selected. This explicitly selects all data records, including those, which do not correspond to a member of the hierarchy. Optional variables are variables which you do not have to select values for when prompted. Queries with optional variables that you do not select values for return data based on default values.

Figure 121: SAP NetWeaver BW Query Contains a Mandatory Variable

Note: In SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for MS Office, the prompting dialog box does not appear automatically for queries with optional variables only. You can open the prompting dialog with the prompting icon in the menu and define variable values. You can also use this manual option to open the dialog to change existing values. If a query contains mandatory variables without default values, the prompting dialog appears automatically when you insert the query in a worksheet and requires the definition of mandatory variable values before the crosstab is added. If you cancel the prompting dialog, the query data is not included in the workbook.

2012


337


TBI30

SAP BusinessObjects Analysis supports most of the SAP BW variable types: •

Key date variables Key date variables are single-value variable types where you can indicate a specific date for the data you want to see (provided that data is configured in the cube to be time-dependent). Time-dependent metadata is filtered based on the key date variable. The value for the key date variable must be specified first, because it limits the data available to other variables.

•

Characteristic variables Characteristic variables may be single-value or multiple-value, depending on how they are set up in the SAP BW query. In the Prompts dialog box, you select one or more members to be returned from the default flat hierarchy.

•

Hierarchy variables and Hierarchy node variables Dimensions contain a hierarchy or multiple hierarchies grouped together into a single logical collection. The hierarchy you select in the Prompts dialog box restricts the hierarchies you can use on that dimension to the chosen hierarchy. Hierarchy variables often come paired with hierarchy node variables, where both variables apply to the same dimension. The hierarchy node variable can dynamically apply to whichever hierarchy has been selected for the hierarchy variable. In these cases, you make a selection for the hierarchy variable before making a selection for the hierarchy node variable.

•

Formula variables Formulas are calculations that may have been defined by an administrator on the key figures (or measures) dimension. If SAP BusinessObjects Analysis requires you to enter a formula variable, you must enter a numerical value only. The value you enter is then used to complete the formula, and the data returned is the result of the formula.

Working with Hierarchies in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis There are two options to work with hierarchical presentations in your analysis: Dimensions with SAP NetWeaver BW hierarchies and Dimensions displayed as hierarchy.

Including Dimensions with Hierarchy Hierarchies for dimensions are created in the data modeling of SAP NetWeaver BW. In SAP NetWeaver BW, they are called Characteristic Hierarchy. A dimension can contain multiple hierarchies. In a hierarchy, dimension members are organized in a tree structure. For example, the hierarchy of cost centers that are assembled in cost center groups.

338


2012

TBI30


Figure 122: Using SAP BW Hierarchies in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis

Displaying Dimensions as Hierarchy Note: The following option is only available in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for MS Office. If you have multiple dimensions in your analysis, you can display them as flat presentation or as hierarchy. By default, the flat presentation is displayed. You can change the display to a hierarchical presentation. You can also use dimensions with hierarchies as a single dimension and combine it with other dimensions to a hierarchical presentation. To display dimensions as hierarchy, move at least two dimensions to the Rows section in the design panel. Then select a crosstab cell and choose Hierarchy → Compact Display in Rows.

2012


339


TBI30

Figure 123: Display Dimensions as Hierarchy

340


2012

TBI30


Exercise 15: Using Hierarchies and Variables in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create reports and workspaces with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis on a SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse query with variables and hierarchies.

Business Example You have created SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse queries with variables and hierarchies, which enable you to customize queries flexibly. You want to use one query definition as a foundation that allows you to analyze the sales volumes for different customers or divisions.

Task 1: Create a report with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for Microsoft Excel based on a BW query with a variable and hierarchies Create a report with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for Microsoft Excel based on the BW query Query Mandatory Variable [P_MAND_VAR]. 1.

Start the Analysis for Excel client and insert the query Query Mandatory Variable [P_MAND_VAR]. Connection Information

2.

Field Name


System

RWB

Client

800

User

user##

Password

Assigned password

Select the following customers:


2012


341


TBI30

Key

Text

1000

Becker Berlin

1001

Lampen-Markt GmbH

1002

Omega Soft-Hardware Markt

1003

IDES AG Tochtergesellschaft

3.

Remove Country and Region. Represent your data with a Customer Hierarchy by Region. Make sure that you see only the texts of the hierarchy nodes.

4.

Save your workbook and distribute it in the SAP Business Intelligence platform.

Task 2: Create a workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for OLAP based on a BW query with a variable and hierarchies Create a workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for OLAP based on the BW query Query Optional Variable [P_OPT_VAR]. 1.

Start the Analysis edition for OLAP application. Connection Information

2.

Field Name


System

RWB

Client

800

User

user##

Password

Assigned password

Authentication

SAP

By which divisions is the report filtered and why? _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________

3.

Change the values for the variable to Pumps (01) and Lightning (04) only. Continued on next page

342


2012

TBI30


4.

Display the data using a hierarchy for Material. Remove Country and Region from the Analysis workspace. Show only the first two levels of the hierarchy.

5.

2012



343


TBI30

Solution 15: Using Hierarchies and Variables in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis Task 1: Create a report with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for Microsoft Excel based on a BW query with a variable and hierarchies Create a report with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for Microsoft Excel based on the BW query Query Mandatory Variable [P_MAND_VAR]. 1.

Start the Analysis for Excel client and insert the query Query Mandatory Variable [P_MAND_VAR]. Connection Information

2.

Field Name


System

RWB

Client

800

User

user##

Password

Assigned password

a)


b)


c)


d)


e)

Use the Search tabstrip to find the query Query Mandatory Variable with the technical name P_MAND_VAR.

f)

Click OK

Select the following customers:


344


2012

TBI30


Key

Text

1000

Becker Berlin

1001

Lampen-Markt GmbH

1002

Omega Soft-Hardware Markt

1003

IDES AG Tochtergesellschaft

a)

In the Prompts dialog box, click the icon right to the text field. Note: In this case, the Prompts dialog appears automatically, because the variable is mandatory. If you have defined an optional variable, you have to call the Prompts dialog manually.

3.

4.

b)

In the Select Member dialog, enter 1000 in the text field and press Enter.

c)

Select Becker Berlin and click OK.

d)

Click the Plus icon.

e)

Enter 1001 in the second text field and click again the Plus icon.

f)

Repeat the previous steps and enter the keys for the customers 1002 and 1003.

g)

Click OK.

Remove Country and Region. Represent your data with a Customer Hierarchy by Region. Make sure that you see only the texts of the hierarchy nodes. a)

Drag Country and Region from the Rows Area to the Field Explorer area.

b)

Expand the node Sold to party and drag Customer Hierarchy by Region into the Rows area.

c)

Right-click the hierarchy in the result area and choose Members → Text.

Save your workbook and distribute it in the SAP Business Intelligence platform. a)

Click the Office button and select Save Workbook.

b)

In the Save Documents dialog, navigate to BI Training → User Area → User ##.

c)

Enter U## Workbook with mandatory Variable in the Name field and click Save.


2012


345


TBI30

Task 2: Create a workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for OLAP based on a BW query with a variable and hierarchies Create a workspace with SAP BusinessObjects Analysis for OLAP based on the BW query Query Optional Variable [P_OPT_VAR]. 1.

Start the Analysis edition for OLAP application. Connection Information

2.

Field Name


System

RWB

Client

800

User

user##

Password

Assigned password

Authentication

SAP

a)

Click Programs → SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 4.0 → Custom Link to BI Launchpad.

b)

Log on with your credentials.

c)


d)


e)

Search for the query Query Optional Variable [P_OPT_VAR].

f)

Click OK.

By which divisions is the report filtered and why? _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ a)

Expand Division in the Metadata Explorer area. The report is filtered by the divisions Pumps, Lightning, and High Tech.

b)

In the BW query definition, the characteristic Division is restricted by a variable with optional input. The variable has the default values Pumps, Lightning, and High Tech.


346


2012

TBI30


3.

4.

Change the values for the variable to Pumps (01) and Lightning (04) only. a)

In the Data Analysis ribbon, choose Prompts.

b)

In the Prompts dialog box, go to Actions and select Expand All.

c)

Remove the value High Tech (07).

d)

Close the Prompts dialog box by clicking OK.

Display the data using a hierarchy for Material. Remove Country and Region from the Analysis workspace. Show only the first two levels of the hierarchy.

5.

2012

a)

Drag Country and Region from the Rows Area in the Metadata Explorer area.

b)

Expand the node Material and drag Product Hierarchy for Material MARA into the Rows area.

c)

In the Data Analysis ribbon, choose Hierarchies → Show levels.

d)

View the result by expanding the hierarchy nodes.


Click Save → Save As....

b)

Enter the Filename U## Workspace with Hierarchy and click Save.


347


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Explain the connectivity with SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse and SAP BusinessObjects Analysis. • Describe how objects used in SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse BEx queries are represented in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis.

348


2012

TBI30

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Classify the target groups as well as the main use cases where users can benefit from using Analysis • Discuss the positioning of Analysis within the SAP portfolio. • Explain the connectivity options to SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse and SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform. • Explain basic functions of Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office – Excel client. • Use BEx query elements in Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office – Excel client. • Work with query components and formulas in Analysis for MS Excel. • Save and distribute workbooks with Business Intelligence Platform. • Explain basic functions of Analysis, edition for Microsoft Office – PowerPoint client • Explain basic functions of SAP BusinessObjects Analysis, edition for OLAP • Create a workspace with Analysis, OLAP edition on a SAP BEx query • Save and share workspaces with Business Intelligence platform • Explain the connectivity with SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse and SAP BusinessObjects Analysis. • Describe how objects used in SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse BEx queries are represented in SAP BusinessObjects Analysis.

2012


349

Unit Summary

350

TBI30


2012

Unit 7 Live Office Unit Overview Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • •

Connect to and select data from documents in SAP Crystal Reports or SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence. Create a Live Office document with Crystal Reports based on SAP data sources

Unit Contents Lesson: Live Office .............................................................352 Exercise 16: Creating a New Live Office Document Based on Crystal Reports 2011 ................................................................359

2012


351

Unit 7: Live Office

TBI30

Lesson: Live Office Lesson Overview In this lesson, you will learn how to import data from Business Objects Enterprise Server to Microsoft Office using Live Office.


Connect to and select data from documents in SAP Crystal Reports or SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence. Create a Live Office document with Crystal Reports based on SAP data sources

Business Example You are very familiar with Microsoft Office products and need to perform analysis on Crystal Reports, but you are not familiar with the Crystal Reports or Web Intelligence tools. Live Office gives you access to report data through Microsoft Office products.

Introduction to SAP BusinessObjects Live Office Live Office is an add-on for the Microsoft office applications Powerpoint, Word, Excel, or Outlook that allows you to access and refresh data stored in the SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform repository. Data sources for Live Office can be: • • •

SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence documents SAP Crystal Reports 2008/2011 documents Legacy (.UNV) universes

SAP Crystal Reports for Enterprise documents and .UNX universes that have been created in Information Design Tool cannot be a data source for SAP BusinessObjects Live Office 4.0. You can insert report parts or report fields into a Live Office document. Report parts are for instance tables or charts which you can insert by themselves without displaying the rest of the report. Report fields can be dimension objects, attributes, measures, or table fields that have been used in a Crystal Reports document or in a universe.

352


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Live Office

Live Office content type Fields

Report parts

Crystal reports

Suppported

Supported

Web Intelligence

N/A

Supported

Universe query (.UNV universe)

Supported

N/A

Use Cases and Target Groups for SAP BusinessObjects Live Office The SAP BusinessObjects Live Office application integrates with Microsoft Office, embedding up-to-the-minute corporate data in Microsoft PowerPoint, Excel, and Word documents. This releases business user from dependency on IT and provides self-service access to trusted Business Intelligence (BI) sources within your familiar business tools. SAP BusinessObjects Live Office software allows business users to create simple queries and summary reports based on verifiable data. The imported data can be formatted with Microsoft Office functionality. Therefore It is not necessary for Live Office users to know how to create or edit Crystal Reports or Web Intelligence documents that provide the data to answer their business questions.

2012


353

Unit 7: Live Office

TBI30

Use cases for SAP BusinessObjects Live Office are: •

•

•

•

•

•

Self-service access – Access Business Intelligence (BI) content directly within Microsoft Office – no IT assistance required. Select data from a report from Crystal Reports software, an SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence document, or through a .unv universe query – all within Microsoft Office. Display trusted information – With SAP BusinessObjects Live Office, your Microsoft Office documents display data from the same trusted BI source that supports your organization’s decision making and enterprise performance. Use Business Intelligence in Microsoft Office Outlook – Embed business intelligence directly in your email messages using Microsoft Outlook. The underlying report automatically retains your security parameters to ensure that recipients see only the data they should be permitted to access. And security is maintained, even when you share the document outside your firewall. Enable secure, direct refresh – Automatically refresh a single data item – or all the data – in your Microsoft Office document. Instant refreshing and refiltering put the most accurate, up-to-date data at your fingertips for more confident decision making. Use Microsoft Office formatting and calculations – Once you have embedded your BI data, you can format and perform calculations using familiar features of Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Powerpoint, and Microsoft Word. All formatting and calculations are retained. Share documents – Publish Microsoft Office documents to SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform repository for instant access via BI Launchpad. The security of shared documents is maintained.

Leveraging Crystal Reports and Web Intelligence Documents in Live Office Both Crystal Reports and Web Intelligence content can be added from the Live Office menu or in the respective Microsoft Office tool or by using the Live Office toolbar (in Office version 2003). The Live Office menue provides you with quick access to the Live Office objects in your Microsoft Office Excel, PowerPoint, or Word documents. When you insert a new data source the “Live Office Insert Wizard” opens.

354


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Live Office

Figure 124: The Live Office Menu

Live Office Insert Wizard The Live Office Insert Wizard allows you to select data from your BI Platform Repository to be inserted into a Live Office document. The decription of this workflow is about Crystal Reports or Web Intelligence documents.

2012


355

Unit 7: Live Office

TBI30

Open Live Office Insert Wizard by choosing a data source type in the Live Office menu of your Microsoft Office application. Then follow these steps: 1.

Choose Document Choose a Crystal Reports doument or Web Intelligence document as data source from BI Platform Repository.

2.

Specify Parameter Values If Parameters have been used in a Crystal Report, for example to define a dynamic filter value, you have to enter values for all mandatory parameters. In Microsoft Excel you can bind parameters to specific Excel cells to change them within the Live Office document.

3.

Choose Data Choose Data from the data source. Depending on the data source you have chosen you can import report fields or report parts. Report parts can be selected in a preview window during this step. Note: From a Web Intelligence document you can only import report parts. From a universe you can only import fields. When you use Crystal reports as data source you can choose if you want to insert fields or report parts.

4.

Set Filters The Set Filters page will only appear if you have inserted your data as fields. You can apply filters to all available fields in your Crystal Reports documents to restrict the data in your report, even if the fields do not appear in your document. Filters will not be applied on report parts.

5.

Summary On the summary page you can name your Report Object and insert it into your Live Office document. The Live Office document can contain several report objects from the same or from different source objects. After you have finished the Live Office Wizard you can modify object properties, modify parameter or prompt settings, configure data refresh options, and save your Office document with the embedded Live Office object.

356


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Live Office

Figure 125: Live Office Insert Wizard (Choose Data Page)

2012


357

Unit 7: Live Office

358

TBI30


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Live Office

Exercise 16: Creating a New Live Office Document Based on Crystal Reports 2011 Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a new Live Office document using Crystal Reports 2011 as a source

Business Example You are a report designer who needs to create a LiveOffice document using an existing Crystal Report 2011 document as a source.

Task 1: Create a simple Crystal Reports document as a data source for Live Office

Figure 126: Sample Solution (Preview)

1.

Open Crystal Reports 2011. Make sure that the setting for Tables and fields under File → Options → Database is set to Show description.

2.

Open the BEx query Sales by Division [P_SALES_DIVISION] as data source for the document using the following logon credentials for the SAP NetWeaver BW system:


2012


359

Unit 7: Live Office

TBI30

Field Name


SAP System

RWB

SAP Client

800

User name

User##

Password

Assigned password

3.

Use the characteristic Division and the formatted value of the key figure Sales Volume EUR in the detail section of the report and preview the report data.

4.

Visualize the report data with a pie chart in the report header. Enter Sales by Division as title for the chart.

5.

Save the Crystal Reports document as U## CR Sales by Division to Business Objects Enterprise Server in the folder SAP Training → User##. Use the following credentials to log on to Business Objects Enterprise Server Field Name


System

wdflbmt2268

User Name

User##

Password

Assigned Password

Authentication

SAP

Task 2: Import the data from the Crystal Reports document in Microsoft Excel via Live Office.

Figure 127: Sample Solution

1.

Start Microsoft Excel. Continued on next page

360


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Live Office

2.

2012

Live Office is available as an add-in in Microsoft Excel. Open the Live Office options, in the view tab set the value Field Description for the Column Heading, in the Enterprise tab enter the information in the following fields: Field Name


User Name

User##

Password

Assigned Password

Web Service URL

http://wdflbmt2268:8080/dswsbobje/services/Session

System

wdflbmt2268

Authentication

SAP

3.

Once you log onto Live office successfully, insert the Crystal Reports document U## CR Sales by Division using Live Office Insert Wizard.

4.

Switch to fields and choose the fields Division and Sales Volume EUR in the report.

5.

The Set Filters page will only appear if you have inserted your data as fields. You can apply filters to all available fields in your Crystal Reports documents to restrict the data in your report. Select Values for Sales Volume that are greater than 10000 as filter.

6.

Complete the summary page in the Insert Wizard. This is the last screen in Live Office Insert Wizard before the current object is inserted into your Microsoft Office application. Change the object name to U## LO Object1

7.

Insert the pie chart from the same Crystal Reports document U## CR Sales by Division as a separate Live Office object. Use the Live Office Insert Wizard again to perform this task. Save the Live Office object as U## LO Object2 and align it next to the table that you have already inserted.

8.

Save the Live Office document to SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise to your personal folder RWB~800/User##


361

Unit 7: Live Office

TBI30

Solution 16: Creating a New Live Office Document Based on Crystal Reports 2011 Task 1: Create a simple Crystal Reports document as a data source for Live Office

Figure 128: Sample Solution (Preview)

1.

2.

Open Crystal Reports 2011. Make sure that the setting for Tables and fields under File → Options → Database is set to Show description. a)

Open Crystal Reports under Start → Programs → Crystal Reports 2011.

b)

Go to File → Options → Database and activate the Show description flag

Open the BEx query Sales by Division [P_SALES_DIVISION] as data source for the document using the following logon credentials for the SAP NetWeaver BW system:


362


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Live Office

Field Name


SAP System

RWB

SAP Client

800

User name

User##

Password

Assigned password

a)

3.

4.

5.

Choose SAP → Create New Report from a Query... in the Crystal Reports menu. Select the assigned system and logon. Open the query by entering the technical name P_SALES_DIVISION into the Description / Technical Name field.

Use the characteristic Division and the formatted value of the key figure Sales Volume EUR in the detail section of the report and preview the report data. a)

Check in the menu under View → Field Explorer if Field Explorer is being displayed.

b)

Expand the nodes Database Fields → Sales by Division in the Field Explorer window and drag Division to the Details section of the Design window.

c)

Also expand the node Key Figures in the Field Explorer and drag Sales Volume EUR to the Details section.

d)

Choose View → Print Preview.

Visualize the report data with a pie chart in the report header. Enter Sales by Division as title for the chart. a)

In the menu choose Insert → Chart and insert the chart into the Report Header section.

b)

Within the data tab of chart expert drag Division from Available fields to the upper right part and choose on change of in the dropdown box. Drag Sales Volume EUR from Available fields to the Show values area.

c)

Switch to the Type tab and choose Pie Chart.

d)

Switch to the Text tab, uncheck the Auto-Text checkbox next to Title and enter Sales by Division as title text.

e)

Click OK.

Save the Crystal Reports document as U## CR Sales by Division to Business Objects Enterprise Server in the folder SAP Training → User##. Use the following credentials to log on to Business Objects Enterprise Server


2012


363

Unit 7: Live Office

TBI30

Field Name


System

wdflbmt2268

User Name

User##

Password

Assigned Password

Authentication

SAP

a)

Choose File → Save As... and choose Enterprise. Enter the logon credentials and navigate to BI Trianing/User Area/User##. Enter U## CR Sales by Division and click Save.

Task 2: Import the data from the Crystal Reports document in Microsoft Excel via Live Office.


1.

Start Microsoft Excel. a)

2.

Select Microsoft Excel: Programs → Microsoft Office → Microsoft Office Excel 2007.

Live Office is available as an add-in in Microsoft Excel. Open the Live Office options, in the view tab set the value Field Description for the Column Heading, in the Enterprise tab enter the information in the following fields: Field Name


User Name

User##

Password

Assigned Password


364


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Live Office

3.

4.

Web Service URL

http://wdflbmt2268:8080/dswsbobje/services/Session

System

wdflbmt2268

Authentication

SAP

a)

Select the menu LiveOffice → Application Options.

b)

Navigate to the View tab.

c)

Check the radion button Field Description.

d)

Navigate to the Enterprise tab.

e)

Select the check box Use specified logon criteria.

f)

Enter the user name and password given by the instructor

g)

Enter the information in the respective fields.

h)

Select SAP as Authentication and click Logon.

i)

Click OK.

Once you log onto Live office successfully, insert the Crystal Reports document U## CR Sales by Division using Live Office Insert Wizard. a)

Select LiveOffice → Crystal Reports .

b)

Select the previously created report from BusinessObjects Enterprise U## CR Sales by Division

c)

Click Next.

Switch to fields and choose the fields Division and Sales Volume EUR in the report. a)

Click Switch to Fields.

b)

In the Available Fields list, click both fields Division and Sales Volume EUR to include in the Report object, and then click the right arrow >.

c)

Use the up and down arrows to change the order of the included fields, as required. Note: The buttons to change the order of the fields are on the right side of the window.

d)

Click Next.


2012


365

Unit 7: Live Office

TBI30

5.

The Set Filters page will only appear if you have inserted your data as fields. You can apply filters to all available fields in your Crystal Reports documents to restrict the data in your report. Select Values for Sales Volume that are greater than 10000 as filter.

6.

a)

In the Set Filters page of the Live Office Insert Wizard, click the field that you want to filter. Select Sales Volume EUR.

b)

Select a operator is greater than from the Operators drop-down list on the right.

c)

Enter the value 10000.

d)

Click Next.

Complete the summary page in the Insert Wizard. This is the last screen in Live Office Insert Wizard before the current object is inserted into your Microsoft Office application. Change the object name to U## LO Object1 a)

Review the information on the summary page and enter U## LO Object1 as object name. Note: This is the name of the embedded object, not the finished live office enabled workbook. The workbook will be saved in the next step.

b)

Click Finish to insert your Live Office object into your Microsoft Office document.

c)

A progress bar appears as your Live Office object is inserted in your Microsoft Office document.


366


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Live Office

7.

Insert the pie chart from the same Crystal Reports document U## CR Sales by Division as a separate Live Office object. Use the Live Office Insert Wizard again to perform this task. Save the Live Office object as U## LO Object2 and align it next to the table that you have already inserted. a)

Select LiveOffice → Crystal Reports .

b)

Select the previously created report from BusinessObjects Enterprise U## CR Sales by Division

c)

Click Next.

d)

If you do not see a graphical preview on the choose data page of the wizard Click Switch to Parts. Select the Pie Chart in the Crystal Report. Click Next.

e)

Review the information on the summary page and enter U## LO Object2 as object name. Note: This is the name of the imbedded object, not the finished live office enabled workbook. The workbook will be saved in the next step.

8.

2012

f)

Click Finish to insert your Live Office object into your Microsoft Office document.

g)

Use drag & drop to position the chart area in Excel.

Save the Live Office document to SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise to your personal folder RWB~800/User## a)

Select the menu LiveOffice → Save as New to Repository.

b)

Enter the file name U## LO Sales by Division and save it to the folder BI Training → User Area → User##.

c)

Click Save.


367

Unit 7: Live Office

TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Connect to and select data from documents in SAP Crystal Reports or SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence. • Create a Live Office document with Crystal Reports based on SAP data sources

368


2012

TBI30

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Connect to and select data from documents in SAP Crystal Reports or SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence. • Create a Live Office document with Crystal Reports based on SAP data sources

2012


369

Unit Summary

370

TBI30


2012

Unit 8 SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards Unit Overview This unit provides you with an introduction to SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards, the basic functions and connectivity options:

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • • • • •

Describe the purpose and business case of SAP BusinssObjects Dashboards Create a dashboard model with a Microsoft Excel data source using basic Dashboards functions Describe the SAP Dashboards connectivity options and integration into SAP BusinessObejcts BI Platform Describe the different connectivity options for SAP NetWeaver BW data and their use cases Work with SAP NetWeaver BW connection Work with Web Service Query connection Work with Universe Connections

Unit Contents Lesson: Introduction to SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards ..............372 Exercise 17: Create a Dashboard Using a Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet.................................................................387 Exercise 18: Create a Dashboard with Universe Connection ........397 Lesson: Integration of SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards with SAP NetWeaver BW ..................................................................407 Exercise 19: Create a Dashboard with SAP NetWeaver BW Connection ..................................................................417 Exercise 20: Create a Dashboard Using Web Service Query Connection ..................................................................425

2012


371

Unit 8: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

TBI30

Lesson: Introduction to SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards Lesson Overview This lesson introduces the concept of SAP Business Objects Dashboards and gives an overview over the functionality and the business case of dashboard models.


Describe the purpose and business case of SAP BusinssObjects Dashboards Create a dashboard model with a Microsoft Excel data source using basic Dashboards functions Describe the SAP Dashboards connectivity options and integration into SAP BusinessObejcts BI Platform

Business Example You are a business user who needs to transform complex business data into actionable visual information. You need to create rich interactive presentations be able to examine Key Performance Indicators of your business unit at a glance.

What is a Dashboard? A dashboard is a user interface that provides highly visual and interactive data to the user. It is intended to present data in a simple and intuitive way to the users which are usually executives, managers and operational staff. In a dashboard it is assumed that the interaction possibilities are defined by the designer of the dashboard. The users follow a predefined path and do not navigate freely through the data. Also the idea of a dashboard is to provide summarized data and key performance indicators to provide an overview of the business performance. So it is rather about giving the big picture instead of going into details.

372


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Introduction to SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

Figure 130: Example for a Dashboards Model

Business decisions require immediate answers. With SAP BusinessObjetcs Dashboards, your decision-makers gain real-time insights to critical business data enabling business analysis on key data your users can trust and refresh instantly. The end result is an interactive dashboard with live data connectivity for accurate, consistent information, providing you with immediate and trusted results.

Figure 131: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards – What it is

2012


373


TBI30

Figure 132: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards – What it is not

With SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards you can: • • • •

374

Build sophisticated dashboards and visualizations quickly and customize your dashboards to meet the unique needs of your business environment Connect your dashboards to external data sources. Maximize the value of your IT solution with visual front ends. Empower everyone to transform the way you run your business today with actionable visual information


2012

TBI30


Use Cases and Target Groups for SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards The main use cases for Dashboards are: •

•

•

•

Create consolidated views on key metrics - Use visual components on highly aggregated BI content to make it possible to retrieve essential business information very easily. You can extend the power of business intelligence to more users by offering visual simplicity in analysis. Create What-If Scenarios - Dashboards allow users to change parameters and receive immediate answers. The dashboard example above displays how a certain amount of bookings affects revenues in the next quarter. Use a variety of data sources to create your visualization - With Dashboards you can access trusted and up to date Business Intelligence data from SAP Netweaver BW and from SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform. You can also use several different data connections in a single Dashboard. Share Dashboards and export them to familiar formats - Security, connectivity, and interactivity are maintained whether the SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards visualization is deployed to BI Launchpad,, SAP NetWeaver Portal, or embedded inside Microsoft Office and Adobe PDF.

Target Groups SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards is the right tool for most business users. Dashboards provide a visualization on key metrics, which means highly aggregated data that is very important for executives and managers. Another user group are the information consumers, usually the biggest user group in an organization. Common for SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards target groups is that they use predefined reports with few interaction possibilities and generally without the need to work with detailed data. OLAP Analysis is not the focus of a dashboard. The task of Business Analysts is to find information in the data by using OLAP operations like slice and dice or by performing drill downs to more detailed data. Suitable tools for Business Analysts are OLAP Analysis tools like BEx Analyzer or SAP BusinessObjects Analysis.

Basic Functions of SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards The most important parts of the workspace where you design dashboard models are the canvas, an embedded spreadsheet, the components browser, and the properties panel.

2012


375


TBI30

Figure 133: The Dashboards Workspace

The Canvas Area The canvas area is the main work area where you place and manipulate components to create models. You can change the color of the canvas background and add a grid to help you arrange items on the canvas. You can also adjust the size of the canvas to give you more space to work or to reduce the overall size of a saved model. • • •

To display a grid on the canvas choose open the Grid area under File → Preferences in Dashboards. To change the size choose File → Document Properties and change the Canvas Size in Pixels. You can fit the canvas size to components by choosing View → Canvas Sizing → Fit Canvas to Components or fit the canvas size to the window by choosing View → Canvas Sizing → Fit Canvas to Window.

The Embedded Spreadsheet The embedded spreadsheet is a functional Excel spreadsheet that you can work with in the same way as you would in Excel. To associate your models with specific data, you can link components in models to cells in the embedded

376


2012

TBI30


spreadsheet. Data coming from a connection is also inserted into an assigned range in the spreadsheet. You can use most Excel formula functions to make calculation with data in the dashboard. Note: The spreadsheet does not support all Excel functions. It does not support macros, conditional formatting, linking to other external spreadsheets, and some formula functions. See Dashboard Design and Presentation Design Useŕs Guide for more information on supported formula functions.

The Components Browser The “Components Browser” lists all the components that are available to add to your model. From this list you can drag components onto the canvas to add them to your model. You can view the list of components grouped into functional categories (“Category” or “Tree” view) or as an alphabetical list (“List” view). Components are grouped into the following functional areas

2012

Category

Description

Favorites

A list of favorite components that you can create by choosing Add to Favorites in the context menu of a component

Charts

Chart components, e.g. bar chart, line chart

Containers

Container components group and display other components.

Selectors

Selector components allow users to choose options when running the model, e.g. list box, check box

Single Value

Single-value components can be linked to a single cell in the spreadsheet, for example dial buttons, gauges, sliders

Maps

Map components provide geographical representations that allow you to display data by region.

Text

Text components can be used to add labels to your model or to allow users to enter text when the model runs.

Other

The Other category includes various components that can enhance your model, such as calendars, trend icons, panel sets, and print buttons.


377


TBI30

Art & Backgrounds

Art & Backgrounds components allow you to enhance models by adding images and backgrounds.

Web Connectivity

Web connectivity components contain for example a URL button and a Connection Refresh button.

Universe Connectivity

Universe connectivity components allows users to interact with Universe (.UNX) connections such as refreshing data and entering prompt values. Universe connection is a new feature in Dashboards 4.0

The Properties Panel The properties panel contains the setting and format options for the selected component. After you place a component on the canvas area, you can access the properties panel by double clicking the component. The properties panel can contain the following views (which views are available depends on the typ of component): • •

• • •

General View: For basic configuration such as tile, label and source data Insertion View: Use this view to configure charts to act as selectors, so that clicking a chart element inserts more detailed information into the embedded spreadsheet. This view is not available for all components. Behavior View: Defines for example interactivity and visibility Appearance View: Defines the font sizes, colors, etc. Alerts View: Is used to define notifications about data for example if a value is extremely high or low

Connections Overview As we already have learned SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards creates visualizations on the data that has been imported to the spreadsheet. Basically there are three ways to insert data into this spreadsheet. •

•

378

The first one is to import an Excel file via Data → Import. The components of your dashboard model can now be linked to cell ranges. If you need to update your dashboard model you can open an existing .xlf file and import the newer version of your spreadsheet. If the structure of your Excel sheet has not changed, the components are still linked to correct cell range. The second option is to create an external connection via the Data Manager under Data → Connections. Here you will find a variety of connections to choose from. For most of the connections it is possible to use multiple connections in your dashboard model, for example if you want to merge


2012

TBI30


•

data from different data sources. External connections can be refreshed dynamically during dashboard runtime, for example you can load current values via a web service connection. The third option is to create a query on a .unx universe and insert the results into the spreadsheet. With this option you can alternatively bind the result data from the query directly to the components without inserting into the spreadsheet. See section “The Query Browser in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards” in this lesson for more information. Note: If you export or publish your dashboard model, restrictions may apply for the refresh of external connections. For example if you export it as a Flash file Adobe Flash Player Restrictions may affect the useŕs ability to run the model. Users must also have sufficient rights to be able to refresh data for example from a SAP NetWeaver BW data source.

Figure 134: Data Manager in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards

2012

Connection Type

Description

Web Service query

Using Web Service query, you can define a query from a universe and import data from this web service into SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards.

Web Service Connection

Web Services support interoperable interaction over a network using the HTTP Protocol.

XML Data

An XML data connection connects to an external source through HTTP.

SAP NetWeaver BW connection

Connect to Business Explorer Queries in SAP NetWeaver BW via BI Consumer Services (BICS) interface. Query data can be directly imported to SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards without having to create a universe.


379


TBI30

Flash Variables

Flash variables provide a way to pass data or variables from HTML to the _root level of a Flash object.

Portal Data

Portal data connections allow you to define parameters in models or send and receive data from another web part in SAP BusinessObjects BI workspace, IBM WebSphere or Microsoft SharePoint.

Crystal Reports Data Consumer

The Crystal Reports Data Consumer connections allow you to retrieve information from Crystal Reports documents.

FS Command

The FS Command connection allows you to include Flash FS Commands which allow Flash to run JavaScript statements in a web browser.

LCDS Connections

The LiveCycle Data Services (LCDS) connection streams real-time data through Adobe LiveCycle Data Services.

External Interface Connection

External Interface connections allow you to expose selected data ranges in the embedded spreadsheet to transfer data to the SWF file using JavaScript when the file is embedded in an HTML web page.

Excel XML Maps

When you import an Excel spreadsheet that has an XML map, Dashboard Design retains the defined structure of the XML file and how it maps to the data within the spreadsheet.

Live Office Connections

f you create a model from a LiveOffice-enabled Excel spreadsheet the connection allows you to make the model data refreshable against the source data.

Note: Find detailed information about connections and how to create them in the Dashboard Design and Presentation Design User Guide

380


2012

TBI30


The Query Browser in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards In SAP Business Objects Dashboards 4.0 you can leverage the Semantic Layer. You can use the query browser in the dashboard design tool, choose a .unx universe from SAP BusinessObjetcs BI Platform and create queries. A dashboard model can contain multiple universe queries on a single or on different universes. The query results can be inserted into the embedded spreadsheet or linked directly with components in the canvas. This simplifies the authoring workflow because you can design the dashboard model and the corresponding universe query in the same client tool. You can access all universes with a relational data source that have been published to SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform, so you can access the full variety of database connections available in Information Design Tool and also relational universes on SAP NetWeaver BW InfoProviders. Universes can be managed and organized in the repository and leverage BI Platform authorizations. So it is recommendable that you use universe connections wherever it is possible.

Figure 135: Leveraging the Semantic Layer

To create a new query in a dashboard model choose Add Query in the Query Browser area of SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards. Then you can select a universe from the SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform repository.

2012


381


TBI30

Figure 136: The Query Browser

After you have chosen a universe you can work with the standard Query Panel that is also used in other SAP BusinessObjects client tools like Web Intelligence or Crystal Reports for Enterprise. Add dimension objects and measures to the result objects and create filters and prompts that you need for you dashboard model. By dragging prompts from the query summary to the canvas you can automatically insert Prompt Selector Components to the canvas or you can choose them from the universe connectivity section in the components area.

Figure 137: The Query Panel

382


2012

TBI30


Figure 138: The Prompt Selector

With semantic layer queries in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards you can leverage Direct Data Binding that allows you to link the query data directly with the components in the canvas. That means you can see current data while you are designing your dashboard model what makes dashboard design more comfortable. When you work with other connections you normally need to refresh the connections in the Preview in order to see current data.

Figure 139: Direct Data Binding

2012


383


TBI30

Intergration with SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence Platform When saved locally, SAP BusinessObjects Dashboard files are stored in a zipped format with an XLF extension. The XLF file format contains the model information and its associated embedded spreadsheet file. XLF files can only be opened and executed in the Dashboard Design Tool. That means these files can not be distributed to users that do not have acces to a Dashboard Design tool installed on their computer. In order to distribute dashboards you can export them to different file formats such as: • • • • •

HTML web page Flash file (SWF) that can be opened with Flash player Adobe Acrobat PDF file Microsoft Office Powerpoint document Microsoft Office Word document

The advantage is that these files contain the dynamic components of the dashboard model and can be easily distributed. The disadvantage is that it may not be possible to refresh external connections from these locally exported files on another computer. Another way of distributing these files is to save them to the SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform repository. Dashboards saved there contain both the design document (XLF) and the Flash file (SWF) in a single object. This object can be viewed and modified. In former Xcelsius versions a Flash version had to be saved for viewing and an xlf file for editing. Publishing dashboard models into SAP BusniessObjects BI Platform has many advantages:

Figure 140: Integrating Dashboard Models into SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform

New in version 4.0 besides the new XLF dashboard object are the integration into Life Cycle Management and the recognition of dependencies between dashboard models and universe queries, universe objects in web service queries and with

384


2012

TBI30


corresponding Crystal Report documents, WebI documents and Universe objects in Live Office connections. Translation Management makes it possible to translate all texts that are used in the dashboard model and to display number values with the correct viewing locale. This is not possible with XLF files created with former Xcelsius 2008 versions. These files can be migrated to the 4.0 XLF format simply by opening them in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and saving them as XLF.

Figure 141: Upgrading Dashboards

Note: Find instructions how to upgrade Xcelsius files from older versions in the Dashboard Design and Presentation Design Useŕs Guide

Example for a Simple Dashboard Model

2012


385


386


TBI30

2012

TBI30


Exercise 17: Create a Dashboard Using a Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Work with basic Dashboards functions • Create a dashbord with data in an Excel spreadsheet

Business Example The sales director sent you the latest sales key figures that have to be visualized for a meeting with the board.

Task: Create a dashboard using the given data from the Excel spreadsheet, please use the following illustration as an orientation.


1.

Start Dashboards and import the Excel model Dashboards_BasicFunctions.xls from the BO100 folder in My Documents on the local hard drive of your training system.

2.

Insert a Bar Chart that visualizes the projected computer sales data in 1.000$ with one bar per product line. Continued on next page

2012


387


388

TBI30

3.

Use a Horizontal Slider to give the Bar Chart what-if capabilities. You should be able to see the impact of a change of the Sales Growth Rate for Desktops in the Bar Chart now.

4.

Add more Horizontal Sliders to the Dashboard to give the Bar Chart what-if capabilities for the other product lines.

5.

Add a custom Gauge to visualize the total of Projected Sales for all product lines. Use alerts within the gauge to indicate bad, critical, and good values.

6.

Add a custom Pie Chart to that shows the Product Mix for 2009 for all product lines.

7.

Finalize the presentation by adding a title text field for the dashboard. Also label the sliders with a text field. Increase the font size of the text fields to highlight them. Add a background element to the canvas. Preview the dashboard.

8.

Save the dashboard model in the local My Documents folder as U## Computers Sales Projections.xlf. Export the dashboard to PowerPoint and save the PowerPoint in the My Documents folder as U## Computers Sales Projections.ppt. Start the presentation mode in PowerPoint.


2012

TBI30


Solution 17: Create a Dashboard Using a Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet Task: Create a dashboard using the given data from the Excel spreadsheet, please use the following illustration as an orientation.


1.

Start Dashboards and import the Excel model Dashboards_BasicFunctions.xls from the BO100 folder in My Documents on the local hard drive of your training system. a)

Open Dashboard Design under Start → Programs → Dashboard Design → Dashboard Design.

b)

In the File Menu choose New → New.

c)

On the Dashboards tool bar, select Data → Import.

d)

Navigate to My Documents → BO100.

e)

Select the Excel file Dashboards_BasicFunctions.xls, and click Open. Hint: If you can not find the Excel file make sure that you have run the BO100 Initialize Course script. Click on Start → Programs → Initialize Course → BusinessObjects BI 4 → Initialize BO100 Continued on next page

2012


389


2.

TBI30

Insert a Bar Chart that visualizes the projected computer sales data in 1.000$ with one bar per product line. a)

On the Components panel, select Charts.

b)

Drag the Bar Chart icon onto the canvas, and place it in the upper-left corner.

c)

Click the Bar chart component on the canvas to open its Properties panel.

d)

In the Titles area, delete the text in the Chart title and Chart subtitle fields.

e)

In the Chart title field, enter XYZ Computers.

f)

In the Chart subtitle field, enter Projected Sales: 2009.

g)

In the Values (X) Axis field, enter Projected Sales ($1,000s).

h)

In the Category (Y) Axis field, enter Product Lines.

i)

In the Data portion, click the By Series radio button.

j)

Click Add a New Series (+) button.

k)

Click the Cell Selector icon to the right of the Name field.

l)

Select the cell A5 in the imported spreadsheet. Click OK.

m)

Click the Values (X) Cell Selector icon, and select cells B5:F5 in the spreadsheet. Click OK.

n)

Click the Category Label (Y) Cell Selector icon, and select cells B2:F2. Click OK.


390


2012

TBI30


3.

Use a Horizontal Slider to give the Bar Chart what-if capabilities. You should be able to see the impact of a change of the Sales Growth Rate for Desktops in the Bar Chart now. a)

On the Components panel, select the Single Value.

b)

Drag the Horizontal Slider icon onto the canvas, and click it to open its Properties panel.

c)

On the General tab, click the Title Cell Selector button, and select cell B2. Click OK.

d)

On the General tab, click the Data Cell Selector button, and select cell B4. Click OK.

e)

On the Appearance tab, click Text and ensure both Title and Value are selected.

f)

Click Preview. When you drag the pointer on the slider, the desktop sales data in the Bar chart will change. To return to the Design view, click the Preview button.


2012


391


4.

TBI30

Add more Horizontal Sliders to the Dashboard to give the Bar Chart what-if capabilities for the other product lines. a)

Select the Slider component, right-click and select Copy.

b)

Click Paste four times to create four more slider components.

c)

Drag Slider 2, Slider 3, Slider 4, and Slider 5 below Slider 1 until all five slider components are visible.

d)

Click Slider 2 to open its Properties panel.

e)

On the General tab, click the Title Cell Selector button, select cell C2, and click OK.

f)

On the General tab, click the Data Cell Selector button, select cell C4, and click OK.

g)

On the Appearance tab, click Text and ensure both Title and Value are selected.

h)

Repeat the previous 4 steps for Slider 3, but for Title, select cell D2, and for Data, select cell D4.

i)

Repeat the same steps for Slider 4, but for Title, select cell E2, and for Data, select cell E4.

j)

Repeat the same steps for Slider 5, but for Title, select cell F2, and for Data, select cell F4.

k)

Drag a box around the five Slider components to select them all.

l)

On the Format menu, select Align, and click Center.

m)

On the Format menu, select Space Evenly, and click Down.

n)

Click Preview. To return to the Design view, click the Preview button.


392


2012

TBI30


5.

Add a custom Gauge to visualize the total of Projected Sales for all product lines. Use alerts within the gauge to indicate bad, critical, and good values. a)

On the Components panel, select the Single Value.

b)

Drag the Gauge icon onto the canvas, and place it in the lower-right corner.

c)

Use the control handles around the gauge component to increase its size.

d)

Click the Gauge component to open its Properties panel.

e)

On the General tab, click the Title Cell Selector button, select cell A1, and click OK.

f)

On the General tab, in the Data area, click the By Range Cell Selector button, select cell G5. Click OK.

g)

On the General tab, in the Scale area, click Manual and type 10,000 in the Maximum Limit box.

h)

On the Appearance tab, click Text and select the Title check box.

i)

In the Format Selected Text area, from the Position list, select Top Center.

j)

Set the font size to 18, and click Bold.

k)

In the table, select the Value check box.

l)

In the Format Selected Text area, from the Position list, select Bottom Center.

m)


n)

On the Alerts tab, make sure Enable Alerts is selected.

o)

Select the As Percent of Target radio button. Click Cell Selector button and select cell H5.

p)

In the Color Order area, click High values are good.

q)

Click Preview. When you drag the pointers on the sliders, the data in the bar chart will change and the gauge needle moves to reflect the new values. To return to the Design view, click the Preview button.

r)

Draw a box around the five slider components to select them all, and double-click the selected area.

s)

On the General tab in the Scale area, type 50 in the Maximum Value box, and press Enter.


2012


393


6.

TBI30

Add a custom Pie Chart to that shows the Product Mix for 2009 for all product lines. a)

Drag the Pie Chart icon onto the canvas, and place it in the upper-right corner.

b)

On the General tab, delete the text in the Chart title and Chart subtitle boxes.

c)

In the Chart title field, type XYZ Computers, and press Enter.

d)

In the Chart subtitle field, type Product Mix:2009, and press Enter.

e)

In the Data area, click the Value Cell Selector button, and select cells B5:F5 in the spreadsheet. Click OK.

f)

In the Data area, click the Labels Cell Selector button, and select cells B2:F2 in the spreadsheet. Click OK.

g)

Click Preview.


394


2012

TBI30


7.

8.

2012

Finalize the presentation by adding a title text field for the dashboard. Also label the sliders with a text field. Increase the font size of the text fields to highlight them. Add a background element to the canvas. Preview the dashboard. a)

On the Components panel, click on Text.

b)

Drag the Label icon onto the canvas, and place it at the top. Double-click the Label component to open its Properties panel.

c)

On the General tab, click the Enter Text radio button.

d)

In the Enter Text field, enter XYZ Computers Sales Projections 2009.

e)

On the Appearance tab, in the Text area, select center the text.

f)


g)

Drag another Label icon beneath the sliders and in the Enter Text box, enter Product Line Growth Rates, and set the font size to 18.

h)

On the Components panel, expand the Arts & Backgrounds folder.

i)

Drag the Background icon onto the canvas.

j)

Resize the background component until it covers the other components on the canvas.

k)

Make sure the background component is selected, and on the Format menu, select Order and click Send to Back.

l)

On the upper toolbar, click Fit canvas to components.

m)

Click Preview to see how your final presentation works. To return to the Design view, click the Preview button.

Save the dashboard model in the local My Documents folder as U## Computers Sales Projections.xlf. Export the dashboard to PowerPoint and save the PowerPoint in the My Documents folder as U## Computers Sales Projections.ppt. Start the presentation mode in PowerPoint. a)

Save the dashboard model. File → Save → my Documents. Enter the name U## Computers Sales Projections.

b)

Choose File → Export and click PowerPoint Slide.

c)

In the Export PowerPoint (PPT) dialog box, choose the My Documents folde to save the file to, enter the file name U## Computers Sales Projections.ppt, and click Save.

d)

In PowerPoint, on the Slide Show menu, click View Show.


395


396


TBI30

2012

TBI30


Exercise 18: Create a Dashboard with Universe Connection Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Work with universe connections in SAP BusinessObejcts Dashboards

Business Example In your organization universes are provided as common semantic layer to reporting users to access all different kinds. Use SAP BusinessObejcts Dashboards to create a visualization on international sales data.

Task 1: Create a new query on the International Sales universe that will provide data for your dashboard model. 1.

Open SAP BusinessObejcts Dashboards and create a new blank dashboard model.

2.

Open the Query Browser section in the dashboard design workspace. Add a new query on universe P_International_Sales in the folder Dashboards Universes in the SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform repository. Log on with the following credentials: System

wdflbmt2268

User name

USER##

Password

your password

Authentication

SAP

Note: Auto Hide the Query Browser in the Dashboard Design workspace using the Autohide (Pin) Icon. 3.

In the Query Panel create a new query with the following result objects: Country \ Country (Dimension) and Sales Revenue \ Quantity (Measure). Preview the query results. Do not change usage options for this query.


2012


397


TBI30

Task 2: Use direct data binding with the query results of the query and create a dashboard model that should look like this after you performed all exercise steps:


1.

Add a new bar chart to the canvas.

2.

Edit the properties of the bar chart. Enter the title Sales quantity per country. Display the different countries on the Y-axis of the chart and the quantity measure values on the X-axis. Bind the data from the query directly to the Values and Category Labels in the Bar Chart. Resize the Bar Chart so that all countries are visible in the canvas. Note: Use By Series in the properties of the Bar Chart. Create a serie with the name Quantity.

Task 3: Add a Scorecard component that allows you to compare Quantity and Gross Sales and also a Prompt Selector for regions to your Dashboard. 1.

In the Query Browser section of the dashboard design workspace open the Query Panel and edit the query in your dashboard. Add the measure Sales Revenue \ Gross Sales to the result objects. Also create a mandatory prompt based on the dimension object Country \ Region that allows users to select a single region from a list of values during dashboard runtime. Note: If you need to log on again, use the credentails provided in task 1 step 1 of this exercise. Continued on next page

398


2012

TBI30


2.

Add a Scorecard component from the selectors category to the upper right part of the canvas that allows you to compare quantity and gross sales for each displayed country. Bind the component directly with the query data from your universe query.

3.

Add a Query Prompt Selector component from the Universe connectivity category to the lower right part of the canvas. The Prompt Selector allows the user to enter a value for region during dashboard runtime. Note: The Query Prompt Selector automatically adapts to the type of prompt that you created in the universe query if you set it as source prompt

4.

Preview your dashboard and test if the prompt values can be changed and return different results.

5.

Save your dashboard to the BI Platform repository into your personal folder BI Training → User Area → User## as Dashboard Design Object with the name U##_International_Sales. Note: If you have time left feel free to creatively change Themes and Colors of the dashboard.

6.

2012

Execute the Dashboard in BI Launchpad. Log on with the following credentials: System

wdflbmt2268:6400

SAP System

RWB

SAP Client

800

User Name

USER##

Password

Your Password

Authentication

SAP


399


TBI30

Solution 18: Create a Dashboard with Universe Connection Task 1: Create a new query on the International Sales universe that will provide data for your dashboard model. 1.

2.

Open SAP BusinessObejcts Dashboards and create a new blank dashboard model. a)


b)

In the File Menu choose New → New

Open the Query Browser section in the dashboard design workspace. Add a new query on universe P_International_Sales in the folder Dashboards Universes in the SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform repository. Log on with the following credentials: System

wdflbmt2268

User name

USER##

Password

your password

Authentication

SAP

Note: Auto Hide the Query Browser in the Dashboard Design workspace using the Autohide (Pin) Icon. a)

Press the Autohide (Pin) Button in the Query Browser section underneath the components section. At the left part of the screen there is now a field Query Browser that opens when you move your mouse on it and is hidden automatically if you are not using it.

b)

Move your mouse to the Query Browser field and click Add Query in the Query Browser section

c)

Log on with the credentials provided in the table above.

d)

Select the universe P_International_Sales.unx under Universes → Dashboards Universes.

e)

Click Next. Now you can see the query panel. Proceed to the next Exercise Step.


400


2012

TBI30


3.

In the Query Panel create a new query with the following result objects: Country \ Country (Dimension) and Sales Revenue \ Quantity (Measure). Preview the query results. Do not change usage options for this query. a)

Drag the dimension object Country from the folder Country in the Universe area in the left part of the screen to the result objects area.

b)

Do the same for the measure Quantity in the folder Sales Revenue.

c)

Click Next to preview query results.

d)

Click OK to finish and create the query.

Task 2: Use direct data binding with the query results of the query and create a dashboard model that should look like this after you performed all exercise steps:


1.

Add a new bar chart to the canvas. a)

Open Charts in the Components section.

b)

Look for the Bar Chart object and drag it onto the canvas in the middle of the screen.


2012


401


2.

TBI30

Edit the properties of the bar chart. Enter the title Sales quantity per country. Display the different countries on the Y-axis of the chart and the quantity measure values on the X-axis. Bind the data from the query directly to the Values and Category Labels in the Bar Chart. Resize the Bar Chart so that all countries are visible in the canvas. Note: Use By Series in the properties of the Bar Chart. Create a serie with the name Quantity. a)

In the General tab of the properties of the Bar Chart choose By Series.

b)

Underneath the By Series radio button press the [+] icon.

c)

In the name field enter Quantity. Choose the arrow icon on the right of the Values(X) field and select Query Data.

d)

Choose Quantity in the Result Objects Window and click OK.

e)

Choose the arrow icon on the right of the Category Labels(Y) field and select Query Data.

f)

Choose Country in the Result Objects Window and click OK.

g)

Resize the Bar Chart in the canvas by dragging the lower right corner.


402


2012

TBI30


Task 3: Add a Scorecard component that allows you to compare Quantity and Gross Sales and also a Prompt Selector for regions to your Dashboard. 1.

In the Query Browser section of the dashboard design workspace open the Query Panel and edit the query in your dashboard. Add the measure Sales Revenue \ Gross Sales to the result objects. Also create a mandatory prompt based on the dimension object Country \ Region that allows users to select a single region from a list of values during dashboard runtime. Note: If you need to log on again, use the credentails provided in task 1 step 1 of this exercise.

2.

a)

Move your mouse to the Query Browser field in the left part of the screen. Now you can see an overview of the query elements.

b)

Choose the Edit icon in the Query Browser.

c)

Drag the measure object Gross Sales from the folder Sales Revenue in the Universe area in the left part of the screen to the result objects area.

d)

Drag the dimension object Region from the folder Country in the Universe area in the left part of the screen to the Filters area.

e)

Do not change the setting Equal to and open the drop-down field on the right of the Region filter to choose Prompt.

f)

Do not change any of the settings and choose OK. Click Next.

g)

Enter the value Europe in the prompt window and click Run.

h)

Click OK.

Add a Scorecard component from the selectors category to the upper right part of the canvas that allows you to compare quantity and gross sales for each displayed country. Bind the component directly with the query data from your universe query. a)

Open the selectors category in the components area and drag the Scorecard component onto the upper right part of the canvas.

b)

In the General tab of the properties of the Scorecard click the arrow on the right of the Display Data field and choose Query Data.

c)

Check the Result Objects Country, Quantity, and Gross Sales in the window that opens and click OK.

d)

Do not change any other setting in the properties.


2012


403


3.

TBI30

Add a Query Prompt Selector component from the Universe connectivity category to the lower right part of the canvas. The Prompt Selector allows the user to enter a value for region during dashboard runtime. Note: The Query Prompt Selector automatically adapts to the type of prompt that you created in the universe query if you set it as source prompt

4.

5.

a)

Open the Universe Connectivity category in the components area and drag the Query Prompt Selector component onto the lower right part of the canvas.

b)

In the properties of the Query Prompt Selector choose Query 1: Enter Region: as Source Prompt

c)

As destination prompt check Enter Region: (Equal).

d)

Underneath Refresh Quereis Check Query 1.

e)

Do not change other settings in the component properties.

Preview your dashboard and test if the prompt values can be changed and return different results. a)

Click the Preview button in the Dashboard Design Toolbar.

b)

Change the value for the prompt to North America by clicking the entry field of the prompt and choose Apply.

Save your dashboard to the BI Platform repository into your personal folder BI Training → User Area → User## as Dashboard Design Object with the name U##_International_Sales. Note: If you have time left feel free to creatively change Themes and Colors of the dashboard.

6.

a)

Choose File → Save to Platform As → Dashboard Design Object

b)

Navigate to the folder BI Training → User Area → User##.

c)

Enter the file name U##_International_Sales and choose Save.

Execute the Dashboard in BI Launchpad. Log on with the following credentials: System

wdflbmt2268:6400

SAP System

RWB

SAP Client

800


404


2012

TBI30

2012


User Name

USER##

Password

Your Password

Authentication

SAP

a)

Open Start → Programs → SAP BusinessObejcts Enterprise XI 4.0 → SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 4.0 → Custom Link to BI Launchpad.

b)

Enter wdflbmt2268 as Enterprise Server name and log on with the credentials provided above.

c)

Navigate to the Documents tab and open the Folders section. Navigate to the fodler Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User##.

d)

Double-click the dashboard object U##_International_Sales to execute it.


405


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the purpose and business case of SAP BusinssObjects Dashboards • Create a dashboard model with a Microsoft Excel data source using basic Dashboards functions • Describe the SAP Dashboards connectivity options and integration into SAP BusinessObejcts BI Platform

406


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Integration of SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards with SAP NetWeaver BW

Lesson: Integration of SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards with SAP NetWeaver BW Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn how to use data from SAP NetWeaver BW data sources in dashboard models by creating connections with data manager.


Describe the different connectivity options for SAP NetWeaver BW data and their use cases Work with SAP NetWeaver BW connection Work with Web Service Query connection Work with Universe Connections

Business Example You are a report designer who needs to create interactive dashboards with SAP NetWeaver BW datasources. The dashboards enable you to monitor business performance, identify critical data relationships, and use what-if scenarios to understand potential performance.

The SAP NetWeaver BW (BI Consumer Services) Connection The SAP NetWeaver BW connection in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards allows a direct connection to BEx queries without the need to create universes or web services. Besides the query results the connection also offers additional output values with query information such as nfoProvider names, query filters, key date, and refresh date. These output vbalues can be displayed in dashboard models. By defining input values in the dashboard you can submit filter values or variable values to the BW query. Query data can be refreshed during dashboard runtime.

2012


407


TBI30

Figure 146: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards 4.0 Data Connectivity

The direct connection to SAP NetWeaver BW allows you to consume BW Queries and query views in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards. All BW variable types are supported, including personalizations. BW authorization is enforced when query data is accessed. Dashboard models can also be integrated to the SAP NetWeaver: • •

Dashboards can be saved in SAP NetWeaver BW Favorites and Roles Access through SAP Enterprise Portal using iViews.

The integration of SAP NetWeaver BW offers two main features: Dashboards can be saved to and transported as SAP NetWeaver BW transport objects and the dashboard can be integrated into SAP Enterprise Portal. In this particular case you do not need an SAP BusinessObjects BI platform server although it offers many advantages in your Business Intelligence environment and is highly recommended. At runtime the BEx Web runtime provides a link to the SWF (Flash) file representing the dashboard which retrieves data via BICS (BI Consumer Services). BI Consumer Services is a java-based data access layer of SAP NetWeaver BW that provides the query results.

408


2012

TBI30


If the system requirements are met then it is generally recommended to use the SAP NetWeaver BW connection to access BEx query data. However note that there are some restrictions of this connection : •

•

To refresh a dashboard with SAP NetWeaver BW connection it needs to be executed within BEx web runtime. This runtime is not available when the dashboard is executed locally, exported as PDF or other export formats or if it is executed in BI Launchpad. Note that for the same reason you are not able to use the preview function in Dashboards. The connection does not provide direct access to Infocubes, Multiproviders or other BW Infoproviders without a BEx query or a query view.

In order to display one of these dashboards in BI Launchpad you can create a URL-Object that opens the dashboard directly from the SAP Enterprise Portal.

Creating a Dashboard with SAP NetWeaver BW Connection To create a connection via BI Consumer Services open the Data Manager and choose SAP NetWeaver BW connection. After choosing a query the query elements appear as input values and output values.

Figure 147: Creating a SAP NetWeaver BW Cconnection

Now you have to define cell ranges in the Excel sheet that is embedded in Xcelsius. The query result is represented by the output value Cross-Tab Data. You can use input values to submit variable values during dashboard runtime. In addition you can display further query information elements such as existing static filters. The Input area includes: • •

2012

Filters Variables (used to submit values to the variable)


409


TBI30

The output area includes: • • • • •

Variables (used to show the list of values used in variables) Characteristics Information about the BEx query Static Filters (defined in the BEx query) Error Messages

After you have assigned cell ranges to the in- and output values open the data preview tab. This tab will show a preview of the structure of the query result and the available characteristics and key figures. Use data preview to rearrange the query elements according to the needs in your dashboard. That means you can reuse a query in several dashboards by creating different views on it.

Figure 148: Data Preview

Now you have to define how the query is refreshed during dashboard run time. Here you can choose if the query data should be fetched initially, every X seconds or if a value in a certain cell triggers the refresh.

410


2012

TBI30


Figure 149: Refresh Settings

Dashboard models with SAP NetWeaver BW connection now have to be saved to BW in and have to be launched there because they need the BEx Web runtime to be refreshed. You find the two options Publish (=Save to BW) and Launch (= Open) in the SAP menu.

Figure 150: Publish to SAP NetWeaver BW

Web Service Query Connection Another way to bring data from BEx queries into SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards is via BI services in SAP BusinessObejcts Web Intelligence. In Web Intelligence you can publish a block (i.e. a table or a chart) as a web serivce (called BI Services). This web service can be consumed by dashboard models via a Web Service Query connection. In release 4.0 Web Intelligence can open BEx queries directly from SAP NetWeaver BW. That means no universe is necessary. The

2012


411


TBI30

advantage here is that you can access queries directly via BI Consumer Services connection and the dashboard does not require a BEx web runtime environment to be executed. You can publish the dashboards to SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform and users can execute them in BI Launchpad. In order to transfer results from a BEx query to SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards, you have to create a Web Intelligence document first. Then you can choose Publish as Web Service in the context menu of a block (here: a table).

Figure 151: Publish a Web Service in Web Intelligence

A publishing wizard will appear that helps you create prompts, filters and enter a name for the web service. After you have published the service you can open the “Web Service Publisher” in SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence and select it. In the properties you will find a WSDL (Web Service Defnition Language) URL. The WSDL-file describes the input and output parameters that are provided by the service. The URL is important because the Web Service Query connection in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards needs this information.

412


2012

TBI30


Figure 152: Web Service Publisher

Now you can create a new Web Service Query connection in the Dashboards Data Manager. Here you can paste the WSDL-URL and the connection will return Input and Output Values that can be linked to different cell ranges in the embedded spreadsheet.

Figure 153: Web Service Query Connection

Semantic Layer Connections on SAP NetWeaver BW Data Sources You can use the query browser in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards to create queries on relational data sources. In Information Design Tool you can create a relational connection on SAP NetWeaver BW InfoProviders, these connections can be part of multisource universes. That means that you can create queries on – for example - an InfoCube from SAP NetWeaver BW in the query browser of your dashboard model. The advantage of this approach is that you can use all the features of the universe connections in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards such

2012


413


TBI30

as multiple queries, direct data binding and the simplified authoring. But keep in mind that you cannot use BEx query features such as calculated and restricted key figures, filters and variables.

Figure 154: SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards Connectivity Overview

Note: See lesson “Introduction to SAP BusinessObejcts Dashboards” for more information about working with universe connections.

Query as a Web Service and Live Office Connections To complete the overview there are two connections that can still be used but are no longer as important as they were in the Xcelsius 2008 release for connectivity with SAP NetWeaver BW. That is why these connection options are not in focus of this lesson:

Web Service Query (Query as a Web Service) Connections on Universes In former versions such as Xcelsius 2008 you could consume data from an OLAP universe on SAP NetWeaver BW Infocubes, MultiProviders or BEx queries via Query as a Web Service (QaaWS). You needed to create an OLAP universe and publish a query on this universe with the Query as a Web Service tool. With the new semantic layer this connection is still avaible (renamed toWeb Service Query) but only makes sense for legacy OLAP .unv universes on SAP NetWeaver BW data. If you want to import data from a current .unx universe on

414


2012

TBI30


SAP NetWeaver BW InfoProvider data you can now use query browser within SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards without creating a web service. If you want to import data from a BEx query use SAP NetWeaver BW connection or a Web Service Query connection on Web Intelligence BI Services.

Live Office Connections Live Office connections allow to import Crystal Reports or Web Intelligence documents via Live Office into the Excel spreadsheet within SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards. So if you want to access SAP NetWeaver BW data you can create a Crystal Reports document on a BEx Query and import it to a dashboard model. The live office connection also allows to refresh the results of the live office document. However an easier way would also be to directly use SAP NetWeaver BW connection or a Web Service Query on Web Intelligence BI Services.

2012


415


416


TBI30

2012

TBI30


Exercise 19: Create a Dashboard with SAP NetWeaver BW Connection Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a model in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards using different visualization components and SAP NetWeaver BW connections.

Business Example You want to visualize data from your SAP NetWeaver BW system with interactive elements. You have already created two queries that you want to embed in a single dashboard.

2012


417


TBI30

Task: Create a dashboard with two SAP NetWeaver BW connections. One connection returns the 3 countries with highest Sales Volume in your company. The second connection returns the top customers for each country. The dashboard should allow to select one of the top 3 countries and to display a selected number of corresponding top customers.

Figure 155: sample solution

1.

Open SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and import the spreadsheet Exercise_BW_Connection from the folder N:\My Documents\BO100. Note: The spreadsheet serves as a template and will be filled with data from BEx queries in the following exercise steps.

2.

Create a new SAP NetWeaver BW connection on the query Top 3 Countries [P_TOP3_COUNTRIES]. Use the following details to logon to you BW system: Field Name


SAP System

RWB

SAP Client

800

User name

USER##

Password

Your password


418


2012

TBI30


Assign the query results to the cell range E1 : G5. Note that the query header contains two rows. Set the connection to be refreshed on load. 3.

Repeat the last exercise step with query Top N Customers [P_TOPN_CUSTOMERS]. Assign the query results to the range A1 : C12 in the spreadsheet. This time you also need to assign two input values: - a filter value that restricts the query to one of the countries from the Top 3 Countries query (cell E10) - a condition value that determines the number of customers in the results of this query (cell A15) Set the connection to be refreshed on load and when either the variable value or the country selection is changed (use trigger cell I2)

4.

Insert a list box element that lets the user of the dashboard select one of the countries from the Top 3 Countries Query. Insert the result row with the selected country in the result area E8 : G8. Note: The selected country in range E8:G8 is used as a filter selection for the Top N Customers query.

5.

Insert a Dial component that changes the value of cell A15. Use a range between 1 and 5 and use radial mouse tracking for the Dial Button. Note: The value of the Dial Button is transmitted to the variable in the condition of the Top N Customers query.

6.

Insert a Bar Chart to visualize the customers with the respective sales volumes in the query results of the Top N Customers query. Use cell I5 as Chart title and the selected country as subtitle. Make sure you do not display empty lines in the chart.

7.

Align the components in the canvas as you like. To preview your query, publish it as U## Top N Customers DASHBOARD [U##_Top_N_DASHBOARD] to your assigned role of the SAP NetWeaver BW system and launch it. Note that it will be displayed in an SAP Enterprise Portal iView which will require you to logon with User## and your assigned password for the BW system. Note: The Preview function in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards can not be used with SAP NetWeaver BW connections

2012


419


TBI30

Solution 19: Create a Dashboard with SAP NetWeaver BW Connection Task: Create a dashboard with two SAP NetWeaver BW connections. One connection returns the 3 countries with highest Sales Volume in your company. The second connection returns the top customers for each country. The dashboard should allow to select one of the top 3 countries and to display a selected number of corresponding top customers.

Figure 156: sample solution

1.

Open SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards and import the spreadsheet Exercise_BW_Connection from the folder N:\My Documents\BO100. Note: The spreadsheet serves as a template and will be filled with data from BEx queries in the following exercise steps. a)

Go to Start → Programs → Dashboard Design → Dashboard Design.

b)

Click File → New → New.

c)

Open the Data menu and choose Import.

d)

Choose Yes.

e)

Choose N:\MyDocument\BO100, select the file Exercise_BW_Connection and click the Open button.


420


2012

TBI30


2.

Create a new SAP NetWeaver BW connection on the query Top 3 Countries [P_TOP3_COUNTRIES]. Use the following details to logon to you BW system: Field Name


SAP System

RWB

SAP Client

800

User name

USER##

Password

Your password

Assign the query results to the cell range E1 : G5. Note that the query header contains two rows. Set the connection to be refreshed on load.

3.

a)

Choose Data → Connections in the menu.

b)

Within Data Manager window choose Add → SAP NetWeaver BW Connection

c)

Click the Browse button.

d)

Log on to your SAP system using the details in the table above

e)

Enter Top 3 Countries in the Search in Names field and click Find.. Note: If you search by technical name [P_TOP3_COUNTRIES], ensure the option Search in Technical Name is selected.

f)

Select Top 3 Countries and click Open.

g)

Select Cross-Tab data in the output values section and click the icon next to the Insert In field.

h)

Select range E1:G5 in the spreadsheet and click OK.

i)

Navigate to the Usage tab and check Refresh Before Components Are Loaded.

j)

Click Close.

Repeat the last exercise step with query Top N Customers [P_TOPN_CUSTOMERS]. Assign the query results to the range A1 : C12 in the spreadsheet. This time you also need to assign two input values: - a filter value that restricts the query to one of the countries from the Top 3 Countries query (cell E10) - a condition value that determines the number of customers in the results of this query (cell A15) Continued on next page

2012


421


TBI30

Set the connection to be refreshed on load and when either the variable value or the country selection is changed (use trigger cell I2)

4.

a)

See solution of last exercise step. Choose query Top N Customers [P_TOPN_CUSTOMERS] and assign to range A1 : C12.

b)

In the Input Values section choose Country and click the Icon next to the field Read From. Assign the cell E10 and click OK.

c)

Also in the Input Values section choose Top N Customers and click the Icon next to the field Read From. Assign the cell A15 and click OK.

d)

Navigate to the Usage tab and check Refresh Before Components Are Loaded. Also click the icon next to the trigger cell field and assign cell I2. Set the trigger cell option to When Value Changes.

e)

Click Close.

Insert a list box element that lets the user of the dashboard select one of the countries from the Top 3 Countries Query. Insert the result row with the selected country in the result area E8 : G8. Note: The selected country in range E8:G8 is used as a filter selection for the Top N Customers query. a)

In the Components Section choose Selectors and scroll down until you find the List Box component.

b)

Drag the component to the upper left part of the canvas.

c)

Select the List Box component in the canvas and go to the General tab of the properties section (right part of the screen). In the Title field insert Select a Country.

d)

Also in the General Tab of the List Box Properties click the first icon on the right of the Labels field and assign the cell range F3:F5 from the spreadsheet and click OK.

e)

Change the value for Insertion Type to Row.

f)

Click the icon next to the Source Data field and assign the cell range E3:G5.

g)

Click the icon next to the Destination field and assign the cell range E8:G8.


422


2012

TBI30


5.

Insert a Dial component that changes the value of cell A15. Use a range between 1 and 5 and use radial mouse tracking for the Dial Button. Note: The value of the Dial Button is transmitted to the variable in the condition of the Top N Customers query.

6.

a)

In the Components Section choose Single Value and scroll down until you find the Dial component.

b)

Drag the component to the upper right part of the canvas.

c)

Select the Dial component in the canvas and go to the General tab of the properties section (right part of the screen). In the Title field insert Number of Customers.

d)

Click the icon next to the Data field and assign the cell A15.

e)

Change the value in the field Minumum Limit to 1 and the Maximum Limit to 5.

f)

Navigate to the Behavior → Common Tab and set Mouse Tracking to Radial.

Insert a Bar Chart to visualize the customers with the respective sales volumes in the query results of the Top N Customers query. Use cell I5 as Chart title and the selected country as subtitle. Make sure you do not display empty lines in the chart. a)

In the Components Section choose Charts and scroll down until you find the Bar Chart component.

b)

Drag the component to the lower part of the canvas.

c)

Select the Bar Chart component in the canvas and go to the General tab of the properties section (right part of the screen). Click the icon next to the Chart field, assign the cell I5 and click OK.

d)

Click the icon next to the Subtitle field, assign the cell F8 and click OK.

e)

In the data area of the General tab choose By Series and click the + icon underneath the series field.

f)

Click the icon next to the Values (X) field of the series, assign the cell range C3:C12 and click OK.

g)

Click the icon next to the Category Labels (Y) field, assign the cell range B3:B12 and click OK.

h)

Navigate to the Behavior → Common tab and activate the check box In Values to make sure that blank cells will be ignored.


2012


423


7.

TBI30

Align the components in the canvas as you like. To preview your query, publish it as U## Top N Customers DASHBOARD [U##_Top_N_DASHBOARD] to your assigned role of the SAP NetWeaver BW system and launch it. Note that it will be displayed in an SAP Enterprise Portal iView which will require you to logon with User## and your assigned password for the BW system. Note: The Preview function in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards can not be used with SAP NetWeaver BW connections

424

a)

Drag the components in the canvas to your desired positions.

b)

In the SAP menu click Publish As..., navigate to Roles → Roler## → Dashboards and save your Dashboard as U## Top N Customers Dashboard [U##_Top_N_Dashboard].

c)

In the SAP menu click Launch from the SAP menu and logon to SAP Enterprise Portal with User## and your assigned password.


2012

TBI30


Exercise 20: Create a Dashboard Using Web Service Query Connection Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Publish BEx query data as a web service in SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence • Create a dashboard with a Web Service Query connection that imports SAP NetWeaver BW data from a BEx query

Business Example You want to work with distribution channel data from a BEx query in SAP BusinessObjects Dashboards without having to create a Universe and without a BEx web environment that allows you to use SAP NetWeaver BW connection. Therefore you can use the BI Consumer Services connection in Web Intelligence and publish query results as a web service.

Task 1: Create a Web Intelligence document that displays data from a BEx query about Sales Volume in different Distribution Channels and publish it as a web service. 1.

In BI Launchpad open Web Intelligence and use the following credentials to log on to BI Launchpad: System

wdflbmt2268:6400

SAP System

RWB

SAP Client

800

User Name

USER##

Password

Your Password

Authentication

SAP

Note: The tool tip of the Web Intelligence icon and the text in tab that opens is still “Interactive Analysis” which was a temporary name during development of the tool. 2.

Create a new document with data source BEx Query. Open the connection Customer Sales MultiProvider and select the query Divisions by Distriibution Channel (P_DIVSIONS_DIST). Continued on next page

2012


425


TBI30

3.

In the Query Panel create a new query with the result objects Distribution Channel and Sales Volume EUR and run the query.

4.

Save the Web Intelligence document to the BI Platform repository in your folder Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User## with the name U## Distribution Channels.

5.

Publish the report block (i.e. the table) with Distribution Channel and Sales Volume EUR as a web service. Name the Report Content U## Distribution Channels and Publish the web service with the name U##_WS_Distribution_Channels with secSAPR3 auhentication in the BI Web Services folder.

6.

Open Web Service Publisher within Web Intelligence and copy the WSDL URL from the Web Service Properties to the clipboard.

Task 2: Create a new dashboard model with a Web Service Query connection and import the results of the BI Web Service that you have just created. Use this sample solution as orientation:


1.

Open SAP BusinessObejcts Dashboards and create a new blank dashboard model.

2.

Within Data Manager create a Web Service Query connection. Paste the WSDL URL from the Web Service Publisher in Web Intelligence into the WSDL URL field in the connection. Change the Method from Drill to GetReportBlock. Continued on next page

426


2012

TBI30


3.

Assign the Output values for the table cells that are provided by the web service connection to the cell range A1 : B10. Assign the Input values for Sales_Volume_EUR value to cell C1 and the input value for Sales_Volume_EUR operator to C2

4.

Configure the connection to be refreshed before components are loaded and when the content of cell C1 changes.

5.

Visualize the data from the Web Service Query connection with a Pie Chart. Assign the corresponding Value and Label cells from the embedded spreadsheet to the chart. Note: You will not see any results from the connection in the embedded spreadsheet.

6.

Insert a Horizontal Slider that allows you to change filter values for Sales Volume EUR between 1 Million and 150 Millions in 10 Million steps. Insert >= to the cell C2 as a “greater than” filter operator.

7.

Preview the dashboard model and check if the chart is refreshed when you move the slider. No Single Sign On is available in the dashboard design client, so use the following credentials in order to refresh the connection:

8.

2012

System

wdflbmt2268

User Name

USER##

Password

Your Password

Authentication

SAP

Save your dashboard to the BI Platform repository into your personal folder BI Training → User Area → User## as Dashboard Design Object with the name U##_BW_Distribution_Channels.


427


TBI30

Solution 20: Create a Dashboard Using Web Service Query Connection Task 1: Create a Web Intelligence document that displays data from a BEx query about Sales Volume in different Distribution Channels and publish it as a web service. 1.

In BI Launchpad open Web Intelligence and use the following credentials to log on to BI Launchpad: System

wdflbmt2268:6400

SAP System

RWB

SAP Client

800

User Name

USER##

Password

Your Password

Authentication

SAP

Note: The tool tip of the Web Intelligence icon and the text in tab that opens is still “Interactive Analysis” which was a temporary name during development of the tool.

2.

a)

Open Start → Programs → SAP BusinessObejcts BI platform 4.0 > Custom Link to BI Launchpad.

b)

Enter wdflbmt2268 as Enterprise server name. and log on with the credentials provided above.

c)

In the Home screen of BI Launchpad go to the My Applications area and select Web Intelligence Application.

Create a new document with data source BEx Query. Open the connection Customer Sales MultiProvider and select the query Divisions by Distriibution Channel (P_DIVSIONS_DIST). a)

Click the New icon in the Web Intelligence toolbar.

b)

Choose Bex and click OK.

c)

Select Customer Sales Multiprovider in the Connections folder.

d)

Select Divisions by Distribution Channel (P_DIVISIONS_DIST) and click OK.


428


2012

TBI30


3.

4.

In the Query Panel create a new query with the result objects Distribution Channel and Sales Volume EUR and run the query. a)

Drag dimension object Distribution Channel and Measure Object Sales Volume EUR.

b)

Click Run query.

Save the Web Intelligence document to the BI Platform repository in your folder Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User## with the name U## Distribution Channels. a)

Click the Save icon and choose wdflbmt2268 in the window that opens.

b)

Navigate to the folder Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User## and enter U## Distribution Channels in the name field.

c) 5.

Click Save.

Publish the report block (i.e. the table) with Distribution Channel and Sales Volume EUR as a web service. Name the Report Content U## Distribution Channels and Publish the web service with the name U##_WS_Distribution_Channels with secSAPR3 auhentication in the BI Web Services folder. a)

Right-click the border of the report block and choose Publish as Web Service in the context menu.

b)

Click Next>>.

c)

If duplicated content is detected click Next anyway. For the training environment this is not a problem.

d)

Enter U## Distribution Channels in the name field under Report Content. Make sure the Web Service server is wdflbmt2268, you can change the server by clicking on the server name. Note: If no entry for wdflbmt2268 is available click Manage Servers... and Add..., enter wdflbmt2268 in the Host Name field and click OK.

e)

Click Next.

f)

Select the folder BI Web Services and click Create. Enter U##_ws_distribution_Channels in the Web Service name field and choose secSAPR3 authentication.

g)

Click OK twice and click Finish.


2012


429


6.

TBI30

Open Web Service Publisher within Web Intelligence and copy the WSDL URL from the Web Service Properties to the clipboard. a)

Stay in Design-Mode in Web Intelligence and click the Web Service Publisher icon on the left of the screen.

b)

Expand the folder BI Web Services and select your web service U##_ws_Distribution_Channels.

c)

In the Web Service Properties section click the arrow icon on the right of the WSDL URL field. Choose Copy to clipboard.

d)

Minimize the browser window.

Task 2: Create a new dashboard model with a Web Service Query connection and import the results of the BI Web Service that you have just created. Use this sample solution as orientation:


1.

Open SAP BusinessObejcts Dashboards and create a new blank dashboard model. a)


b)

In the File Menu choose New → New.


430


2012

TBI30


2.

3.

4.

Within Data Manager create a Web Service Query connection. Paste the WSDL URL from the Web Service Publisher in Web Intelligence into the WSDL URL field in the connection. Change the Method from Drill to GetReportBlock. a)

Choose Data → Connections and click Add.

b)

Choose Web service query (Query as a Web Service)

c)

Click into the WSDL URL field and press CTRL +V to paste the WSDL URL.

d)

Click the Import button.

e)

Change the Method to GetReportBlock.

f)

Note that the connection now provides Input and Output Values.

Assign the Output values for the table cells that are provided by the web service connection to the cell range A1 : B10. Assign the Input values for Sales_Volume_EUR value to cell C1 and the input value for Sales_Volume_EUR operator to C2 a)

In the Output Values section choose table → row → cell and click the icon on the right of the Insert In: field. Select the cell range A1:B10 and click OK.

b)

In the Input Values section choose Sales_Volume_EUR > value and click the icon on the right of the Read From: field. Select the cell C1 and click OK.

c)

In the Input Values section choose Sales_Volume_EUR > operator and click the icon on the right of the Read From: field. Select the cell C2 and click OK.

Configure the connection to be refreshed before components are loaded and when the content of cell C1 changes. a)

Switch to the Usage tab in the Web Service Query connection.

b)

Check Refresh Before Components Are Loaded.

c)

Click the icon on the right of the Trigger Cell field and assign cell C1. Ensure the radio button When Value Changes is selected.

d)

Click Close.


2012


431


5.

TBI30

Visualize the data from the Web Service Query connection with a Pie Chart. Assign the corresponding Value and Label cells from the embedded spreadsheet to the chart. Note: You will not see any results from the connection in the embedded spreadsheet.

6.

7.

a)

From the Charts category in the Components section drag the component Pie Chart to the canvas.

b)

Select the Pie Chart in the canvas and in its properties and change the chart title to Distribution Channels. Delete the subtitle.

c)

Assign the cell range B1:B10 to the Values: field by clicking the icon next to the field on the right.

d)

Assign the cell range A1:A10 to the Labels: field by clicking the icon next to the field on the right.

Insert a Horizontal Slider that allows you to change filter values for Sales Volume EUR between 1 Million and 150 Millions in 10 Million steps. Insert >= to the cell C2 as a “greater than” filter operator. a)

From the Single value category in the Components section drag the component Horizontal Slider to the canvas.

b)

Select the Horizontal Slider in the canvas and in its properties enter Sales Volume greater or equal in the Title field.

c)

Assign the cell C1 to the Data field by clicking the icon next to the field on the right.

d)

Click the radio button Manual for the Scale and enter a Maximum Limit of 150000000 and a Minimum Limit of 1000000.

e)

In the properties of the Horizontal Slider switch to the Behavior tab.

f)

Click the Increment radio button and enter 10000000 in the field on the right of the button.

g)

In the embedded spreadsheet enter >= into the cell C2.

Preview the dashboard model and check if the chart is refreshed when you move the slider. No Single Sign On is available in the dashboard design client, so use the following credentials in order to refresh the connection:


432


2012

TBI30


8.

2012

System

wdflbmt2268

User Name

USER##

Password

Your Password

Authentication

SAP

a)

Click the Preview button in the dashboard design toolbar.

b)

Log on with the credentials provided above.

c)

Move the slider in the dashboard to check the functionality.

Save your dashboard to the BI Platform repository into your personal folder BI Training → User Area → User## as Dashboard Design Object with the name U##_BW_Distribution_Channels. a)

Choose File → Save to Platform As → Dashboard Design Object

b)

Navigate to the folder BI Training → User Area → User##.

c)

Enter the file name U##_BW_Distribution_Channels and choose Save.


433


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the different connectivity options for SAP NetWeaver BW data and their use cases • Work with SAP NetWeaver BW connection • Work with Web Service Query connection • Work with Universe Connections

434


2012

TBI30

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the purpose and business case of SAP BusinssObjects Dashboards • Create a dashboard model with a Microsoft Excel data source using basic Dashboards functions • Describe the SAP Dashboards connectivity options and integration into SAP BusinessObejcts BI Platform • Describe the different connectivity options for SAP NetWeaver BW data and their use cases • Work with SAP NetWeaver BW connection • Work with Web Service Query connection • Work with Universe Connections

2012


435

Unit Summary

436

TBI30


2012

Unit 9 SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Unit Overview This unit describes how to explore and search through business information using SAP BusinessObjects Explorer.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • • •

Describe the capabilities of SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Build and explore data sets using SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Analyze data sets Export exploration results

Unit Contents Lesson: Understanding SAP BusinessObjects Explorer ..................438 Exercise 21: Create and Explore an Information Space in SAP BusinessObjects Explorer .................................................447

2012


437

Unit 9: SAP BusinessObjects Explorer

TBI30

Lesson: Understanding SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Lesson Overview This lesson describes how to build and explore data sets, based on corporate data providers, using SAP BusinessObjects Explorer.


Describe the capabilities of SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Build and explore data sets using SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Analyze data sets Export exploration results

Business Example SAP BusinessObjects Explorer is a web-based search and exploration application that enables business professionals to explore and search through business information. By selecting from available values, you can focus the data set to the set of KPIs that interests you for a specific business question. By default, a ready-formatted chart displays the application's best guess data selection. As your data selection evolves, when you ask yourself further questions, so does the graphical representation of the results. You can easily switch chart formats, sort or rank the presented data depending on your preferred analysis. It is easy to export results of your personal exploration view either as an image or into other applications such as SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence or CSV-compatible office applications to continue further calculations or build reports.

What is SAP BusinessObjects Explorer? SAP BusinessObjects Explorer is a data discovery application that allows you to retrieve answers to your business questions from corporate data quickly and directly. Through the means of search, you can find relevant data that is held within consistent, meaningful datasets known as Information Spaces. To find your answers, you can filter and drill through Information Spaces and view only the data you are interested in via advanced visualizations or charts. You are then able to perform visual analysis to attain the information you are looking for quickly in the most appropriate format.

438


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Understanding SAP BusinessObjects Explorer

Figure 159: Value Proposition

Figure 160: Explore and Find Answers

2012


439


TBI30

Figure 161: SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Data Connectivity

Launching SAP BusinessObjects Explorer You can launch the Explorer as application using SAP BusinessObjects Explorer in BI Launch pad, or you can open and explore an Information Space directly from the BI launch pad document list on the Documents tab. •

•

440

If you launch Explorer as application, you can manage and explore Information Spaces. You can define and create new Information Spaces and you can change existing Information Spaces. You can also schedule the indexing for Information Spaces and open existing Information Spaces for exploration. If you open an Information Space from the document list, you can explore the Information Space.


2012

TBI30


Terms User Profiles There are three user profiles for SAP BusinessObjects Explorer: •

•

Space Explorer – users who search across Information Spaces, explore the data they contain and sometimes export that data to other applications. Space Creator – users who create Information Spaces based on the data available from SAP BusinessObjects universes. Note: These users require authorization to the universes on which they build Information Spaces. Authorization to universes can be set up by your SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise administrator.

•

Administrator – IT specialists who set up and manage corporate deployments of SAP BusinessObjects Explorer, including assigning security rights to end users and scheduling Information Spaces for indexing, so they can be searched by the Explorer search engine.

Information Space An Information Space contains data that you can analyze. It is structured, consistent, and optimized so you can easily find information and always get the right answer to your business questions. The data that an Information Space contains share a contextual meaning, thus providing information for a specific business area or activity. This information can be used to understand a subject (such as product sales) from many different perspectives. For example, you can use an Information Space to see product sales by region, by customer or by product type. Keywords A keyword (or a set of keywords – also known as a search phrase) is used for retrieving Information Spaces that have related content. Facets Facets are used for navigating through Information Spaces. Each facet contains a grouping of labels that are available to you, and when used with keywords the underlying data becomes meaningful. When exploring an Information Space the facets are based on the context of the Information Space. Exploration facets are subdivided into category facets. Furthermore, these facets are either selected facets or suggested facets depending on what you have currently selected. On the left hand side of the facets, the available measures are listed in the measure panel. By default there is always at least one measure value selected.

2012


441


TBI30

Selection of values within facets is easy, you click a value you wish to analyze (such as the 2003 value from a facet called Year). The affect of the selection is dependent on the context of your selection. You can select multiple values by keeping the Shift key or Control key pressed when you make your selections. Tabs Separate operations are displayed within separate tabs. For example, if you perform a search within the Home tab the search results are displayed within the Search results tab.

Managing Information Spaces An Information Space is a collection of objects mapped to data for a specific business operation or activity. For example, an Information Space designed to provide information on regional retail outlets could contain objects mapped to data for Sales Revenue, Region, Store Name, Year, and so on. Only one data provider can be selected when you create an Information Space. However, you can create multiple Information Spaces on a single data provider – each Information Space can contain a sub-set of the total data available, so that analysts can focus easily on a specific area of interest. Note: Power users with the Space Creator user profile create the Information Spaces on top of corporate data providers, i.e. SAP BusinessObjects universes in unx format.

Using Aggregated Values When defining an Information Space you choose objects from a data provider (such as an SAP BusinessObjects universe). You can maintain the measure objects and their values that have been previously created for the data provider. A measure object is often aggregated meaning it has been created using aggregation methods (None, Count, Sum, Min, Max, and Average) during design time. The aggregation methods determine how measure values are calculated and displayed. The aggregation methods are explained in the following table:

442

Method

Description

None

The measure is never aggregated and therefore does not appear in measure


Example

2012

TBI30


Method

Description facets. However, values are displayed within the table view.

Example

Count

The measure is established upon the total number of records that are based upon a grouping. For example, the number of employees within a department.

Number of Employees: 25 Departments: Sales, Marketing, and Finance Count of Employees in the Sales Department: 10

Sum

The measure is based upon the sum of records that match a grouping. For example, the sales revenue for a country throughout two years.

Country: UK, Sales 2001:20000, Sales 2002: 45000. Sum = 65000

Min

The measure is based upon the minimum value of a set of records that match a grouping. For example, the minimum sales revenue for a country throughout two years.

Country: UK, Sales 2001:20000, Sales 2002: 45000. Min = 20000

Max

The measure is based upon the maximum value of a set of records that match a grouping. For example, the maximum sales revenue for a country throughout two years.

Country: UK, Sales 2001:20000, Sales 2002: 45000. Max = 45000

Average

The measure is based upon the average value of a set of records that match a grouping. For example, the average sales revenue for a country throughout two years.

Country: UK, Sales 2001:20000, Sales 2002: 45000. Average = 32500

Note: You can build an Information Space using aggregated values and navigate through the corresponding data using these values.

2012


443


TBI30

Scheduling Scheduling is a way of synchronizing your Information Spaces by stating when you want indexing to occur. Scheduling ensures that the data is refreshed regularly. Scheduling is defined on the Manage Spaces tab. It allows you to index Information Spaces directly in Information Space list with the Index Now button. All indexing runs as a background task but progress can be monitored via the list of Information Spaces within the Manage Spaces tab. For example within the Manage Spaces tab, you can see if the Space is fully indexed and ready for full exploring, or if the indexing failed because of irretrievable data. The types of scheduling you can use are explained in the following table: Scheduling type

Description

Now

The indexing runs as a background task immediately.

None

There is no indexing, this setting is the default for new Information Spaces.

Once

The indexing runs once according to a date and time you specify. It is set via a start time value, and when the value is in the past scheduling runs immediately.

Periodically

You can define below, if the scheduling should run on a by-minute, hourly, daily or weekly basis.

Minutes

The indexing runs on a by-minute basis based upon the minutes value you define. You state when you want the indexing to start and when to end. The first index is created on the start time you have specified.

Hourly

The indexing runs on an hourly basis based upon the hour values you define. You state when you want the indexing to start and when to end. The first index is created on the start time you have specified.

Daily

The indexing runs once every N number of days based upon a start time and an end time. You state when you want the indexing to start and when to end. The first index is created on the start time you have specified.

Weekly

The indexing runs on selected days based upon a start time and an end time you have defined. For example, you can index every week on Monday, Thursday, and Sunday. The first index is created on the start time you have specified.

Indexing Information Spaces Indexing is the method of updating, converting, and sorting Information Space data for easy search and retrieval.

444


2012

TBI30


Indexing is a background task meaning that you do not see it in operation. You can, however, see the progress of indexing via the "Manage Spaces" tab. Additionally indexing does not affect you while you are navigating through an Information Space. For example if the Information Space is being indexed during navigation, it does not update until you close the "Explore" tab. If you are a new user of the Information Space (beginning to explore an Information Space after indexing has finished), you can see index updates. You can also see updates when someone else is exploring the old copy of the Information Space. This handling prevents locking of Information Spaces and other users blocking you from exploration. Hint: The latest available indexed Information Spaces are always displayed in Search Results to ensure that you have access to the most accurate information. So if you perform a search before an Information Space was indexed, only the previously indexed version appears in the results. Once the indexing of the Information Space is complete you see the new version when you search again.

2012


445


446


TBI30

2012

TBI30


Exercise 21: Create and Explore an Information Space in SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Launch Explorer as application • Manage and explore Information Spaces • Schedule the indexing for Information Spaces • Open existing Information Spaces for exploration • Filter and drill through Information Spaces • View data using advanced visualizations or charts • Export your exploration and analysis results

Business Example SAP BusinessObjects Explorer is a data discovery application that allows you to retrieve answers to your business questions from corporate data quickly and directly. To find your answers, you can filter and drill through Information Spaces and view only the data you are interested in via advanced visualizations or charts. You are then able to perform visual analysis to attain the information you are looking for quickly in the most appropriate format.

Task 1: Create an Information Space Create an Information Space using the Warehouse.unx as the data provider. 1.

Launch SAP BusinessObjects Explorer with the following information and create an information space for exploration. Field Name

Value

System

:6400

SAP System

Assigned SAP System

Username

user##

Password

Authentication

SAP


2012


447


2.

TBI30

Choose the data provider on which you want to create an Information Space. Hint: SAP BusinessObjects universes are listed in the Universes folder and Excel files are in Excel spreadsheets.

3.

Fill in the name, (for example, U##_Information_Space), of the Information Space.

4.

Go to the Objects tab and select the following objects as facets for the Information Space. Field Country>Region Country>Country Customer>City Customer>Customer

5.

Select the following objects as measure for the Information Space. Field Sales Revenue>Quantity Sales Revenue>Gross Sales Sales Revenue>Net Sales

6.

Modify the facet display field so the facets are ordered by filtering capability.

7.

Test the compatibility of selected objects

8.

On the Scheduling tab, choose the index scheduling for the Information Space:

9.

To make the Information Space available for exploration immediately, click Index Now.

Task 2: Exploring the information space Perform a search and use the exploration facets to navigate through an Information Space. Use the facets to refine and expose your data. 1.

Perform a search using the keyword Sales and explore the sales data in the information space that contains this search keyword.

2.

Set a filter on the Country facet value to focus on USA and Germany. Continued on next page

448


2012

TBI30


Result You have used the exploration facets to help you pinpoint data, view raw values and locate information.

Task 3: Analyze your data Analyze your data using tables and charts. Using tables and charts allows you to notice patterns and constraints, and to perform comparisons. 1.

Select Germany from the Country measure.

2.

Change the analysis type to read the data

3.

Sort the values by country and restrict the displayed values to the top 3 Gross Sales in Europe.

Result With tables and charts, you have a clearer view without necessary knowing the numbers behind the visualization.

Task 4: Export exploration results Export your exploration and analysis results from the Explore tab, filtered according to your exploration path. Export your results to an image 1.

Export your exploration and analysis results.

2.

Select Image as the output formant.

Result The dataset is exported filtered by your facet selection. Your exploration results are saved as an image for you to download.

2012


449


TBI30

Solution 21: Create and Explore an Information Space in SAP BusinessObjects Explorer Task 1: Create an Information Space Create an Information Space using the Warehouse.unx as the data provider. 1.

2.

Launch SAP BusinessObjects Explorer with the following information and create an information space for exploration. Field Name

Value

System

:6400

SAP System

Assigned SAP System

Username

user##

Password

Authentication

SAP

a)

Click Start → Programs → SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 4.0 → Custom Link to BI Launchpad.

b)

Log on with your username and password.

c)

Click the down arrow beside Applications.

d)

Click Explorer.

e)

Click Manage Spaces.

Choose the data provider on which you want to create an Information Space. Hint: SAP BusinessObjects universes are listed in the Universes folder and Excel files are in Excel spreadsheets. a)

Navigate to Universes → Webi Universes.

b)

Select Warehouse.unx.

c)

Click New.


450


2012

TBI30


3.

4.

Fill in the name, (for example, U##_Information_Space), of the Information Space. a)

On the Properties tab, type the name, description, and any related keywords for the new Information Space.

b)

Leave the Folder location as default.

c)

Select English (United States) for Regional Settings.

Go to the Objects tab and select the following objects as facets for the Information Space. Field Country>Region Country>Country Customer>City Customer>Customer

5.

a)

Click Objects .

b)

Select Country → Region and click the right arrow to move it to the Facet folder.

c)

Select Country → Country and click the right arrow to move it to the Facet folder.

d)

Select Customer → City and click the right arrow to move it to the Facet folder.

e)

Select Customer → Customer and click the right arrow to move it to the Facet folder.

Select the following objects as measure for the Information Space.


2012


451


TBI30

Field Sales Revenue>Quantity Sales Revenue>Gross Sales Sales Revenue>Net Sales

6.

a)

Select Sales Revenue → Quantity and click the right arrow to move it to the Measure folder.

b)

Select Sales Revenue → Gross Sales and click the right arrow to move it to the Measure folder.

c)

Select Sales Revenue → Net Sales and click the right arrow to move it to the Measure folder.

Modify the facet display field so the facets are ordered by filtering capability. a)

In the Facet display field, ensure the option Order facets by filtering capability is selected. Note: Facets and facet groups are displayed in an order determined by Explorer. The order is calculated based on optimizing the number of unique rows available for each dimension. The facets are prioritized on the ability to return search values.

7.

8.

Test the compatibility of selected objects a)

Click Validate.

b)

Click Finish when you are prompted with the message indicating the data definition is correct.

On the Scheduling tab, choose the index scheduling for the Information Space: a)

Click None so there is no indexing at this time. Note: You must have Space Creator or Administrator rights to schedule indexing.

b)

Click OK.


452


2012

TBI30


9.

To make the Information Space available for exploration immediately, click Index Now. a)

Click Index Now, next to the Information Space. Note: If you don't index the new or modified Information Space now, it will be available for exploration only after the scheduled indexing has taken place.

b)

Wait a moment for the indexation to complete. A check mark in the status column indicates that the indexation is finished.

Task 2: Exploring the information space Perform a search and use the exploration facets to navigate through an Information Space. Use the facets to refine and expose your data. 1.

Perform a search using the keyword Sales and explore the sales data in the information space that contains this search keyword. a)

Navigate to the Home tab.

b)

Type Sales in the text box and click Search. The search results are displayed to you in the Search results tab. Note: Within the Search results tab is the Information Space that has the closest match to your search keywords (either in metadata or content). Keyword relevance determines the sorting of Information Spaces and gives them a score. Information Spaces have a description (including information such as the index date), an Information Space icon, list of objects, and a score level. The details of an Information Space are hidden.

c)

Double-click the information space to begin exploration.

d)

Select the measure that you want to focus upon. When you open an Information Space, one measure is already selected. The selected measure is used in the facet and in the visualization pane. If you want to focus on another measure, select the desired measure. The change is immediately taken into account.


2012


453


2.

TBI30

Set a filter on the Country facet value to focus on USA and Germany. a)

In the Country facet, click USA. Observe a filter of Country USA is shown. Click on the filter and select Explore more.

b)

Select Germany and click > to bring it to the Selected Values pane.

c)

Click Done.

Result You have used the exploration facets to help you pinpoint data, view raw values and locate information.

Task 3: Analyze your data Analyze your data using tables and charts. Using tables and charts allows you to notice patterns and constraints, and to perform comparisons. 1.

2.

Select Germany from the Country measure. a)

Delete the filter you created earlier.

b)

Click Germany from the Country measure.

Change the analysis type to read the data a)

Click Chart to ensure that the chart view is active. The visualization changes to the default analysis type.

b)

Click Percentage within the analysis type panel. This changes the visualization of your explored data to a percentage analysis type, the selected chart appears on the analysis type button.

c)

Click Trend within the analysis type panel. The visualization changes to a trend analysis type, the selected chart appears on the analysis type button

d)

Click Comparison. The visualization representing your explored data changes.


454


2012

TBI30


3.

Sort the values by country and restrict the displayed values to the top 3 Gross Sales in Europe. a)

In the pane to the right of the chart, click the Country legend header. The values are displayed in ascending or descending order

b)

Click the arrow beside Gross Sales and then type the number 3 into the Show field.

c)

Press Enter.

Result With tables and charts, you have a clearer view without necessary knowing the numbers behind the visualization.

Task 4: Export exploration results Export your exploration and analysis results from the Explore tab, filtered according to your exploration path. Export your results to an image 1.

Export your exploration and analysis results. a)

2.

Click the Export button located above the navigation facets.

Select Image as the output formant. a)

Click Image.

b)

Click OK.

Result The dataset is exported filtered by your facet selection. Your exploration results are saved as an image for you to download.

2012


455


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the capabilities of SAP BusinessObjects Explorer • Build and explore data sets using SAP BusinessObjects Explorer • Analyze data sets • Export exploration results

456


2012

TBI30

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Describe the capabilities of SAP BusinessObjects Explorer • Build and explore data sets using SAP BusinessObjects Explorer • Analyze data sets • Export exploration results

Related Information

2012


457

Unit Summary

458

TBI30


2012

Unit 10 BI Workspaces Unit Overview This unit describes how to use SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise BI workspaces to manage, understand, monitor, and track your business activities and performance.

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • •

Describe SAP BusinessObjects BI workspaces Create a BI workspace Work with modules

Unit Contents Lesson: Working with BI Workspaces in BI Launchpad ...................460 Procedure: To create a BI workspace:...................................467 Exercise 22: Create a BI Workspace ....................................469

2012


459

Unit 10: BI Workspaces

TBI30

Lesson: Working with BI Workspaces in BI Launchpad Lesson Overview This lesson describes how to use SAP BusinessObjects BI workspaces to design and build BI workspaces and modules


Describe SAP BusinessObjects BI workspaces Create a BI workspace Work with modules

Business Example Management of corporate BI workspaces allow organizations to gain insight from underlying analysis and alter business rules as conditions change. BI workspaces provides a consistent, up-to-date way to monitor critical business areas. It also provides tab-based navigation and page creation capabilities for everyone. You can build applications quickly, without programming, and customize existing applications with a point-and-click assembly.

Understanding BI Workspaces BI workspaces BI workspaces is an SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise BI workspaces and Modules application that helps you manage, understand, monitor, and track your business activities and performance using modules and BI workspaces. A BI workspace allows you to organize and display various SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise data sources, such as Web Intelligence documents, hyperlinks, Crystal reports, non-visual modules, or external pages such as web pages via URL, in a single view. You can analyze and manage complex data effectively and share the information across organizations. BI workspaces provide high visibility of your organizational goals and enables you to monitor your organization's performance and growth. BI workspaces provide a single view of all the elements of business that you need to track on a daily basis as well as Interportlet communication capabilities for enabling page components to talk to each other and exchange information. Note: Every content item that is displayed on the page or in the module library is called a module.

460


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Working with BI Workspaces in BI Launchpad

Figure 162: What is BI Workspaces?

The key capabilities of BI Workspaces include: • • • •

2012

Easy organizing and displaying modules. A simple and intuitive Runtime Authoring environment for designing the workspace pages. An integrated inter-portlet communication framework for enabling components on the page to exchange information. Page Preview and the option to print a page or the entire workspace.


461


TBI30

Figure 163: BI Workspaces

Figure 164: Use Case Scenarios

You build your own portfolio of reports and categories and create one or more BI workspaces and display them as needed.

462


2012

TBI30


BI workspaces can contain the following types of objects: • • • • • • • • • •

Modules Web Intelligence documents, Analysis edition for OLAP documents, and Dashboard Design models Crystal reports Adobe Reader PDF documents Microsoft Excel spreadsheets Microsoft Word documents Text files Rich text (rtf) files Microsoft PowerPoint presentations Hyperlinks

You can store BI workspaces that you create for customizing and viewing into various types of folders in the Documents tab: Public Folders, My Favorites, and Personal Categories Note: •

•

BI workspaces saved in Public Folders contain BI workspaces and modules created for public viewing. These BI workspaces can be accessed and viewed by everyone. BI workspaces saved in My Favorites or Personal Categories contain BI workspaces and modules created for personal viewing. They store information about modules whose parameters can be extended and modified personally. These BI workspaces cannot be accessed and viewed by everyone. A BI workspace, whether saved in Public Folders or Personal Categories, can contain one or more tabs and sub tabs.

Modules in BI Workspaces Modules are templates into which you insert the data that you want to view in your BI workspace. Modules can be based on Web Intelligence documents, Crystal reports, Dashboard Design models, or non-visualization modules, such as Web Page, Text, or Viewer modules displaying data for analysis. You can create and add modules to your BI workspaces to display data in a meaningful and efficient manner.

2012


463


TBI30

Figure 165: Integration with BI Launch Pad

BI Launch pad Modules BI workspace is used as the primary container and BI launch pad leverages the BI workspace tab framework to display different pages. BI launch pad modules included on the home page are: • • • • •

My Inbox My Recently Viewed Documents My Recently Run Documents My Applications Alerts

Compound Module The compound module is a mini BI workspace without tabs and sub tabs. It is integrated with the BI workspace creation workflow. You can create a compound module from BI launch pad. You can create one or more of any combination of modules in a page using a compound module. The modules in a compound module are edited individually. The compound module is useful when you have content that you want to be repeated in more than one BI workspace tab.

464


2012

TBI30


For example, if you want a BI workspace to have a standard title page or header that includes the corporate logo, name, and confidentiality information, you can create a compound module that contains all of this information and save it to a public folder. Note: A compound module can be reused from a saved location similar to a Crystal report or Web Intelligence document.

Text module You use a text module when you want to add a block of text to a BI workspace. The text can be a header, descriptive text, HTML or even an OpenModule hyperlink that opens in a BI workspace viewer. You can create a text module from BI launch pad.

Web Page Module The Web Page module is available in the Templates category of the BI workspace module library. You use it in BI workspace to display web pages or images. You can use either a URL or a relative path to an image.

Navigation List Module A Navigation List module when used with the Viewer module allows you to maximize the space on a BI workspace tab by acting as an active table of contents. You can choose from the multiple styles available for presentation of content in the Navigation List modules.

Viewer Module By default, objects called from a module link, open and occupy the entire BI workspace space. The Viewer module offers a way to display the objects called from Navigation List through module links that use open Module variables. The Viewer also provides an option to resize the modules. Note: The Viewer module is particularly useful with the Navigation List module. You use the Navigation List as a table of contents and the Viewer as the viewing portlet. This saves you BI workspace space.

Creating a Module You create modules to visualize performance levels and trends on specific data. The data can originate from single ad hoc queries on a Web Intelligence report, Crystal report, or Dashboard Design models.

2012


465


TBI30

You can create modules in the following ways: • •

Via BI launch pad. Create a module directly in a BI workspace, where it is saved as an embedded object in the BI workspace.

Creating a BI Workspace A BI workspace can contain useful, informative, and motivating content based on analyzed data. BI workspaces also help to define strategies. BI workspaces and compound modules can be created or edited only inside BI launch pad. This includes OpenDocument and PIK as well, even if the user can edit them by permission. The BI launch pad home page is read-only. You cannot edit BI workspaces or compound modules that were chosen to be home pages.

466


2012

TBI30


To create a BI workspace: 1.

Gather the following information: •

• •

•

2.

A list of information that you want the BI workspace or BI workspace tab to transmit. When creating a corporate BI workspace, analyze your audience to determine the information they need. If you have a lot of information, consider creating categories of information and creating a tab in the BI workspace for each category. A list of content that you want to use. Modules can include Web Intelligence reports, Dashboard Design models, or Crystal reports. A rough sketch of how you want to organize modules on the BI workspace tabs and sub tabs. More information is not always best, and a cluttered, crowded BI workspace is counter-productive. A list of data security issues for corporate BI workspaces. What data is appropriate for your audience? How much detail do you want them to see?

Click Applications → BI workspace. Note: Anyone who has access to public folders can see the changes you make to the BI workspace. Make the necessary changes, such as adding modules to the BI workspace.

2012

3.

Click Save or Save As, provide a name and location for the new BI workspace, and then click OK.

4.

Select a location to save the BI workspace and assign a category and then click OK.

5.

To edit the BI workspace, click Edit BI workspace.


467


468

TBI30


2012

TBI30


Exercise 22: Create a BI Workspace Exercise Objectives After completing this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a BI workspace with a Document Explorer and a Viewer • Create My Inbox, My Alerts, and My Applications modules in the BI workspace • Adjust the docking layout in the BI workspace • Define the BI workspace as the default home tab in BI launch pad

Business Example As a sales manager, you need to create a BI workspace that offers up-to-date access to some sales information and reports in SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform and save it as a corporate BI workspace in the “Public Folders” node. You can then use this BI workspace to share it with other sales managers.

Task 1: Create a new BI workspace 1.

Log on to the BI launch pad using the following information: Field Name

Value

System

:6400

SAP System

Assigned SAP System

SAP Client

800

Username

user##

Password

Assigned password

2.

Launch BI worksapce inside BI launch pad.

3.

Customize the layout of the BI workspace.

4.

Build a workspace that exposes My Inbox, My Alerts, My Applications.

5.

Add a Web Page Module to the workspace to display the RSS feed from SAP Developer Network (SDN).


2012


469


6.

7.

TBI30

Field

Value

URL

http://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/servlet/prt/portal/prtmode/rss/prtroot/feedserver?rid=/webcontent/uuid/c260e75d-0501-0010-67b9-f5032eac009a

Add a folder module (Document Explorer) to the workspace so that it contains all documents from this folder: Field

Value

Folder

Corporate lists → Folder Corporate lists → BI Training → User Area → User ##

Add a viewer module to the workspace.

Result You have created a BI workspace.

Task 2: Save the workspace Save the page as the basis of your worksapce to the public folder in the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform. 1.

Save the page as the basis of your worksapce by clicking the Save icon in the toolbar.

2.

Navigate to your User ## folder inside Public Folders and name it User## Workspace.

Result The BI workspace tab name is updated with its new name.

Task 3: Define the workspace as the default Home tab in BI launch pad 1.

In the BI launch pad, select the Home tab and customize the user preference.

2.

Select your BI workspace and set it as the default home tab..

3.

Log out and then log back into BI launch pad.


470


2012

TBI30


Result You have replaced the Home tab by your own BI workspace.

2012


471


TBI30

Solution 22: Create a BI Workspace Task 1: Create a new BI workspace 1.

2.

Log on to the BI launch pad using the following information: Field Name

Value

System

:6400

SAP System

Assigned SAP System

SAP Client

800

Username

user##

Password

Assigned password

a)

Click Start → Programs → SAP BusinessObjects BI platform 4.0 → Custom Link to BI Launchpad

b)

Log on with your username and password

Launch BI worksapce inside BI launch pad. a)

Click Applications.

b)

Click BI workspace. A new tab opens with the name New BI workspace.

3.

4.

5.

Customize the layout of the BI workspace. a)

From the Layout dropdown list, select Columns.

b)

Click Add Column to create a new column until you have 5 columns in the layout.

c)

Use the layout divider to adjust the width of the columns to a ratio of approximately 10:20:30:30:10.

Build a workspace that exposes My Inbox, My Alerts, My Applications. a)

Click the Expand Module Library >> icon on the left side of BI workspace to display the Module library.

b)

Click the BI Launch Pad Modules icon in the Module Library toolbar.

c)

Drag and drop My Inbox to column 4.

d)

Drag and drop My Alerts to column 4, below the My Inbox area.

e)

Drag and drop My Applications to column 5.

Add a Web Page Module to the workspace to display the RSS feed from SAP Developer Network (SDN). Continued on next page

472


2012

TBI30


Field

Value

URL

http://www.sdn.sap.com/irj/servlet/prt/portal/prtmode/rss/prtroot/feedserver?rid=/webcontent/uuid/c260e75d-0501-0010-67b9-f5032eac009a

a)

Click the Templates icon in the Module Library toolbar.

b)

Drag and drop Web Page Module to column 3.

c)

Mouse over the top menu bar of the Web Page Module and click Edit.

d)

Type the address to the web page URL field so the module displays the RSS feed from SDN.

e)

Click OK. Note: Adjust the column width if necessary

6.

7.

Add a folder module (Document Explorer) to the workspace so that it contains all documents from this folder: Field

Value

Folder

Corporate lists → Folder Corporate lists → BI Training → User Area → User ##

a)

Click the Document Exlorer icon in the Module Library toolbar.

b)

Navigate to the indicated folder..

c)

Drag and drop the User## object to column 1.

Add a viewer module to the workspace. a)

Click the Templates icon in the Module Library toolbar.

b)

Drag and drop the Viewer object to column 2. The Document Explorer module is now connected to the Viewer module.

Result You have created a BI workspace.


2012


473


TBI30

Task 2: Save the workspace Save the page as the basis of your worksapce to the public folder in the SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform. 1.

Save the page as the basis of your worksapce by clicking the Save icon in the toolbar. a)

2.

Click Save.

Navigate to your User ## folder inside Public Folders and name it User## Workspace. a)

Click the Folder icon in the toolbar to create a new folder.

b)

Navigate to Public Folders → BI Training → User Area → User ##.

c)

Save your BI workspace as User## Workspace and click Save.

Result The BI workspace tab name is updated with its new name.

Task 3: Define the workspace as the default Home tab in BI launch pad 1.

2.

In the BI launch pad, select the Home tab and customize the user preference. a)

In the BI launch pad, click Preferences.

b)

Uncheck the option Use Default Settings (Administrator defined).

Select your BI workspace and set it as the default home tab.. a)

Navigate to the Set BI launch pad start page.

b)

Click the Select Home tab radio button.

c)

Click Browse Home tab.

d)

Navigate to the folder that contains your User## Workspace.

e)

Select User##e Workspace and click Open.

f)

Click Save & Close. Note: Click OK if prompted with a confirmation message.


474


2012

TBI30


3.

Log out and then log back into BI launch pad. a)

Click Log Off.

b)

Log into BI launch pad.

Result You have replaced the Home tab by your own BI workspace.

2012


475


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Describe SAP BusinessObjects BI workspaces • Create a BI workspace • Work with modules

476


2012

TBI30

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Describe SAP BusinessObjects BI workspaces • Create a BI workspace • Work with modules

2012


477

Unit Summary

478

TBI30


2012

Unit 11 Publications & Scheduling Unit Overview

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • •

Create a publication for Web Intelligence documents Create a publication for SAP Crystal Reports

Unit Contents Lesson: Creating a Publication ...............................................480 Procedure: Creating a Publication for SAP Crystal Reports..........481

2012


479

Unit 11: Publications & Scheduling

TBI30

Lesson: Creating a Publication Lesson Overview In this lesson you will learn how to create a publication for SAP Crystal Reports or Web Intelligence documents while keeping the security intact.


Create a publication for Web Intelligence documents Create a publication for SAP Crystal Reports

Business Example You need to implement a scheduling process for distributing reports to a large set of users and users groups

Publications A publication allows you to schedule an object for a large set of user groups or a set of users and define specific rules about the output format and delivery to each of the recipients. In combination with the server-side trust, you can use a publication to schedule a SAP Crystal Reports or SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence object by keeping the data-level security from your SAP NetWeaver BW system without the need to replicate it. The SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise system can act on behalf of the SAP users in a password-free way and thus schedule the report of each SAP user (multipass bursting). Note: For those who are more familiar with the SAP products than the SAP BusinessObjects products, you can compare a publication with the Information Broadcasting functionality offered as part of SAP NetWeaver Business Warehouse.

480


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Creating a Publication

Creating a Publication for SAP Crystal Reports Use A publication allows the administrator to configure a scheduling process for a large set of users and user groups and define how the outcome of the scheduling process is distributed to the users. To create a publication in BusinessObjects Enterprise:

Procedure 1.

Log on to the Central Management Console.

Figure 166: CMC

2.

Click Folders.

Figure 167: Click Folders


2012


481


3.

Navigate to the folder of your reports.

4.

Select the menu Manage → New → Publication.

TBI30

Figure 168: Select the Menu

5.

Enter the Title and Description for the publication.

6.

Click Source Documents.

Figure 169: Click Source Documents

7.

Click Add.


482


2012

TBI30


Figure 170: Click Add

8.

Navigate to the folder for the report object.

Figure 171: Navigate to the Folder for the Report Object

9.

Select the report. Continued on next page

2012


483


TBI30

10. Click OK.

Figure 172: Click OK

11. Click Enterprise Recipients.

Figure 173: Click Enterprise Recipients

12. Click Group List. 13. Select the required groups from the list of available groups. 14. Click the right arrow and move the groups to the list of selected groups. Note: The workflow for adding users is identical. In this example, you will continue with the user groups. 15. Click Destinations.


484


2012

TBI30


Figure 174: Destinations

16. Select the option Business Objects Inbox. 17. Click Additional Options and select Advanced. 18. Select the option One database fetch per recipient (recommended when using row level security within Universes or Business Views). 19. Click Save & Close.

Figure 175: Click OK

20. Select the newly created publication. 21. Select the menu Actions → Schedule.


2012


485


TBI30

Figure 176: Select

22. Click Enterprise Recipients to verify the settings from the publication. 23. Click Schedule. Note: After a successful scheduling process you should be able to see the result in BI launch pad for the users that have been configured as recipients.

Workflow for Publication with Server Side Trust This image briefly outlines the workflow of publication and the scheduling process resulting out of the publication leveraging the granted server side trust to achieve impersonation.

486


2012

TBI30


Figure 177: Publication and Scheduling Workflow with SNC and Impersonation

2012


487


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Create a publication for Web Intelligence documents • Create a publication for SAP Crystal Reports

488


2012

TBI30

Unit Summary

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Create a publication for Web Intelligence documents • Create a publication for SAP Crystal Reports

2012


489

Unit Summary

490

TBI30


2012

Unit 12 Integrating with SAP Enterprise Portal Unit Overview


Understand the most important functionalities for creating portal content like iViews, Pages, their layout, etc. Tasks necessary to be realized for creating new roles and content for end users Understand the procedure to follow in order to integrate SAP Business Objects in an Enterprise Portal Installation. Enable you to configure the templates for proper working within a Enterprise Portal

Unit Contents Lesson: Integrating BI Platform Content into SAP Enterprise Portal.....492 Lesson: Integration of SAP Business Objects with Enterprise Portal ....500 Lesson: Comparing Document Viewer and Document List Portal Component ......................................................................507

2012


491

Unit 12: Integrating with SAP Enterprise Portal

TBI30

Lesson: Integrating BI Platform Content into SAP Enterprise Portal Lesson Overview The Enterprise Portal of SAP Netweaver allows to unify the access to resources and functionality of different systems in one single point. This lesson will introduce you to the most important objects and concepts of the Enterprise Portal for integrating objects from the SAP BI Platform into SAP EP.


Understand the most important functionalities for creating portal content like iViews, Pages, their layout, etc. Tasks necessary to be realized for creating new roles and content for end users

Business Example It is your task to setup roles composed of different iViews, pages and worksets in order to give the user an access to BOE reporting objects via the SAP NW Enterprise Portal in order to use the existing EP infrastructure as a unifying access to different functionalities, including BOE reporting objects like Webi Reports, Crystal Reports or Dashboard designed with the Dashboard Designer.

Basic Concepts of SAP EP

Figure 178: Basic Concepts of SAP EP

492


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Integrating BI Platform Content into SAP Enterprise Portal

Using SAP NetWeaver Portal, organizations can give their employees, customers, partners, and suppliers a single point of access to the company applications, services, and information needed for conducting daily work. In addition, the portal offers business users the capability to easily create and manage portal pages and to generate their own portal content. Two usage types are associated with SAP NetWeaver Portal: • •

EP Core – Application Portal (EPC) is a lean portal installation, applicable when full enterprise portal capabilities are not required. Enterprise Portal (EP) includes the Collaboration and Knowledge Management add-on capabilities. The prerequisite for EP is EPC.

The following use cases are available with SAP NetWeaver Portal: •

Providing Unified Access to Applications and Processes –

•

SAP NetWeaver Portal (usage types EPC and EP) provides the core portal capabilities required to standard content to both internal and external portal users. The portal offers a single point of access through a Web front end to both SAP and non-SAP information sources, enterprise applications, information repositories, databases and services across organizational and technical boundaries. Managing and Mashing up Portal Pages with Web Page Composer –

•

Web Page Composer is an integral part of SAP NetWeaver Portal. It enables business users to easily create and manage enriched portal pages that blend business applications and user-generated content. Web Page Composer also allows professionals to create interactive portal pages. Building Communities with Wikis and Forums –

Portal users can create and build communities by establishing wikis and forums as the means to easily share and contribute knowledge and information. Forums provide the ability to share knowledge by communicating and delivering information to people with similar interests. Wikis provides a framework for collaborative writing and posting ideas and feedback, in order to share and manage knowledge and information.

Running Content Management Scenarios •

2012

Knowledge Management (KM) is one of the basic content services provided by SAP NetWeaver portal It enables customers to run basic KM scenarios and to use an extension framework for customizing implementations.


493


TBI30

SAP Netweaver Portal Desktop

Figure 179: SAP Netweaver Portal Desktop

For portal users, a portal desktop defines the structural layout and design of the portal workspace displayed on the screen. It is a structured collection of iViews, pages, themes, and layouts, which can be personalized at runtime. In the design time environment, a portal desktop is a collection of framework pages and portal themes, which is defined and customized by content and system administrators, and ultimately assigned to portal users through portal display rules. Framework page: Defines the layout of navigational and structural elements in the portal desktop. A portal desktop may contain more than one framework page. The administrator responsible for configuring the portal desktop object sets the active framework page. Portal theme Defines the overall look-and-feel of user interface elements in a portal desktop, such as color, contrast, and font usage. A portal desktop may contain more than one portal theme. The administrator responsible for configuring the portal desktop object sets the default portal theme. Portal desktops combine personalization and scenario-based options for portal users at runtime:

494


2012

TBI30


The flexibility of framework pages enables administrators to design custom-made navigation layouts that suit various portal user experiences. For example, thin desktops can support dial-up connections, while customized framework pages support different navigational needs for a company's employee intranet and customer-based extranet. Portal users automatically receive the appropriate framework page based on transparent display rules, which are predefined by the portal administrator. Administrators assign multiple themes to a desktop to provide portal users with the freedom to choose a portal theme to personalize the look and feel of their portal desktop.

The System Landscape Directory

Figure 180: The System Landscape Directory

The System Landscape Overview appears upon navigation to System Administration System Configuration. It is a multipurpose system management tool encompassing two primary purposes: • • •

Displaying all the systems comprising the system landscape. Associating systems with system aliases to provide back-end connectivity. The System Landscape Overview also provides alternative access to the system editors and utilities available from the Portal Catalog context menu.

Activities to be realized in the System Landscape Directory (SLD)

2012


495


TBI30

The System Landscape Overview is a table listing all the systems in the system landscape. The overview also provides the following capabilities: •

Associate system aliases and systems –

•

Systems appear by their system aliases. Since a system can have multiple aliases, the same system can appear in multiple records. – You can assign unassigned system aliases to systems by choosing an alias from the dropdown list in the System Name field. – You can assign unassigned systems to system aliases by choosing an alias from a system from the dropdown list in the System Alias field. Full sorting and filtering –

•

You can filter the system landscape list by using the dropdown lists or free text for any column and for multiple columns. You can sort the columns as well by clicking the column headings. Checking system connections

– – •

Selecting a system, or multiple systems, and choosing Test Connection verifies the system connection to its back end. The system landscape overview provides information about the previous connection test, including details in the event of failure.

Locating a system in the Portal Catalog Selecting a system and choosing Locate in Portal Catalog highlights the selected system in its location under in the Portal Catalog. – Selecting a system and choosing Edit System displays the Properties editor of the selected system. Identifying the user management type

–

•

–

•

The system landscape overview shows the user management type configured for the system, such use of a logon ticket or user ID and password; this indicates how the system is authorized to access data. – Since systems typically access data from a back-end source, the connector to the back end may require user mapping. For more information, see Editing System Properties. The user mapping type is defined in the system properties. From the Properties editor, you can access the System Alias editor. –

496

Viewing and checking the connectivity of roles uploaded to the portal from SAP Business Suite packages


2012

TBI30


The Portal Content Administration

Figure 181: The Portal Content Administration

The content administrator is responsible for all tasks that are relevant to the creation and management of content objects in the portal. Portal users can gain access to portal content that resides in document repositories, internal and external services, reports and analytics, and business transactions in enterprise applications. Content should be developed in a way that enables members of the organization to connect to their information repositories from the portal, retrieve data, and interact with this data through a usable interface. Portal Content Objects Portal content consists primarily of iViews. Each iView brings specified data to the portal desktop from an information resource such as a relational database, ERP system, CRM system, enterprise application, collaboration tool, e-mail exchange system, intranet, or the Internet. iViews return up-to-the-minute information each time they are launched. You can import ready-made iViews into your portal environment from the Portal Content Portfolio on SAP Developer Network, you can create iViews from templates provided with the portal, or you can develop custom-made iViews using the content-creation tools in the portal or other content development kits. iViews are generally displayed through portal pages. You can import predefined pages or you can create your own pages. The page definition includes a list of associated iViews and layout specifications. Also available for import from the Portal Content Portfolio on SAP Developer Network are worksets and business packages. Worksets bundle related pages, iViews, and roles, while business packages are generally groups of related worksets.

2012


497


TBI30

User access to content is determined by role definitions. A portal role is a collection of task-oriented content. While portal content is developed to enable access to information relevant to the organization in which the portal is deployed, roles define the subset of content available to each function within the organization. Users are assigned to the role or roles that provide content relevant to them. A user has access to the content that has been assigned to all of his or her roles. The role definition determines the navigation structure within the portal. The navigation structure consists of the top-level navigation bar, and the detailed navigation tree. A user navigates portal content by clicking tabs in the top-level navigation and detailed navigation. Portal Content Studio The Portal Content Studio is the content administrators main environment for developing and managing portal content. The range of functionality that you have in managing portal content depends on the configuration of your portal.

498


2012

TBI30


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the most important functionalities for creating portal content like iViews, Pages, their layout, etc. • Tasks necessary to be realized for creating new roles and content for end users

2012


499


TBI30

Lesson: Integration of SAP Business Objects with Enterprise Portal Lesson Overview This lessen explains the files and objects that are necessary to integrate SAP Business Objects with the Enterprise Portal as well as the procedures necessary to follow.


Understand the procedure to follow in order to integrate SAP Business Objects in an Enterprise Portal Installation.

Business Example Procedure of Integrating SAP BI Platform Objects 1.

Install the files of the portal integration kit which you can find in the installation directory of the SAP BI platform installation. •

2. 3.

500

First install the com.sap.businessobjects.iviews.par file via the JSPM or NWDI. • Transport the com.sap.businessobjects.iviews.templates.epa files Configure the source system in the SLD Create your role with the corresponding pages and iViews that reference the objects in the BOE repository


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Integration of SAP Business Objects with Enterprise Portal

Transporting the EPA File to the Portal

Figure 182: Transporting the EPA File to the Portal

In order to transport an .EPA file into the portal please proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

2012

Navigate to System Administration → Transport → Transport packages → Import. Select the EPA file from the directory where you put the file before, well from the server or from the workstation/client. Upload the file. A summary of the objects contained in the transport will appear. Import the objects to the portal.


501


TBI30

Figure 183: Confirming the Correct Transport and Finding the Templates in the Portal Content Directory

You can find two iView templates after the import in the Portal Content Directory (PCD): •

SAP Business Objects Document List Template: The document list iView will provide users with many of the same features BI launch pad provides. Users can navigate all reports they have permissions to view, view personal folders, and browse categories. They can also edit reports, schedule report refreshes or manually refresh reports, search BI content, and set user preferences (if they have appropriate permissions).

SAP Business Objects Document Viewer Template: This is the simplest type of portal component you can create. This iView displays a single report selected by the portal administrator at the time they deploy it. Users will see the report when the iView portal page is displayed. They can navigate within the report normally, but cannot navigate to any other reports unless the default report contains linked reports. The portal page designer or administrator configures the content that is displayed in the iView.

502


2012

TBI30


Configuring a Source System in the System Landscape Directory

Figure 184: Configuring a Source System in the System Landscape Directory

2012


503


TBI30

Procedure to configure a source system connection, to be realized in the “System Landscape Directory”: 1.

2. 3. 4.

Create a source system using the source system template SAP Business Objects System which can be found in Portal Content → Content provided by SAP → SAP Business Objects → iViews. Fill in the values of the fields System Name, System ID and IDPrefix (e.g. Training BIP Default System, BIP_DEF_SYS, com.sap). In the next screen, type in an system alias (e.g. BIP_DEF_SYS_ALIAS). Finish the creation and open the source system properties via right click on the newly created entry for the source system. Click on All and then Modify properties. You will need to provide the following information for this step: •

•

•

•

504

Under the SAP BusinessObjects property category, enter the fully qualified URL for the SAP BusinessObjects BI platform, for example http://.wdf.sap.corp:8080/BOE/. Under the User Management property category, set the Authentication Ticket Type to SAP Assertion Ticket, and the Logon Method to SAPLOGONTICKET. Under the Connector property category, configure Group, Logical System Name, Message Server, Remote Host Type, SAP Client, SAP System ID (SID), System Type, and any other applicable fields with the appropriate information for your system. Configure the fields SNC Library Path, SNC Mode and SNCName if you use Secure Network Communication. Save the settings and test the connection.


2012

TBI30


Connector Properties for a BI platform Source System in Enterprise Portal

Figure 185: Connector Properties for a BI platform Source System in Enterprise Portal

In the above slide you can see sample settings for a successful connection to a server using the BW system for authentication.

2012


505


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the procedure to follow in order to integrate SAP Business Objects in an Enterprise Portal Installation.

506


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Comparing Document Viewer and Document List Portal Component

Lesson: Comparing Document Viewer and Document List Portal Component Lesson Overview The two main templates for iViews that come with the Portal Integration Kit are the document viewer and the document list portal component. This lessen describes how to configure the templates.


Enable you to configure the templates for proper working within a Enterprise Portal

Business Example Comparing Document Viewer and Document list Portal Component Two main iView Templates are Available: 1.

SAP BO Document Viewer • •

2.

For visualizing single BO Reporting objects in the Enterprise Portal. Both CUIDs (Unique character String) or IDs (unique numeric value) can be used to identify the object. SAP BO Document List

• •

Encapsulates most of the functionality of the BI Launchpad within a single iView. The navigation to the requested object is realized via the navigation offered by the BI Launchpad.

SAP Business Objects Document List Template: The document list iView will provide users with many of the same features BI launch pad provides. Users can navigate all reports they have permissions to view, view personal folders, and browse categories. They can also edit reports, schedule report refreshes or manually refresh reports, search BI content, and set user preferences (if they have appropriate permissions). SAP Business Objects Document Viewer Template: This is the simplest type of portal component you can create. This iView displays a single report selected by the portal administrator at the time they deploy it. Users will see the report when

2012


507


TBI30

the iView portal page is displayed. They can navigate within the report normally, but cannot navigate to any other reports unless the default report contains linked reports. The portal page designer or administrator configures the content that is displayed in the iView. SAP Business Objects KM Integration: SAP NetWeaver provides Knowledge Management & Collaboration (KMC) capabilities via the SAP Netweaver Portal (SAP EP). While this feature is currently available, it is no longer being actively developed, meaning that no new features or upgrades are planned for the future. Users currently using this solution are recommended to consider moving to the SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise XI iViews Document List portal component. For more information check the Portal Integration Kit Installation Guide.

Figure 186: The SAP Business Objects Document Viewer – Setup Step 1

In order to configure the iView Template SAP Business Objects Document Viewer, start by creating a new iView based on the template SAP Business Objects Document Viewer. You can start this process by right-clicking on the PCD Folder where you want to store the iView. Choose New → iView → iView based on template. Later on choose the template SAP Business Objects Document viewer. Give the iView a name, ID and a ID prefix. Afterwards open the properties for further configuration (see next slide).

508


2012

TBI30



Set the source system and the type of document ID. Choose then the BOE object to be called when opening the iView.


2012


509


TBI30

Figure 189: The SAP Business Objects List Component – Setup Step 1

Setting up the document list viewer iView is very easy. Define the system to connect to and specify the BI Launch Pad path (default = “BI”). Preview your access to the BI Launchpad.

510


2012

TBI30


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Enable you to configure the templates for proper working within a Enterprise Portal

2012


511

Unit Summary

TBI30

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the most important functionalities for creating portal content like iViews, Pages, their layout, etc. • Tasks necessary to be realized for creating new roles and content for end users • Understand the procedure to follow in order to integrate SAP Business Objects in an Enterprise Portal Installation. • Enable you to configure the templates for proper working within a Enterprise Portal

512


2012

Unit 13 Lifecycle Management Unit Overview

Unit Objectives After completing this unit, you will be able to: • • •

Configure the LCM Create and monitor “Promotion Jobs” for transporting BO objects from one BOE instance to another Understand the requirements for and possibilities of integrating the LCM with Netweaver based CTS+

Unit Contents Lesson: Lifecycle Management ...............................................514

2012


513

Unit 13: Lifecycle Management

TBI30

Lesson: Lifecycle Management Lesson Overview This lesson will show you what infrastructure is offered by SAP BO BI for supporting object consistency across systems.


Configure the LCM Create and monitor “Promotion Jobs” for transporting BO objects from one BOE instance to another Understand the requirements for and possibilities of integrating the LCM with Netweaver based CTS+

Business Example It is your task to setup an infrastructure for transporting consistently BO objects like reports, connections, etc across the system landscape of your SAP BO BI platform system landscape. You decide to use the Lifecycle Management Console to do so. In addition it is your task to create promotion jobs for transporting objects by yourself and to introduce the usage of this tool to other BO developers in the team.

Figure 190: SAP BO Lifecycle Management Console – Purpose

In order to manage more complex implementations of SAP BI BO, it is necesary to implement a solution for the life cycle management of the objects created and managed in SAP BI BO. In version 4.0, the Lifecycle Manager is delivered as a

514


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Lifecycle Management

standard functionality with the standard installation of SAP BI BO. It supports the administrators and developers to package the developments in transportable groups of objects and helps to detect the dependencies of objects to be tranported to other objects, which initially are not needed to be added manually to the transport. The Lifecycle Management Console comes both with a Web Interface and as a command line tool.

Figure 191: LCM Console Features

The LCM comes with a wide range of functionality in order to support the tasks related with the software management. It establishes procedures for governing the entire lifecycle of a object within the scope of BO Objects which can be (among others): • • • • • • •

Crystal Reports Webi reports Xclesius Dashboards Folders Connections Universes LiveOffice Documents

In case that an objects needs other objects for working correctly in the target environment, the LCM offers the possibility to let it analyze which other objects are necessary in order to make the object work in the destination. This functionality offers a considerable improvement compared to a manual collection process of objects in both speed and quality. Several objects are gathered in a definition of a “Promotion job” which includes not only what needs to be transported but also when and to where the objects are transported.

2012


515


TBI30

Core features of the LCM are: 1. 2.

3.

4. 5.

6. 7.

8.

Promotion of objects via jobs, creating, managing, scheduling, deleting and modifying jobs. Management of dependencies in order to select, filter and adding the objects whose existence is necessary for a specific object before it can become alive in an instance. Creating promotion jobs allows the administrator or developer to plan object synchronization processes as single executions or as regular object synchronization mechanism. Security: The LCM allows, if configured correspondingly, to transport the security settings for a specific objects from one server instance to another. Test promotions: You can test a promotion before implementing it for real in the destination system. This helps to improve the overall quality of your system from the software maintenance point of view. Rollback and partial rollback: This feature allows you to undo a change caused by a promotion job. Auditing: In order to keep track of who did what when you can activate the auditing functionality for the LCM, tracking activities and responsibilities for changes being made. Version Management: This feature allows to save different versions of a document

Figure 192: LCM in a SAP BO BI Landscape

The LCM is defined in a single but in any of the SAP BO BI Enterprise instances in a landscape. Once decided on which instance to run, connections to other systems are defined in order to establish the necessary communication channels. You transport objects from one system to another by defining “Promotion Jobs” which will initiate the transfer of objects (Crystal Reports, Webi Documents, etc) from one instance to another. A promotion job can be scheduled in different ways and the history of execution will help you to monitor its execution and analyze problems that might occur while promoting objects.

516


2012

TBI30


Figure 193: LCM Console Basics

Figure 194: LCM User Interface Components

The lifecycle management console tool home page is divided into the following panels: • • • • •

Lifecycle management console workspace toolbar Workspace panel Tree panel Administrator and Details panel Shopping Cart and Job Viewer page

Lifecycle management console workspace toolbar

2012


517


TBI30

The lifecycle management console workspace toolbar displays the options that you can use to perform operations such as creating and deleting a folder, creating a new job, editing, promoting, rolling back a job, importing a BIAR file and checking properties. Workspace panel The Workspace panel in the lifecycle management console home page displays the list of newly created jobs. You can use this panel to view the name of the job, status of the job, job creation information, promotion summary, test promotion summary, dependency management screens, and information about the destination system. Tree panel The Tree panel in the lifecycle management console home page displays the tree structure, which includes the Promotion Jobs folder and the Promotion Status folder. The newly created jobs are displayed in a hierarchical structure under the Promotion Jobs folder. The promoted jobs are listed according to their status of promotion in the Promotion Status folder. Administrator and Details panel The Administrator and Details panel includes the Administration Options link. The system administrator can use this link to access the Administration options. It also includes the Preferences link that enables the administrator and users to set the lifecycle management console preferences. The Help and About links enable you to obtain more information about using the lifecycle management console tool. Shopping Cart and Job Viewer page A Shopping Cart is a dynamically generated hierarchical tree list that contains a list of the infoobjects to be promoted. It displays the root folder and the objects folder for both selected and dependent objects. The Job Viewer page enables you to view the infoobjects that are added to a job.

Figure 195: Administration Options

The Administration options enable you to configure settings before promoting infoobjects from one SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise deployment to another SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise deployment and SAP deployment. This section describes how to use the administration options.

518


2012

TBI30


To access the Administration options, click the Administration Options link in the “Promotion Jobs” screen. The “Administration Options” dialog box appears. This dialog box displays the following options: • •

• •

•

Manage Systems – This option enables you to add and remove the host systems. Override Settings – This option enables you to override the properties of infoobjects such as data connection, CR connection, and QaaWs, within the job that were promoted to the destination system. It overrides the properties of infoobjects that were promoted from the source system. Rollback Settings – This option enables you to configure the rollback process at the system level. Job Settings – This option enables you to specify the number of job instances that can exist in lifecycle management console system at any instance of time. If the number of jobs exceed the specified number, they are automatically deleted. It also enables the user to specify the number of days for a job, after which the job must be deleted from the lifecycle management console. VMS Settings – This option enables you to configure version management systems.

Figure 196: Detecting and Managing Dependencies of Objects

In an SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise environment, infoobjects are dependent on other infoobjects. For example, an Web Analysis document is dependent on the underlying Universe for its structure, content, and so on. While promoting an object, you can select and filter the dependents that you want to promote, or permit the promotion of all the dependents to another SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise system. To select and filter the dependents you want to promote along with the infoobject, you must use the Manage Dependencies option. If you do not use this option, the dependents are not promoted along with the job. The following table discusses options that you can use to manage the dependents:

2012


519


TBI30

Types of Dependency objects

Description

Universe for selected report

Promotes the universe for which the selected object is dependent

Selected universes, Universe restriction set universes and Universe restriction set

Promotes universes that are dependent on other universes and restriction set

Access level sets on selected objects

Promotes access levels that are used on the selected infoobjects

Connections used by selected universes Promotes universe connection objects that are used by the selected infoobjects.

• • • • •

•

520

Business Views for selected reports

Promotes BusinessViews, Business elements, Data foundation, LOVs, that the selected infoobject depends on

Events, calendars, profiles used by selected

Promotes event, calendar, and user profile objects that are used by a selected publication publication.

Promotes the universe on which the selected inUniverse for selected reports foobject is dependent. Promotes universes that are dependent on other Selected universes, Universe restriction set universes and Universe restriction set. Promotes access levels that are used on the seAccess levels set on selected objects lected infoobjects. Promotes universe connection objects that are Connections used by selected universes used by the selected infoobjects. Promotes Business Views, Business elements, Data foundation, data connection, and List of Values (LoVs) that the selected infoobjects depend on. Business Views for selected reports Promotes event, calendar, and user profile objects that are used by a selected publication.


2012

TBI30


Figure 197: Creating an Executing a Promotion Job

In addition to create a new job from scratch you can create a new job also by copying it from an existing one. To create a new job by copying an existing job, complete the following steps: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Log into the lifecycle management console tool. In the “Promotion Jobs” home page, click New Job. Click the Copy an Existing Job option. The list of jobs in the Promotion Jobs folder is displayed. Select the required job from the job list, and click Create. •

5. 6.

The name, keywords, and description of the job are displayed. You can modify these fields, if required. • However, you cannot change the source system. In the Save Job in field, browse and select the folder in which you want to save the job, and click Create. A new job is created.

Searching for a Job

2012


521


TBI30

The search feature in the lifecycle management console tool enables you to locate a job that is available in the lifecycle management console repository. To search for a job, complete the following steps: 1. 2.

3.

In the Search field of the lifecycle management console home page, enter the text that you want to locate. Select the list that appears beside the Search field to specify the search parameters. The lifecycle management console tool supports the following search parameters: a) Search Title b) Search Keyword c) Search Description d) Search All Fields Click the Search icon.

Figure 198: Initiating a Rollback

In order to undo an undesired change of an object in the target system of a promotion, you can rollback a complete promotion or roll it back partially. In the second case, select the objects which change you want to undo and execute “Partial rollback”. In order to enable the rollback functionality, you need to set the corresponding flag for a system in the Administration Options → Rollback settings. By default this flag is set.

Figure 199: Logging

522


2012

TBI30


In order to switch on the traces necessary for recording auditing information, you need to turn on the specified traces as indicated in the following paragraph: • • • • •

To set the trace log level to high in the CMC: Launch CMCApp → Application → Central Management Console. Right-click, and select Trace log settings. Select log level as High. To set the trace log level high in AdaptiveProcessingServer:

•

– Launch CMCApp → Servers → AdaptiveProcessingServer. – Right-click, and select Properties → Trace log service. – Select log level as High. To set the trace log level high in AdaptiveJobServer: – – –

Launch CMCApp → Servers → AdaptiveJobServer. Right-click, and select Properties → Trace log service. Select log level as High.

Figure 200: Security I

Authorizations and Security The lifecycle management console tool allows you to log into the source system only if you have adequate permissions. However, to promote a job, the user must have adequate permissions on both the source and the destination systems. The lifecycle management console tool allows you to log into different CMSs while creating, editing, or promoting a job. You can select the appropriate CMS from the CMS drop-down list, provided you have adequate rights. The administrator creates the list of CMSs that the lifecycle management tool users can log into. You can also add new CMSs to the list. Whenever you log into a CMS, the lifecycle management console tool stores your login credentials in the job session. Hence, you need not log into the same CMS multiple times within a single session. The following table lists the permission types required to perform various operations with the lifecycle management console tool:

2012


523


TBI30

User rights on the console

Operations

Create job

To create a job

Edit job

To edit jobs and folders, add infoobjects, user groups and folders

Promote job

To promote or test a job

Delete job

To delete a job

Export a LCMBIAR file

To expert as an LCMBIAR file

Edit an LCMBIAR file

To edit an LCMBIAR file

Rollback job

To rollback a job completely or partially

Use administration options

To set the options for administration of systems and other settings

Edit connection properties

To edit the properties of a connection

Use Version Management

To set the version control system

Figure 201: Security II

524


2012

TBI30


Figure 202: Working with the CTS+ of the Netweaver Stack – Requirements

More informationon LCM can be found at http://help.sap.com/businessobject/product_guides/boexir4/en/xi4_lcm_user_en.pdf For more information about using Solution Manager as a Domain Controller, please check http://help.sap.com/saphelp_nw70ehp1/helpdata/en/44/b4a0a77acc11d1899e0000e829fbbd/frameset.htm In relation with SAP BW, see SAP note https://service.sap.com/sap/support/notes/1369301 for more information.

Figure 203: Promoting BO objects with CTS I

2012


525


TBI30

Figure 204: Promoting BO objects with CTS II

526


2012

TBI30


Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Configure the LCM • Create and monitor “Promotion Jobs” for transporting BO objects from one BOE instance to another • Understand the requirements for and possibilities of integrating the LCM with Netweaver based CTS+

2012


527

Unit Summary

TBI30

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Configure the LCM • Create and monitor “Promotion Jobs” for transporting BO objects from one BOE instance to another • Understand the requirements for and possibilities of integrating the LCM with Netweaver based CTS+

528


2012

Unit 14 Translation Management Unit Overview


Understand the concepts of multilingual reporting and the basic functionality and features of the TMT. Know which objects can be translated. Understand the basic workflow of working with the TMT and a Business Layer. Understand the process of translating documents.

Unit Contents Lesson: Lesson: Lesson: Lesson:

2012

Multilingual Reporting with the Translation Management Tool .530 Resources that can be translated ..................................537 Translating a Business Layer .......................................541 Translating Documents ..............................................544


529

Unit 14: Translation Management

TBI30

Lesson: Multilingual Reporting with the Translation Management Tool Lesson Overview This lesson introduces you to the Translation Management Tool (TMT) and how to create multilingual reporting environments with it.


Understand the concepts of multilingual reporting and the basic functionality and features of the TMT.

Business Example You are working for an international company which wants to publish the corporate reporting to different geographical regions with different countries. Each country wants to have the corporate reporting in the local language. You have to set up the process of translating all necessary objects. You decide to do this with the Translation Management Tool that comes with SAP BI.

Overview of the TMT

Figure 205: Overview of the TMT

For a multilingual audience, a universe or report designer can create one document and translate it in multiple languages with the translation management tool instead of creating a universe or document in each language. The translations are saved in the universe and report documents, and displayed in the reader's language at reporting time.

530


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Multilingual Reporting with the Translation Management Tool

For importing from the repository the content to translate, the tool uses the Translation Server to communicate with the other modules. Refer to the Administration Guide for more information about the translation server. Content that is imported is stored locally in the TMGR format. The TMGR format file is also used to manage the exchanges between the translation management tool and the translation server.

Figure 206: Features of the TMT

Features of the tool include: • • • • •

• •

•

2012

Ability to translate metadata in most SAP BusinessObjects resources: universes, Web Intelligence documents, and Crystal reports. An interface designed for in-house translations. A format editor to easily define custom date, time, and number formats. Ability to manage approximately 130 locales. Enterprise deployment, with full integration with SAP BusinessObjects Enterprise including support for all Central Management Server (CMS) authentication modes and a standalone mode. Mid Market (Small-scale) or Local deployment with no repository. Collaboration with external translators using XLIFF (XML Localization Interchange File Format) files. This format is used by professional translators and is compatible with many translation tools. Ability to perform concurrent and offline translation.


531


TBI30

Figure 207: Terminology used in the Translation Management Tool

Figure 208: The User Interface

The Translation Editor Window When the tool starts for the first time, the window displays the three most commonly used views: the Translation Editor, Text Editor, and Language Management views.

532


2012

TBI30


You can customize the window to display other views when you need them: the Cell Properties, Filter and Help views. The menu bar contains the command menus: • • • • •

File with commands to open, save, import, and export files. Edit with commonly used text editing commands. Tools with commands to re-enter login information and change password. Window with commands to open and close views and set application preferences. Help with commands to display the translation management tool help in a separate window, and to open the Help view.

A toolbar below the menu bar contains icons: • • •

For command shortcuts that let you perform menu commands with a single click For commonly used text editing commands To display the different translation management tool views

The function of each icon displays as a tool tip when you hover the pointer over the icon. A status indicator at the bottom of the translation management tool window shows the status of the connection to the Central Management Server. The Language Management View The Language Management view lets you add and manage the languages in your document. For information on the tasks you can perform in the Language Management view, see the Related Topics. The list of Available Languages on the left of the Language Management view displays all languages supported by the tool and lets you select languages to add to your document. In the application preferences, you can define frequently used languages so that they appear at the top of the list. The Selected Languages table on the right lists the languages that you have selected for your document. By default, a column for each selected language displays in the Translation Editor view. The following information applies to each language that you add to the document:

2012


533


TBI30

COLUMN

Description

View

The View check box lets you select whether or not to display the language in a column in the Translation Editor view.

Translated

The Translated column displays the percentage of the content that has been translated (cells that have a status of NEEDS_REVIEW_TRANSLATION, NEEDS_REVIEW_L10N, NEEDS_REVIEW_ADAPTATION, TRANSLATED, SIGNED_OFF, or FINAL).

Visible

The Visible check box lets you define that the language is ready to be viewed in reports. Before a language can be viewed, it must be exported back to the original document.

Fallback

The Fallback option lets you define the language to display when a translation is not available in the Preferred Viewing Language. You must set the language to Visible before you can set it as the fallback language. You can define only one substitution language in a document.

The Text Editor The Text Editor view lets you translate a string which is too long to be viewed in the Translation Editor cell. The Text Editor view appears by default on the right in the translation management tool window. When you select a cell in the “Translation Editor” view, the content of the cell displays in the Translation box of the Text Editor view where you can edit it. Note: You cant edit the original language. The associated source language content displays in the Source box of the Text Editor view and cannot be edited. For Web Intelligence documents, comments for the translator appear in the Notes box. You cannot edit the comments. The Filter View The Filter view lets you filter the rows that display for a language in the Translation Editor list view. For each language in the document (one language at a time), you can choose to display strings with one status, all, or a combination of statuses.

534


2012

TBI30


When the Filter view is activated, the Translation Editor displays in list view. The Properties View The Cell Properties view displays the properties of a cell in the Translation Editor view, and lets you change the status of a cell. The Cell Properties view displays the following properties of the current cell in the Translation Editor view: Property

Description

Name (Description, Format)

The contents of the cell: the text string or format definition.

Status

The XLIFF translation status of the selected cell. A drop-down list lets you change the status.

Last Updated

The date and time the contents or status of the cell was last changed.

Setting Preferences You can set preferences for: • • •

•

• •

The product interface language when using the tool The default folders for documents and XLIFF files. The language to add automatically to a new resource to translate. This locale is added when the strings to translate are retrieved from the resource in the translation management tool. The languages you use frequently in your document. These languages appear at the top of the list of available languages in the Language Management view. The Auto-fill options define if a new locale must be added by copying the content of another locale. The date-time and number values to use when displaying format examples in the tool.

The preferences settings apply every time you start the tool, regardless of your login information.

2012


535


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the concepts of multilingual reporting and the basic functionality and features of the TMT.

536


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Resources that can be translated

Lesson: Resources that can be translated Lesson Overview This lesson gives an overview about which objects can be translated.


Know which objects can be translated.

Business Example

Figure 209: Overview of Objects that Can be Translated

2012


537


TBI30

Figure 210: Example Translating WebIntelligence Reports

You can use the translation management tool to translate report metadata (.wid files) created with Web Intelligence XI 3.0 or later. This metadata includes: • • • • • •

Report names Query names or data provider names Prompt texts Local variable names Alerter names and descriptions Content in an Web Intelligence formula (for example in a table cell), an alerter message, or a report variable (if requested using the GetLocalized function).

By default, the content of report formulas in Web Intelligence documents is not translated. To make strings in a report formula available for translation in the translation management tool, the report designer must use the GetLocalized function when designing the report. For more info about the GetLocalized function, see the Using Functions, Formulas and Calculations in SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence Guide.

538


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Resources that can be translated

Figure 211: Example Translating Dashboards

2012


539


TBI30

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Know which objects can be translated.

540


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Translating a Business Layer

Lesson: Translating a Business Layer Lesson Overview This lesson demonstrates how to do a simple translation of a Business Layer.


Understand the basic workflow of working with the TMT and a Business Layer.

Business Example

Figure 212: Opening a Project for Translation

2012


541


TBI30

Figure 213: Add Target Languages

Figure 214: Translate Texts and Set the Status of Translation for a Text

When changing the translation status, click Apply. You can save your work locally to disk using the Floppydisc button. Once finished the translation, you export the translation to the BOE server by hitting the Export to repository button in the toolbar.

542


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Translating a Business Layer

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the basic workflow of working with the TMT and a Business Layer.

2012


543


TBI30

Lesson: Translating Documents Lesson Overview This lesson gives an overview of the activities to be realized to translate documents in the BOE.


Understand the process of translating documents.

Business Example Adding and Removing Languages in Your Document 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6.

Import the content to translate from a resource. Decide before if you want to use the Autofill option. Open the Language Management view if it is not already open. Select Window → Language Management View. To add a language, select the language in the Available Languages list and click the right arrow. The language is added to the Selected Languages list. A new column for the language is added to the Translation Editor view. If the Autofill option is turned on, the translation management tool fills the column with content in the Autofill source language. To hide the column for the new language in the “Translation Editor” view, clear the View check box. To remove a language from the document, select the language in the Selected Languages list and click the left arrow. The translation management tool asks you to confirm the remove action. Caution: When you remove a language, all translated content for the language is lost.

Setting the fallback language 1. 2. 3. 4.

544

Open the Language Management view if it is not already open. Select Window → Language Management View. In the Language Management view, select Visible for the language. Click the Fallback option for the language. Select File → Save.


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Translating Documents

Export the document to the repository for the language to be available to the query and reporting applications as a fallback language. Translating texts in the translation editor 1.

2.

In the “Translation Editor”, in the column with the language to translate, click the cell containing the content you want to translate. If the language was added with the Autofill option on, the cell contains the Autofill source language content. Otherwise the column is blank. Enter the translation by typing over the previous string. When you click the cell, the content appears in the Text Editor view. Once you enter the translation, the status of the cell is automatically set to TRANSLATED. Note: You cannot type into cells that contain date and numeric formats. To set a format, right click the cell and select a default format, or use the Format Editor to create a custom format.

3.

To move to the next cell to translate, click the cell. Hint: While you are translating, in addition to the standard editing commands on the Edit menu, you can press Escape to cancel the current translation and Ctrl + Z to undo the last translation.

4.

Select File → Save.

Figure 215: About the Translation Status

2012


545


TBI30

A status is assigned to the content of each cell to be translated in every language. The translation management tool uses the ten standard XML Localization Interchange File Format (XLIFF) statuses, grouped into two categories. Note: •

•

In BI launch pad, users are able to see the translation in BI launch pad, even when the status of that particular translation is “Needs Translation”. Localization (L10N) refers to the translation of text and the adaptation of non-textual content (for example, date formats).

You can use some or all of these statuses, depending on your organization and process. The translation management tool sets statuses automatically and changes the display in the editor at certain stages in the translation process. • • •

•

When you add a language, the cells have a status in the Needs Translation category. The content appears in blue italic font in the Translation Editor. Content that has been added to or edited in a previously translated document has an XLIFF status of NEW. The content appears in blue italic font in bold. Once you have translated the content of a cell, the status automatically changes to TRANSLATED, which is in the Translation Visible category. The content appears in black normal font. When you set a language to Ready for use and export the document to the Content Management Server, strings with a status in the Translation Visible category are visible in the client query and reporting tools.

Other activities You can in addition: • • • •

546

Translate string in the Text Editor Search and Replace Set default formats for numbers and dates via the Format Editor Manage the status of a translation


2012

TBI30

Lesson: Translating Documents

Lesson Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the process of translating documents.

2012


547

Unit Summary

TBI30

Unit Summary You should now be able to: • Understand the concepts of multilingual reporting and the basic functionality and features of the TMT. • Know which objects can be translated. • Understand the basic workflow of working with the TMT and a Business Layer. • Understand the process of translating documents.

548


2012

TBI30

Course Summary

Course Summary You should now be able to: • • •

2012

Describe the integration of SAP NetWeaver BW and SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence tools. Describe how the SAP NetWeaver BW concepts are being mapped to SAP BusinessObjects software. Describe the concept of the semantic layer and universes, SAP BusinessObjects Web Intelligence, Analysis, Dashboards, and SAP Crystal Reports. Also connectivity and security integration with SAP BusinessObjects BI Platform, Publications, and integration into SAP NetWeaver Portal are in focus of this course.


549

Course Summary

550

TBI30


2012

Feedback SAP AG has made every effort in the preparation of this course to ensure the accuracy and completeness of the materials. If you have any corrections or suggestions for improvement, please record them in the appropriate place in the course evaluation.

2012


551

TBI30 SAP Business Intelligence Solutions with SAP Business Warehouse

Recommend Documents